Tissue-Tek Cryo3® ®

Microtome/Cryostat

Service
Manual
115V
Models
5800, Basic
5801, D
5802, DM
 © 2009 Sakura Finetek USA, Inc.

All Rights Reserved

Printed in U.S.A.

Manufactured by:
Sakura Finetek USA, Inc.
Torrance, CA 90501 U.S.A.
Made in U.S.A.

0001708-01 Rev. A

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION................................. 1-1
1-1 OVERVIEW ...................................................... 1-1
1-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION .............................. 1-1
1-3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ................................ 1-2
1-3-1 Cryostat Cabinet ......................................... 1-2
1-3-2 Refrigerated Chamber (Figure 1-3)............. 1-3
1-3-3 Microtome................................................... 1-4
1-3-4 Main Electronics ......................................... 1-4
1-3-5 Auxiliary Electronics .................................. 1-5
1-3-6 Refrigeration System .................................. 1-5
1-3-7 Disinfection System .................................... 1-6
1-4 CRYOSTAT SPECIFICATIONS ...................... 1-7
1-4-1 Power Requirements ................................... 1-7
1-4-2 Circuit Breaker Ratings............................... 1-7
1-4-3 Noise Level ................................................. 1-7
1-4-4 Refrigerant .................................................. 1-7
1-4-5 Chamber Temperature Range ..................... 1-7
1-4-6 Cryobar Temperature .................................. 1-7
1-4-7 Environmental Requirements...................... 1-8
1-4-8 Dimensions ................................................. 1-8
1-4-9 Instrument Life Expectancy ........................ 1-8
1-5 MICROTOME SPECIFICATIONS................... 1-8
1-5-1 Models ........................................................ 1-8
1-5-2 Sectioning Drive ......................................... 1-8
1-5-3 Retraction/Advance Speed Selection .......... 1-8
1-5-4 Motorized Sectioning Speed Range............ 1-8
1-5-5 Specimen Size............................................. 1-8
1-5-6 Specimen Orientation ................................. 1-8
1-5-7 Travel Range............................................... 1-8
1-5-8 Sectioning Range ........................................ 1-8
1-5-9 Dimensions ................................................. 1-8
1-5-10 Instrument Life ........................................... 1-8
1-6 SAFETY STANDARDS.................................... 1-8
SECTION 2 OPERATING SYSTEM ....................... 2-1
2-1 GENERAL......................................................... 2-1
2-2 CONTROL PANEL OPERATION ................... 2-1
2-2-1 Main Control Panel (Figure 2-1)................ 2-1
2-2-2 Left Control Panel (Figure 2-2) .................. 2-2
2-2-3 Right Control Panel (Figure 2-3) ............... 2-2
2-3 CONTROLLER STATES.................................. 2-3
2-3-1 Power-On Self Test..................................... 2-3
2-3-2 Power Failure.............................................. 2-3
2-3-3 Refrigeration/Defrost System ..................... 2-3
2-3-4 Refrigeration/Defrost System ..................... 2-4
SECTION 3 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION......... 3-1
3-1 GENERAL......................................................... 3-1
3-2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM................................... 3-1
3-2-1 AC Input Power .......................................... 3-1
REV 11JUN09
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3-2-2 DC Power Supplies......................................3-1
3-2-3 OPTO22 Backplane and SSR Output
Modules .......................................................3-3
3-3 CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY .................. 3-4
3-3-1 Power Supply...............................................3-4
3-3-2 Reset Control ...............................................3-6
3-3-3 Program EPROM.........................................3-6
3-3-4 PCB Connections.........................................3-6
3-3-5 Microcontroller Internal Peripherals............3-6
3-3-6 Graphic LCD Display ..................................3-8
3-3-7 A/D Converters............................................3-8
3-3-8 Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) Outputs .....3-9
3-3-9 Port 4 and Bit Port 1.5 ...............................3-11
3-3-10 RS-232 Port ...............................................3-11
3-3-11 External Peripherals...................................3-12
3-4 SIGNAL BREAKOUT PCB............................ 3-16
3-4-1 Analog Signal Breakout PCB ....................3-16
3-4-2 Digital Signal Breakout PCB .....................3-18
3-4-3 Microtome Signal Breakout PCB ..............3-18
3-5 KEYPAD / DISPLAY ASSEMBLIES ............ 3-19
3-5-1 LCD Graphic Display ................................3-19
3-5-2 User Interface Membrane Panels ...............3-19
3-5-3 User I/F Signal Breakout PCB...................3-19
3-6 MOTORIZED SECTIONING CONTROLS
AND SENSORS (DM models only)................ 3-20
3-6-1 Handwheel Lock Switch............................3-20
3-6-2 Emergency Motor Off (EMO) Switch .......3-20
3-6-3 Foot Switch................................................3-20
3-7 HEATERS ....................................................... 3-20
3-7-1 Defrost Heaters ..........................................3-20
3-7-2 Rim Heaters ...............................................3-21
3-7-3 Window Glass Heater ................................3-21
3-7-4 Catalyst Heater...........................................3-21
3-8 CRYO+ DEVICE ............................................ 3-22
3-8-1 7-Position Sealed Connector Plug .............3-22
3-9 FLUORESCENT LAMP AND BALLAST..... 3-22
3-10 SOLENOID VALVES..................................... 3-22
3-10-1 Refrigeration System Solenoid Valves ......3-23
3-10-2 Auto-Disinfection System Solenoid
Valves ........................................................3-23
3-11 BALL VALVES .............................................. 3-24
3-11-1 Water Drain Ball Valve .............................3-24
3-11-2 Ozone Sensor Isolation Ball Valve ............3-24
3-12 PRESSURE SWITCHES................................. 3-24
3-12-1 Chamber Pressure Switch ..........................3-24
3-12-2 Pump Pressure Switch ...............................3-25
3-13 VACUUM PUMP/PUMP SPEED
CONTROLLER ............................................... 3-25
3-13-1 Vacuum Pump ...........................................3-25
3-13-2 Pump Speed Controller PCB .....................3-25
3-14 MICROTOME SYSTEM ................................ 3-25
3-14-1 Microtome Position Opto-Isolators............3-26
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3-14-2 Stepper Motors and Motor Drivers ........... 3-26
3-15 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM.......................... 3-27
3-15-1 Normal Cooling Mode .............................. 3-27
3-15-2 Temperature Regulation Mode.................. 3-29
3-15-3 Defrost Mode ............................................ 3-29
3-16 AUTO-DISINFECTION SYSTEM ................. 3-30
3-16-1 Overview................................................... 3-30
3-16-2 Chamber Depressurization Cycle (Pump
Down) ....................................................... 3-31
3-16-3 Ozone Generation Cycle ........................... 3-32
1-4-4 Chamber Pressure and Ambient
Atmospheric Monitoring ........................... 3-32
1-4-5 Ozone Sensor Test..................................... 3-32
1-4-6 Ozone Purge Cycle.................................... 3-32
1-4-7 Ozone Check ............................................. 3-33
1-4-8 Aborting an Auto-Disinfection Cycle ....... 3-34
1-17 OZONE SENSOR ............................................ 3-34
1-18 AUTO-DISINFECTION SYSTEM OZONE
GENERATION ELECTRONICS .................... 3-35
1-18-1 Ultraviolet (UV) Lamp.............................. 3-35
1-18-2 Cadmium Disulfide Photocell ................... 3-35
1-18-3 7-Position Sealed Connector ..................... 3-36
1-18-4 UV Lamp Ballast....................................... 3-36
1-18-5 UV Lamp Ballast Isolation Transformer... 3-36
1-18-6 Solenoid Driver and Timer PCB ............... 3-36
1-18-7 Window Lock Position Switch.................. 3-37
SECTION 4 GENERAL MAINTENANCE.............. 4-1
4-1 GENERAL ......................................................... 4-1
4-2 EXTERIOR MAINTENANCE .......................... 4-1
4-2-1 Cleaning the Ventilation Panels and the
Condenser Coils .......................................... 4-1
4-2-2 Cleaning and Disinfecting the Waste
Bottle........................................................... 4-1
4-3 REFRIGERATED CHAMBER ......................... 4-1
4-3-1 Cleaning and Disinfecting the Chamber ..... 4-1
4-3-2 Chemical Disinfection of the Chamber
(All Models) ................................................ 4-2
4-3-3 Cleaning the Drain ...................................... 4-3
4-3-4 Cleaning and Disinfecting the Accessories . 4-3
4-4 CLEANING THE BLADE HOLDER ............... 4-3
4-5 GENERAL MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST .... 4-4
4-6 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT ......................... 4-4
4-6-1 Window/Chamber Light Operational
Check .......................................................... 4-4
4-6-2 Subsystem Functional Tests ........................ 4-4
4-6-3 Settings Adjustment Tests ........................... 4-5
4-6-4 Temperature Stability Tests.............................. 4-11
4-6-5 Normal Operation (Sectioning) Test ................ 4-11
4-6-6 Defrost Time Test............................................. 4-12
4-6-7 Ozone Concentration Test (D and DM
Models Only) ................................................... 4-13
4-6-8 Handwheel Torque Test ................................... 4-13
4-6-9 Diagnostic Mode .............................................. 4-13
SECTION 5 SERVICE ............................................... 5-1
5-1 GENERAL ......................................................... 5-1
5-2 UNPACKING AND REPACKING ................... 5-1
5-2-1 Unpacking ................................................... 5-1
ii CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
5-2-2 Repacking ................................................... 5-1
5-3 DECONTAMINATION..................................... 5-1
5-4 GENERAL REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS ............ 5-1
5-4-1 Preparation for Servicing ............................ 5-1
5-4-2 Wiring Repair / Cable Replacement............ 5-1
5-5 CABINET SERVICING .................................... 5-2
5-5-1 Waste Bottle................................................ 5-2
5-5-2 Footrest ....................................................... 5-2
5-5-3 Front Cover Assembly ................................ 5-2
5-5-4 Access Panels.............................................. 5-3
5-6 TOP COVER SERVICING ............................... 5-3
5-6-1 Removal ...................................................... 5-3
5-6-2 Restrainers................................................... 5-4
5-6-3 Door Catch .................................................. 5-4
5-6-4 User I/F Breakout PCB ............................... 5-4
5-6-5 LCD Display ............................................... 5-5
5-6-6 Membrane Panel Servicing ......................... 5-5
5-6-7 Pump Speed Potentiometer ......................... 5-7
5-6-8 Vertical Speed Potentiometer...................... 5-7
5-6-9 Emergency Stop Switch .............................. 5-8
5-6-10 Keeper ......................................................... 5-8
5-6-11 Installation................................................... 5-8
5-7 HANDWHEEL ASSEMBLY SERVICING ...... 5-9
5-8 TUB ASSEMBLY SERVICING ..................... 5-11
5-8-1 Heat Extractor Holder ............................... 5-11
5-8-2 Vacuum Debris Filter................................ 5-11
5-8-3 Window Return Spring ............................. 5-11
5-8-4 Window Tracks ......................................... 5-12
5-8-5 Chamber Thermistor ................................. 5-12
5-9 WINDOW ASSEMBLY SERVICING............ 5-13
5-9-1 Removal .................................................... 5-13
5-9-2 Window Guide Roller ............................... 5-13
5-9-3 Installation................................................. 5-13
5-10 HEAT EXTRACTOR SERVICING ................ 5-13
5-10-1 Heat Extractor Holder ............................... 5-13
5-11 KNIFE HOLDER ASSEMBLY SERVICING 5-13
5-11-1 Removal .................................................... 5-14
5-11-2 Installation................................................. 5-14
5-12 CHUCK ASSEMBLY SERVICING ............... 5-14
5-12-1 Removal / Disassembly............................. 5-14
5-12-2 Knob Replacement.................................... 5-14
5-12-3 Lever Replacement ................................... 5-14
5-12-4 Assembly / Installation.............................. 5-14
5-13 EVAPORATOR SHIELD................................ 5-15
5-13-1 Removal .................................................... 5-15
5-13-2 Installation................................................. 5-15
5-14 ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT ASSEMBLY
SERVICING ............................................................... 5-15
5-14-1 Removal .................................................... 5-15
5-14-2 Installation................................................. 5-15
5-15 MICROTOME ASSEMBLY SERVICING ..... 5-15
5-15-1 Microtome Assembly................................ 5-15
5-15-2 Microtome Diaphragms ............................ 5-16
5-15-3 Microtome Breakout PCB......................... 5-17
5-16 WATER DRAIN ASSEMBLY SERVICING.. 5-17
5-17 OZONE DESTRUCT ASSEMBLY
SERVICING .................................................... 5-17
5-17-1 General Plumbing Repairs ........................ 5-17
5-17-2 Bottle......................................................... 5-17
5-17-3 Muffler ...................................................... 5-17
REV 11JUN09

5-17-4 Pump Vent Valve (V7) connection (J111)
Harness Assembly..................................... 5-18
5-17-5 Chamber Pressure Switch ......................... 5-18
5-17-6 Catalyst Air Flow Switch (PT3)
Connection Harness Assembly ................. 5-18
5-17-7 Catalyst Heater (HTR11) Connection
(J91) Harness Assembly ........................... 5-19
5-17-8 Catalyst Assembly .................................... 5-19
5-17-9 Pump Return Valve (V6) (J109) Harness
Assembly .................................................. 5-20
5-17-10 Filter Valve (V4) Connection (J87)
Harness Assembly..................................... 5-20
5-17-11 Catalyst Valve (V8) Connection (J136)
Harness Assembly..................................... 5-21
5-18 REFRIGERATION ASSEMBLY
SERVICING .................................................... 5-22
5-18-1 General Repair and Replacement
Procedures................................................. 5-22
5-18-2 Thermostatic Expansion Valve ................. 5-23
5-18-3 Filter Driers............................................... 5-23
5-18-4 Check Valve.............................................. 5-24
5-18-5 Pressure Regulator Crank Case................. 5-24
5-18-6 Schraeder Valves ...................................... 5-24
5-18-7 Suction Accumulator ................................ 5-24
5-18-8 Sight Glass ................................................ 5-25
5-18-9 Heat Exchanger......................................... 5-25
REV 11JUN09
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................... 6-1
6-1 GENERAL......................................................... 6-1
6-1-1 Diagnostic Mode..........................................6-1
6-2 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES ............................................................ 6-1
6-3 MONITORED PARAMETERS ...................... 6-12
6-3-1 Error Messages and Instrument States .......6-12
6-3-2 Troubleshooting Non-Critical Warnings ...6-12
6-3-3 Troubleshooting Critical Errors .................6-12
SECTION 7 ILLUSTRATED PARTS
BREAKDOWN ........................................................... 7-1
7-1 GENERAL......................................................... 7-1
7-2 HOW TO USE THE IPB ................................... 7-1
7-3 ILLUSTRATED PARTS LISTS ....................... 7-1
7-3-2 Recommended Spare Parts List ......................... 7-1
Table 7-1. ILLUSTRATED PARTS LISTS ................. 7-2
Table 7-2. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST.. 7-4
SECTION 8 DIAGRAMS .......................................... 8-1
8-1 GENERAL......................................................... 8-1
8-2 DIAGRAMS ...................................................... 8-1
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

iv CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1-1 OVERVIEW
This manual provides servicing and repair
information for the Tissue-Tek Cryo3
Microtome/Cryostat. The models covered by this
manual are:
• Model 5800 Tissue-Tek Cryo3
Basic Configuration (115 VAC)
• Model 5801 Tissue-Tek Cryo3 D
Cryostat with Ozone Disinfection System (115
VAC)
• Model 5802 Tissue-Tek Cryo3 DM
Cryostat with Ozone Disinfection System and
Motorized Sectioning (115 VAC)
This manual is divided into eight sections, as
follows:
• Section 1 - INTRODUCTION: provides an
overview of the scope and arrangement of the
Service Manual, and a general physical
description of the Cryo3.
• Section 2 - OPERATING SYSTEM: describes
the Cryo3 operating controls and indicators, and
provides a general functional description of
system operation.
• Section 3 - PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION:
provides detailed principles of operation for
Cryo3 refrigeration and electrical systems.
• Section 4 - GENERAL MAINTENANCE:
provides general maintenance and testing
procedures for the Cryo3.
• Section 5 - SERVICE: provides the removal,
disassembly, repair, assembly and installation of
replaceable parts and assemblies.
REV 11JUN09
INTRODUCTION
• Section 6 - TROUBLESHOOTING: provides
the procedures to troubleshoot equipment
malfunctions and determine the service actions
necessary to return the equipment to serviceable
condition.
• Section 7 - ILLUSTRATED PARTS
BREAKDOWN: provides an illustrated listing
of replaceable parts and assemblies for the
Cryo3.
• Section 8 - DIAGRAMS: provides schematic
diagrams, wiring diagrams and flow diagrams
for the Cryo3 electrical and refrigeration
systems.
All pages, paragraphs and graphics in this manual
are numbered by section to facilitate cross-
referencing between sections. Pages are 3-hole
punched for insertion into a standard 3-ring binder,
allowing for easy insertion of service bulletins, and
changes or additions to manual content.
1-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Tissue-Tek Cryo3 is a microprocessor
controlled precision instrument used to freeze and
section tissue specimens in preparation for
microscopic examination. The basic instrument,
Model 5800, consists essentially of a Cabinet with a
refrigerated Chamber containing the Cryobar,
Blade Holder and Microtome Chuck. The Cabinet
also houses the Microtome, Microtome drive
system, refrigeration system and control electronics.
The Microtome, in conjunction with the Blade
Holder, accomplishes the actual sectioning of frozen
tissue specimens. Section thickness is adjustable
from 1 to 99 micrometers, in 1 micrometer
increments. A Chuck associated with the Microtome
secures the frozen tissue specimen for sectioning.
Operation of the Microtome is accomplished using a
manual Handwheel, or the optional automated
sectioning system.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 1-1
INTRODUCTION
D model 5801 incorporates an automated
disinfection system that utilizes ozone to disinfect
the surfaces inside the Chamber, as well as a vacuum
debris removal system that removes debris and
trimmings accumulated on the Blade Holder and
other areas of the Chamber.
In addition to the automated disinfection and debris
removal systems, DM model 5802 is also equipped
with a Motorized Sectioning System, which allows
for intermittent or continuous sectioning of
specimens, as selected by the operator.
1-3 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
The major components of the Cryo3 are described
and illustrated in the following paragraphs.
1-3-1 Cryostat Cabinet
1-3-1-1 Cabinet Front (Figure 1-1)
Figure 1-1
1-2 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
• Glass Window .1. — Slides open to provide
access into the Chamber; heated to reduce
condensation, allowing an unobstructed view
into the chamber when closed. For D and DM
models only: the operator may selectively lock
the window to prevent access to the Chamber.
When the window is completely closed, a
locking mechanism is automatically engaged
during a Disinfection cycle.
• Refrigerated Chamber .2. — Temperature-
controlled environment for freezing and
sectioning tissue specimens.
• Work Surface .3. — Flat work area for
microscope slides, accessories, etc.
• Emergency Motor Power OFF (EMO) Button
.4. — For DM models only, a latched
pushbutton which, when pressed, immediately
removes power from the Microtome vertical
drive motor and automatically stops any vertical
movement of the Microtome. Power is also
removed from the horizontal and vertical stepper
motor drivers. To restore power, the pushbutton
must be manually rotated to release it from the
latched “OFF” position.
• Control Panels .5. — Provide the controls and
indicators necessary to operate the Cryo3. Keys
provide tactile feedback and an optional audible
“beep” when activated. Refer to SECTION 2,
OPERATING SYSTEM for details.
• Handwheel .6. — Manually controls motion of
the Microtome. A brake tab locks and unlocks
the Handwheel. A sensor detects the position of
the Brake Tab.
• Waste Bottle .7. — Collects liquid waste and
debris flowing from the refrigerated Chamber
during the Defrost Cycle; 2-liter capacity.
• Foot Rest .8. — Area for the operator to rest
his/her feet while sectioning specimens.
• Lockdown Feet .9. —Prevent the instrument
from rolling during use. May be disengaged to
facilitate instrument relocation.
REV 11JUN09

1-3-1-2 Cabinet Rear (Figure 1-2)
Figure 1-2
• Power Switch .1. — Turns the instrument
power on and off.
• Power Cord Connector .2. — Accepts the
instrument end of the power cord.
• Main Electronics Access Panel .3. — Provides
service access to instrument electronics.
• Auxiliary Electronics Access Panel .4. — for
D and DM models only: provides service access
to instrument active electronics.
1-3-2 Refrigerated Chamber
(Figure 1-3)
• Cryobar .1. — Freezing component; holds three
Removable Plates for freezing specimens.
REV 11JUN09
INTRODUCTION
Cryo+ section of the Cryobar freezes an
additional 20°C lower in temperature within five
minutes of activation.
• Chuck .2. — Secures a mounted tissue
specimen to the Microtome.
• Diaphragm .3. — seals the Chamber where the
Microtome and Chuck interface.
• Blade Holder .4. — Securely holds low-profile
disposable blades (when Blade Plate Adapter is
installed) or high-profile disposable blades
(when the Blade Plate Adapter is removed).
• Anti-Roll Rake .5. — Attaches to the Chuck;
helps prevent the leading edge of the specimen
from curling while “teasing” the section forward
for mounting on a microscope slide.
• Anti-Roll Plate .6. — Mounted on the Blade
Holder; helps prevent the leading edge of the
specimen from curling while “teasing” the
section forward for easy mounting onto a
microscope slide.
• Temperature Probe .7. — monitors the
Chamber temperature at the blade level.
• Vacuum Debris Filter Assembly .8. (D and
DM models only) — Removes debris and
unwanted trimmings, accumulated during
sectioning, from the Blade Holder. Consists of a
microbial debris filter, coarse debris filter and
vacuum hose.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 1-3
INTRODUCTION

Figure 1-3
1-3-3 Microtome 1-3-4-2 Top Cover Assembly

The Microtome, in conjunction with the stationary · LCD Display — 240 x 64 pixel graphic LCD
Blade Holder, accomplishes the actual sectioning of used to display all user interface messages.
frozen tissue specimens. Mounted tissue specimens
are secured in the Chuck. The Cryo3 utilizes one of · Membrane Panels — provide the means for
two Microtomes; the semi-automated Microtome programming user-selectable operating parame-
(for Basic and D models) or the fully-automated ters, selecting system operating modes and
Microtome (for DM models). controlling ancillary equipment (vacuum debris
removal system, ozone disinfection system,
1-3-4 Main Electronics etc.); specific controls and indicators available
depend on the instrument model (Basic, D, DM).
The main electronics for the Cryo3 are located in the
· User I/F Signal Breakout PCB — distributes
Top Cover Assembly, Top Power Box Assembly,
the Main Controller PCB keypads matrix and
Main Power Box Assembly, Microtome Assembly
LED signals to the user interface membrane
and Frame Assembly.
panels.
1-3-4-1 Top Power Box Assembly
1-3-4-3 Microtome Assembly
· Main Controller PCB — 8-bit 8031-based
· Microtome Signal Breakout PCB — receives
microcontroller; incorporates the software and
input signals from the Microtome limit switches
firmware necessary to control operation of the
for application to the Main Controller PCB.
Cryo3 system; receive user-directed command
inputs via the membrane panels and provides
visual feedback of instrument status via the LCD
display screen (see paragraph 1-3-4-2 for
details).

1-4 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


1-3-4-4 Frame Assembly
• Analog Signal Breakout PCB — receives
analog input signals from devices located
throughout the instrument for application to the
Main Controller PCB.
• Digital Signal Breakout PCB — receives
digital input signals from devices located
throughout the instrument for application to the
Main Controller PCB.
1-3-4-5 Main Power Box Assembly
• 24VDC Power Supply Assembly (PS3) —
provides operating power to the Microtome
Horizontal Motor Driver and refrigeration
system hot gas valve.
• TEC Power Supply Assembly — provides
operating power for the Cryo+ function.
• OPTO22 Backplane — mounts the AC and DC
Solid State Output modules used to control
operation of various devices throughout the
instrument; provides for interconnection
between the Main Controller PCB and the
associated devices.
1-3-5 Auxiliary Electronics
Auxiliary electronics support the Auto-Disinfection
System (for D and DM models) and Motorized
Sectioning System (for DM models). The auxiliary
electronics for the Cryo3 are located in the Option
Power Box Assembly, Main Power Box Assembly,
Top Power Box Assembly, Top Cover Assembly
(see paragraph 1-3-4-2 for details) and Main Power
Box Assembly.
1-3-5-1 Main Power Box Assembly
• 24VDC Power Supply Assembly (PS4) —
(D and DM models) provides operating power to
the window lock solenoid, catalyst valve, pump
vent valve, pump return valve, debris filter valve
and ozone sensor PCB electronics.
1-3-5-2 Top Power Box Assembly
• Solenoid Driver/Timer PCB — controls the
operation of the latching window lock solenoid,
and provides the 65-minute redundant timer
function for the UV lamp.
REV 11JUN09
INTRODUCTION
1-3-5-3 Optional Power Box Assembly
• Microtome Power Supply Assembly (PS1) —
(DM models only) provides operating power to
the Microtome Vertical Motor Driver.
• Pump Speed Control PCB — provides vacuum
strength control for the vacuum pump associated
with the Vacuum Debris Removal system.
1-3-6 Refrigeration System
• Compressor — receives low pressure / low
temperature refrigerant vapor from the
evaporator, raises the refrigerant pressure and
temperature, and discharges the refrigerant into
the condenser.
• Condenser — located on the lower left-hand
side of the instrument cabinet; transfers heat
absorbed by the refrigeration system to outside
air. A cooling fan attached to the back side of
the condenser draws outside air through the
condenser fins, dissipating the heat to the
atmosphere. Air is exhausted out the right-hand
side of the instrument cabinet.
• TXV Valve — metering device placed in the
liquid (refrigerant) line between the condenser
and the evaporator; produces a pressure
difference between the high-side and low-side of
the refrigeration system, and regulates the flow
of refrigerant through the system. The amount of
refrigerant flow through the TXV valve is
regulated by the super heat of the refrigerant
vapor exhausted from the evaporator (as sensed
by a temperature bulb mounted on the
evaporator exhaust pipe). The higher the super
heat temperature, the wider the valve is opened.
The super heat setting of the TXV valve is
adjustable; clockwise adjustment increases the
super heat setting (the evaporator runs warmer),
counterclockwise adjustment decreases the super
heat setting. The default setting is 3°C.
• Evaporator — heat exchanger located inside
the refrigerated chamber. Low temperature
refrigerant flowing through the evaporator tubes
is heated by higher-temperature chamber air
surrounding the evaporator fins, causing the
liquid refrigerant to boil into vapor. When all
liquid refrigerant has been boiled off, any
additional heat absorbed by the refrigerant vapor
becomes super heat.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 1-5
INTRODUCTION
• Heat Exchanger — suction line liquid heat
exchanger, performs subcooling of liquid
refrigerant for low temperature operation. The
heat exchanger transfers heat from the liquid
refrigerant leaving the condenser to the suction
gas leaving the evaporator.
• Sight Glass — moisture-indicating “window”
placed in the liquid line to provide a visual
indication of the condition of the refrigerant. In
normal operation, the sight glass will show no
bubbles (indicating a properly charged system)
and the refrigerant will appear green in color
(indicating no moisture).
• Filter-Dryers — provide for filtering and
moisture removal of refrigerant vapor; one filter
is located in the liquid line ahead of the heat
exchanger to protect the TXV valve, the second
filter is located in the liquid line ahead of the
temperature control valve.
• Accumulator — suction line accumulator
located ahead of the compressor to trap any
liquid refrigerant that has not evaporated;
ensures that the compressor operates on
refrigerant vapor only.
• Crankcase Regulator — located on the suction
line ahead of the compressor; protects the
compressor motor against overload when high-
pressure vapor is present (during startup or after
defrost).
• Check Valve — located on the liquid line
between the compressor and the condenser;
prevents liquid refrigerant from flowing back
into the compressor.
• Solenoid Valve — normally-closed solenoid
valve used for refrigeration system capacity
control; when open, high pressure refrigerant gas
from the compressor outlet is applied directly to
the evaporator (bypassing the condenser and
TXV valve). The 1/16-inch orifice valve is used
to bypass hot gas to both the Cryobar and the
evaporator.
• Cryobar — the initial point in the refrigerated
chamber with which the vaporized refrigerant
makes contact. Due to the mass of the Cryobar,
its temperature lags the evaporator temperature.
In steady state, Cryobar temperature is roughly
the same as the evaporator temperature.
1-6 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
• Cryo+ Section — 3-inch by 3-inch section of
the Cryobar connected to a Thermo-Electronic
Cooler (TEC) device. When the TEC is
activated, the top surface of the Cryo+ section
cools to approximately 20°C cooler than the
Cryobar temperature.
• Temperature Probe — thermistor embedded in
a stainless steel sheath; monitors chamber
temperature at the blade level.
1-3-7 Disinfection System
• Glass Window — sliding two-pane glass
window provides access to the refrigerated
chamber; lock to prevent access during
disinfection. The window glass block the UV-A,
UV-B and UV-C radiation generated by the
ozone lamp to protect the operator and ancillary
personnel.
• Window Switch — senses the position of the
refrigerated chamber glass window; prevents
activation of the Auto-Disinfection System if the
window is open. In the event the window is
detected open during an auto-disinfection cycle,
the disinfection cycle aborts immediately, and
ozone is purged through the catalyst canister.
• Window Lock — prevents the refrigerated
chamber glass window from being opened
during an auto-disinfection cycle; position of the
window lock is monitored by an associated
window lock switch. Activation of the Auto-
Disinfection System is prevented if the window
lock is open. In the event the window lock is
detected open during an auto-disinfection cycle,
the disinfection cycle aborts immediately, and
ozone is purged through the catalyst canister.
• Window Seal — two-blade, one-way silicone
seal; seals contacting surfaces between the
refrigerated chamber and the glass window.
Depressurization of the refrigerated chamber
during disinfection prevents ozone leakage
through the seal.
• Chamber Seals — O-ring type seals associated
with the Microtome diaphragms; seat in grooves
in the refrigerated chamber and on the
Microtome shaft to prevent atmosphere from
escaping the sealed chamber during disinfection.
REV 11JUN09

• Vacuum Pump — maintains vacuum inside the
sealed refrigerated chamber during ozone
generation; circulates chamber atmosphere
through the catalyst canister during ozone purge.
• Ozone Lamp and Reflector — 37-watt high
output quartz tube UV lamp, located above the
evaporator inside the refrigerated chamber.
When power is applied to the UV lamp, the
lamp generates ultraviolet radiation (UV-C
energy) at a wavelength of 185 nm, and visible
light at a wavelength of 550 nm. Operational life
of the ozone lamp is 1000 cycles minimum.
• Lamp Ballast — operates under software
control to provide AC operating power to the
ozone lamp.
• Photocell — 550 nm cadmium sulfide (CdS)
photocell located next to the ozone lamp; senses
visible light emitted by the lamp to verify its
operation during the disinfection cycle.
• Sealed Connector — 7-position electrical
connector; provides the interface between the
lamp ballast and ozone lamp, and between the
photocell and the Cryo3 controller PCB.
• Solenoid Driver and Timer PCB — In the
event of software, lamp ballast or power control
SSR failure, interrupts AC power to the lamp
ballast 65 minutes after activation.
• Catalyst Canister — canister containing 1.6
lbs. of manganese dioxide (MnO2) provides for
catalytic conversion of ozone to oxygen during
ozone purge. Catalyst is capable of reducing
ozone concentration within the chamber
atmosphere from 1000 ppm to less than 0.05
ppm within five minutes (normal ozone destruct
cycle time is 10 minutes).
• Catalyst Heater — heats catalyst canister
during ozone purge to increase catalytic
conversion efficiency to greater than 99.9999%.
• Ozone Sensor — monitors ozone concentration
in the cabinet ambient atmosphere during ozone
generation to verify integrity of system seals
REV 11JUN09
INTRODUCTION
(potential leaks indicated by ozone concentration
in cabinet atmosphere > 0.2 ppm); verifies
adequate destruction of ozone (ozone concen-
tration in chamber atmosphere is <0.2 ppm)
following ozone purge. Activation of the Auto-
Disinfection System is prevented if the ozone
sensor is not functional (as determined by a
sensor test during ozone generation cycle). In
the event the ozone sensor is “triggered” during
an Auto-Disinfection cycle (ozone concentration
in the cabinet atmosphere > 0.2 ppm), the
system automatically enters the ozone purge
cycle.
• Plumbing and Flow Control Valves —
facilitate interconnection of the various
components of the Auto-Disinfection System,
and direct flow of chamber atmosphere through
the system.
1-4 CRYOSTAT
SPECIFICATIONS
1-4-1 Power Requirements
11.0 amps @ 115/120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
1-4-2 Circuit Breaker Ratings
240V, 15A(T)
1-4-3 Noise Level
Less than 65db (measured at floor level and three
feet from front of cabinet)
1-4-4 Refrigerant
R-404A
1-4-5 Chamber Temperature Range
-35°C to 0°C
1-4-6 Cryobar Temperature
-50°C minimum (CRYO+ section) within 5
minutes after Cryo+ key is activated with
chamber temperature at -30°C
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 1-7
INTRODUCTION
1-4-7 Environmental Requirements Minimum: 3.2 mm/sec.

1-4-7-1 Operating Environment 1-5-5 Specimen Size

Temperature — 15°C to +35°C (+59°F to +95°F) Up to 25 mm, 38 mm or 55 mm in diameter when
the small, medium or large Specimen Holder is
Relative Humidity — 15% to 85%, non- used.
condensing
1-5-6 Specimen Orientation
1-4-7-2 Storage Environment
±10° (z axis), 360° (y axis)
Temperature — -18°C to +60°C (0°F to +140°F)

1-4-8 Dimensions 1-5-7 Travel Range

Vertical — 63 mm (2.48 in)
Height 118 cm (46.5 in)
Horizontal — 11.9 mm (0.47 in)
Depth 75 cm (29.5 in)

Width 60 cm (23.5 in) 1-5-8 Sectioning Range

Weight 176 kg (388 lbs.), with Microtome 1 to 99 micrometers in 1 micrometer increments

1-4-9 Instrument Life Expectancy 1-5-9 Dimensions

7 years (with instrument powered on 24 hours a Height 18.6 cm (7.31 in)
day, every day)
Depth 31.75 cm (12.5 in) retracted
1-5 MICROTOME 34.5 cm (13.6 in) extended
SPECIFICATIONS
Width 21.1 cm (8.32 in)
1-5-1 Models Weight 6.8 kg (15 lb.)
Manual; Motorized
1-5-10 Instrument Life
1-5-2 Sectioning Drive 7 years at a rate of use of 2,600 specimens per
Handwheel-driven (manual), motor-driven (mo- year
torized system); torque required to move the
Microtome in manual mode is less than 6 in-lbs. 1-6 SAFETY STANDARDS
Tested and listed by Intertek Testing Services
1-5-3 Retraction/Advance Speed (ITS)
Selection
Complies with UL 61010A-1, 1st ed. and
Motor-driven; High: 800 mm/sec.; Low: 500 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1-92.
mm/sec.
Complies with IEC 61010-1, 2nd ed.
1-5-4 Motorized Sectioning Speed
Range
Maximum: 63.0 mm/sec.

1-8 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


SECTION 2
OPERATING SYSTEM
2-1 GENERAL
This section provides an overview of the Cryo3
operating system. The section includes a description
of purpose and function of the Cryo3 operating
controls and indicators, and a general description of
controller states.
2-2 CONTROL PANEL
OPERATION
2-2-1 Main Control Panel
(Figure 2-1)
• LCD Display Screen .1. — Displays chamber
temperature, Cryobar temperature, section
thickness, section counter, real time clock,
diagnostic and error messages, and the Cryo3
Main Menu.
• Menu Function keys .2. — Provide the means
of accessing the Cryo3 setup menus, and of
customizing Cryo3 operating parameters. The
specific functions of the keys are under software
control, and vary depending on the operation
being performed. The current function of each
Figure 2-1. Main Control Panel
REV 11JUN09
OPERATING SYSTEM
key is displayed at the bottom of the LCD
Display (a blank space above a key indicates no
associated function).
• Cryo+ Cycle key .3. — Initiates the Cryobar
active cooling cycle to cool the CRYO+
section of the Cryobar an additional 20°C
below the chamber “set” temperature. (Chamber
temperature must be at least -15°C to activate
the Cryobar cooling cycle.) An LED indicator
integral with the key illuminates while the
cooling cycle is in progress. The cooling cycle
terminates automatically after 15 minutes. The
cooling cycle can be manually cancelled by
pressing the Cryo+ Cycle key while cooling is
in progress.
• Defrost key .4. — initiates the active warming
(defrost) cycle. An LED indicator integral with
the key illuminates while the defrost cycle is in
progress. During warming, the Display shows
the estimated time remaining until the cycle
ends. The defrost cycle terminates automatically
after 15 minutes. The defrost cycle can be
manually cancelled by pressing the Defrost key
while defrost is in progress.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 2-1
OPERATING SYSTEM
• Disinfection key .5. (D and DM models only)
— Initiates the chamber disinfection cycle. An
LED indicator integral with the key illuminates
while the disinfection cycle is in progress. Once
the disinfection cycle starts, the chamber
window is locked and the system generates
ozone to kill biological debris. The disinfection
cycle terminates automatically on completion.
During disinfection, the Display shows the
estimated time remaining until the cycle ends.
Manual cancellation of the disinfection cycle
can be initiated by pressing the Disinfection key
while disinfection is in progress.
NOTE: If any ozone has been produced prior to
initiating a manual cancellation of the
disinfection cycle, the system may require up to
15 minutes to purge ozone from the chamber
and clear interlocks before the chamber window
is unlocked and can be re-opened.
• Chamber Light key .6. — Turns the chamber
light on or off.
• Power indicator .7. —Lights when power is
applied to the system.
2-2-2 Left Control Panel (Figure 2-2)
Figure 2-2. Left Control Panel
2-2 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
• Vacuum Suction Control knob .8. (D and DM
models only) — Controls strength of the debris
removal vacuum. Clockwise rotation increases
vacuum suction; counterclockwise rotation
decreases vacuum suction. The vacuum control
knob is active only when the vacuum is turned
on.
• Vacuum key .9. (D and DM models only) —
Turns the debris removal vacuum on and off. An
LED indicator integral with the key illuminates
while the vacuum is on.
• Trim key .10. — When pressed and held,
advances the Microtome a pre-selected trim
distance each time the handwheel completes a
full rotation. For DM model only, automated
trimming is performed when the Trim key is
pressed and held while simultaneously
activating the Intermittent Motorized Section or
Continuous Motorized Section key. An LED
indicator integral with the key illuminates while
the trim function is activated, and the Display
shows “Manual Trimming In Progress” or
“Automated Trimming In Progress”, as
appropriate.
• RET (Motorized Retraction) key .11. —
Retracts the Microtome one section thickness for
each key activation. Pressing and holding the
key causes continuous retraction at the specified
retract/advance speed (Low or High) until the
key is released or the reverse limit position is
reached.
• ADV (Motorized Advance) key .12. —
Advances the Microtome one section thickness
for each key activation. Pressing and holding the
key causes continuous advance at the specified
retract/advance speed (Low or High). When the
forward limit switch is reached, the Microtome
automatically retracts toward the reverse limit
position. Retraction can be stopped at any time
by pressing the ADV key or RET key.
2-2-3 Right Control Panel
(Figure 2-3)
The right control panel is used only with the
Motorized Section System option (DM model).
REV 11JUN09

Figure 2-3. Right Control Panel
• Vertical Speed Control knob .13. — Increases
or decreases the vertical sectioning speed (down
stroke) of the Microtome during motorized
sectioning modes.
• Intermittent Motorized Sectioning key .14. —
When pressed, a pre-selected number of sections
are made. Intermittent sectioning can be set as
either a number of sections or a total thickness.
An LED indicator integral with the key
illuminates when Intermittent Motorized
Sectioning is activated, and the Display shows
“Intermittent Sectioning In Progress”. Any time
motorized sectioning is in progress, pressing the
Intermittent Motorized Sectioning key (or the
optional Foot Pedal) stops the sectioning.
• Continuous Motorized Sectioning key .15. —
When pressed, sections are made continuously
until the key is pressed again (or the optional
Foot Pedal is pressed). An LED indicator
integral with the key illuminates when
Continuous Motorized Sectioning is activated,
and the Display shows “Continuous Sectioning
In Progress”. The optional Foot Pedal, when
pressed and held, can also activate Continuous
Motorized Sectioning. Sectioning stops when
the Foot Pedal is released.
• Raise To Top key .16. — Causes the
Microtome to move to its upper limit position
and stop. An LED indicator integral with the key
illuminates when the top limit position is
reached.
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
2-3 CONTROLLER STATES
The Main Controller PCB utilizes an 8-bit 8031-
based 80C552 microcontroller. The Main Controller
incorporates the I/O interfaces illustrated in Figure
2-4. The following paragraphs provide an overview
of the principle controller operating states. Refer to
Chapter 3, Principles of Operation for detailed
information.
2-3-1 Power-On Self Test
When AC power is applied to the unit, the
instrument automatically performs a "Power ON"
check for approximately 20 seconds. During this
test, all LEDs flash momentarily, and the LCD
display screen shows the "Power On Self Test"
message. After the check is completed, the
compressor activates and begins cooling the
Chamber.
2-3-2 Power Failure
If an AC power interruption occurs, an orderly
shutdown of the instrument is initiated by the Main
Controller PCB. This shut down resets the Main
Controller PCB and turns the compressor off. A
backup battery prevents the loss of memory (clock
and instrument setting) in the event of a power
interruption.
2-3-3 Refrigeration/Defrost System
Three states are associated with the
refrigeration/defrost system; normal cooling mode,
temperature regulation mode, and defrost mode.
2-3-3-1 Normal Cooling Mode
Once operating power is applied to the instrument,
normal cooling begins. Heat in the Cryo3 Chamber
is absorbed by the refrigerant and is transferred to
ambient air.
2-3-3-2 Temperature Regulation Mode
During temperature regulation mode, Chamber
temperature is monitored and maintained at ±1°C of
the temperature set point.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 2-3
OPERATING SYSTEM
Figure 2-4. Main Controller PCB Input/Output Interfaces
2-3-3-3 Defrost Mode
During defrost, Chamber temperature is raised and
maintained at a temperature above freezing, and the
defrost heaters are activated to aid in draining melted
water from the Chamber.
2-3-4 Refrigeration/Defrost System
Six states are associated with the Auto-Disinfection
System; Chamber depressurization cycle, ozone
generation cycle, Chamber pressure and ambient
atmospheric monitoring, ozone sensor test, ozone
purge cycle and ozone check.
2-3-4-1 Chamber Depressurization Cycle
The Auto-Disinfection System requires that the
Chamber be sealed and depressurized to a minimum
of 4.0 in./H2O. During the depressurization cycle,
chamber atmosphere is vented to ambient
atmosphere by the vacuum pump.
2-3-4-2 Ozone Generation Cycle
Once the Chamber is properly depressurized, the UV
lamp is turned on for 60 minutes, during which the
concentration of ozone within the Chamber reaches
approximately 1000 ppm. Power is automatically
removed from the UV lamp at the end of the cycle.
2-4 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
2-3-4-3 Chamber Pressure and Ambient
Atmospheric Monitoring
Chamber pressure is monitored continuously
throughout the ozone generation cycle. In the event
pressure become higher than 4.0 in./H2O, the
vacuum pump is activated intermittently (for a one
second period) to vent Chamber atmosphere through
the catalyst canister to ambient.
2-3-4-4 Ozone Sensor Test
During the ozone generation cycle, Chamber
atmosphere is allowed to contact the ozone sensor to
ensure the sensor can be triggered by the presence of
ozone.
2-3-4-5 Ozone Purge Cycle
At the conclusion of the ozone generation cycle, the
ozone purge cycle is initiated. Chamber atmosphere
is circulated through the catalyst canister by the
vacuum pump to accomplish conversion of the
ozone to oxygen.
2-3-4-6 Ozone Check
At the conclusion of the ozone purge cycle,
Chamber atmosphere is allowed to contact the ozone
sensor to ensure ozone saturation has been reduced
to less than 0.2 ppm.
REV 11JUN09

SECTION 3
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
3-1 GENERAL
This section provides functional descriptions and
principles of operation for the Cryo3 electrical and
refrigeration systems and for the optional auto-
disinfection, debris removal and motorized
sectioning systems.
Schematic diagram, wiring diagrams and flow
diagrams contained in SECTION 8, DIAGRAMS,
are referenced as appropriate.
3-2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
3-2-1 AC Input Power
The specific configuration of the AC input circuitry
is dependent on the model number and input power
requirements; 115 VAC (models 5800, 5801, 5802),
100 VAC (models 5751, 5752, 5753) or 230 VAC
(models 5803, 5804, 5805).
The Cryo3 receives 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz input power
through AC input plug J1 on the rear of the
instrument cabinet (see Figure 8-11). Circuit breaker
CB1 controls application of AC input power to the
Cryo3 electrical/electronic systems and equipment.
AC line filter FILTER1 protects the instrument
electronics from damage due to electromagnetic
interference. The filtered AC input power is routed
to AC distribution terminal blocks TB1 through
TB14, TB25 to facilitate distribution to Cryo3
systems and equipment.
3-2-2 DC Power Supplies
The Cryo3 employs three different type DC power
supplies:
• 24VDC power supplies – 48VA
• Microtome Power Supply – 48VA
• TEC Power Supplies – 24VA
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
All three types of power supply are constructed on
identical blank PCBs. Refer to Figure 8-29 for
schematic diagram.
The input terminal positions at terminal block J1,
positions 5-6 and 4-7, are strapped to facilitate
operation at 115VAC.
A replaceable fuse is provided for overload or short
circuit protection. To properly protect the wiring and
PCB, the fuse is loaded as specified in Table 3-1.
Dual winding transformer T1, bridge rectifier and
filter capacitors C1, C2 produce unregulated DC
voltage across terminal block J2 positions 1 and 4.
The secondary windings of the transformer can be
strapped at terminal block J3 to allow for either
serial or parallel operation. Each type of power
supply utilizes a unique transformer T1. The
unloaded DC voltage produced by each power
supply is shown in Table 3-2. When loaded, the
unregulated voltage decreases according to the load
condition.
Power indicating LED D3 illuminates to indicate the
power supply is ON.
3-2-2-1 24VDC Power Supply Assembly
For all Cryo3 models, a 24VDC Power supply PS3
(see Figure 8-13) located in the Cryo3 Main Power
Box provides power to the following devices:
• Unregulated DC power to the Microtome
Horizontal Motor Driver
• Regulated 24VDC power to the hot gas valve.
Power supply PS3 receives AC input power via
terminal blocks TB4-B (Line) and TB10-B
(Neutral).
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-1
OPERATING SYSTEM
For D and DM models, a second 24VDC Power
Supply PS4 (see Figure 8-23) located in the Optional
Power Box provides power to the following devices:
• Unregulated DC power for window lock
solenoid.
• Regulated 24VDC power to catalyst valve,
pump vent valve, pump return valve, debris filter
valve and ozone sensor PCB electronics.
Power supply PS4 receives AC input power via
terminal blocks TB4-A (Line) and TB10-A
(Neutral).
Heatsink-mounted 24DC regulator U1 and current
bypass transistor Q1 provide regulated 24VDC at
terminal block J2 position 2 and 3. When the load
current passing through U1 is greater than 500mA,
transistor Q1 shares the load current.
3-2-2-2 Microtome Power Supply Assembly
The Microtome Power Supply PS1 (see Figure 8-22)
is used on the DM model only. The Microtome
Power Supply provides unregulated 15VDC to the
Microtome Vertical Motor Driver. Power supply
PS1 receives AC input power via terminal blocks
TB2-B (Line) and TB8-B (Neutral).

Table 3-1. Power Supply Fuse Requirements

Operation Voltage 48VA 24VA
115VAC 500mA Time Lag (0000128-02) 250mA Time Lag (0000128-03)

Table 3-2. Power Supply Unloaded DC Outputs

DC Power Supply Transformer Used Secondary Windings Unregulated DC
24VDC 48VA, 24VCT @ 2A Series 32V
Microtome 48VA, 30VCT @ 1.6A Parallel 19.2V
TEC 24VA, 12.6VCT @ 1.9A Parallel 6.9V

Figure 3-1. OPTO22 Backplane

3-2 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


3-2-2-3 TEC Power Supply Assembly
The TEC Power supply PS2 (see Figure 8-12) is
used in all Cryo3 models to provide operating power
for the Cryo+ function (see paragraph 3-8 for
details). The AC input to the power supply is
controlled by SSR #1 on the OPTO22 backplane
(see paragraph 3-2-3 for details). When SSR #1 is
enabled by Cryo3 software, unregulated 7VDC is
supplied to the TEC device to activate the Cryo+
device.
3-2-3 OPTO22 Backplane and SSR
Output Modules
The Cryo3 utilizes removable Solid-State Output
Modules to facilitate control various types of loads
(heaters, fluorescent lamp, 24VDC relays, valves,
etc.) by the Main Controller PCB (see Figure 8-14
and Figure 8-28).
Figure 3-2. AC SSR Module
Two types of Solid-State Output Modules are used
in the Cryo3, black AC Modules SSR #1 through
SSR #7 (rated at 3A/240VAC) and red DC Modules
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
SSR #8 through SSR #10, SSR #12 through SSR
#16 (rated at 3A/60VDC). The digital control side
and the driver side of the Modules are Opto-isolated
inside the Modules. A red LED on each Module
illuminates when the Module receives a digital
control command. A replaceable, built-in
4-amp fast acting fuse protects the driver side of
each Module. One spare fuse is mounted on the
OPTO22 backplane.
The OPTO22 backplane (Figure 3-1) provides two
screw-type terminal blocks for accomplishing
electrical connections to each SSR Output Module.
For AC Modules (Figure 3-2), there is no polarity
for the connections to the screw terminal blocks. For
DC Modules (Figure 3-3), the odd numbered
terminal block is the input connector and the even
numbered terminal block is the output connector.
Figure 3-3. DC SSR Module
Up to 15 SSR Modules are used on one 16-channel
OPTO22 backplane as shown in Table 3-3. For
Basic models, six SSR Output Modules are used.
For DM and D models, 15 SSR Output modules are
used.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-3
OPERATING SYSTEM

Table 3-3. OPTO22 Backplane Channel Assignments

Channel No. Function Terminal Nos. Used On Type
SSR #1 Cryobar TEC 1, 2 All AC
SSR #2 Drain Heater 3, 4 All AC
SSR #3 Window Light 5, 6 All AC
SSR #4 Vacuum Pump Enable 7, 8 D, DM AC
SSR #5 Ozone Lamp 9, 10 D, DM AC
SSR #6 Catalyst Heater 11, 12 D, DM AC
SSR #7 Window Heater 13, 14 All DC
SSR #8 Catalyst Valve 15, 16 D, DM DC
SSR #9 Not used 17, 18 All DC
SSR #10 Hot Gas Valve 19, 20 All DC
SSR #11 Not used 21, 22
SSR #12 Window Solenoid Pull 23, 24 D, DM DC
SSR #13 Window Solenoid Release 25, 26 D, DM DC
SSR #14 Filter Valve 27, 28 D, DM DC
SSR #15 Pump Return Valve 29, 30 D, DM DC
SSR #16 Pump Vent Valve 31, 32 D, DM DC

3-3 CONTROLLER PCB Table 3-4. Main Controller PCB

ASSEMBLY
The Main Controller PCB incorporates the software
and firmware necessary to control operation of the
Cryo3 system. The Main Controller PCB uses 8-bit
8031-based Phillips Semiconductor 80C552 micro-
controller U4 running at 14.7456MHz (from
oscillator Y2) to control the operation of the Cryo3.
Refer to Figure 8-1 for component locations. Refer
to Figure 8-2 through Figure 8-10 for schematic
diagram.
Five two-position jumpers on the Main Controller
PCB are strapped to configure the microcontroller
for proper operation. Main Controller PCB strapping
requirements are shown in Table 3-4.
A functional block diagram of the Main Controller
PCB is shown in Figure 3-4.
Strapping Requirements
Jumper Position Function
JP1 2 Off to enable SW Watchdog
JP2 2 Off to enable external
addressing
JP3 2 On to tie Analog Vcc to
digital Vcc
JP4 2 On to tie Analog Gnd to
digital Gnd
JP5 2 On to 12V Gnd to digital Gnd
3-3-1 Power Supply
24VA transformer T1, bridge rectifier D21 and filter
capacitor C48 provide unregulated 12VDC output
power, which is applied through voltage regulator
U27 to provide 5VDC for the on-board electronics
(Figure 8-9). MOVs RV1, RV2 are attached in
parallel to transformer T1 primary windings to
provide AC line noise suppression.
The unregulated 12VDC is also used to provide
power to the LCD Display, analog operational
amplifiers, Microtome OPTO sensors, compressor
SSR and ball valve relays.

3-4 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

Figure 3-4. Main Controller PCB Functional Block Diagram

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-5

OPERATING SYSTEM
For overload and short circuit protection, The Main Table 3-5. Main Controller PCB
Controller PCB is protected against overload or
short circuit by replaceable fuse F1. For 115V Connector Assignments
operation, a 250mA fuse is used. For 230V Connector Position To
operation, a 125mA fuse is used.
J1 5 Graphic LCD Panel
3-3-2 Reset Control J2 10 RS232 I/F
J3 20 Analog Interface PCB
Following initial power up, micromonitor U9
J4 20 Digital Interface PCB
(Figure 8-2) resets the microcontroller and all
external latches to their default conditions to J5 20 Microtome Interface PCB
guarantee a clean start. J6 40 User I/F Signal Breakout
PCB
At anytime during normal operation, if the
J7 50 OPTO22 Backplane
unregulated 12VDC (monitored by micromonitor
U9) falls below 8VDC, a non-maskable interrupt to J8 34 Horizontal Stepper Motor
the microcontroller is generated. The microcontroller Driver
stores critical information to battery-backed RAM J9 34 Vertical Stepper Motor
inside the real-time clock (RTC) and prepares for a Driver
normal shut down. J10 7 AC input and 115/230
The Main Controller PCB can also be manually reset Voltage selection
by pressing the board-mounted RESET pushbutton J11 3 Compressor Control SSR
SW1. J12 3 Pump Speed Controller
PCB to Full Speed
3-3-3 Program EPROM J13 3 Water Drain Ball Valve
Control Relay
The microcontroller operates in the external
addressing mode, with the Cryo3 program loaded in J14 3 Ozone Isolation Ball Valve
EPROM U3 (Figure 8-2). One of three EPROM Control Relay
devices is used, depending on the instrument model; J15 3 Not used
either DM (Disinfection and Motorized), D
(Disinfection) or Basic. 3-3-5-2 Real Time Clock

3-3-4 PCB Connections Real-Time Clock chip U6 (Figure 8-2) occupies

address D0 on the I2C bus, and performs the
Interconnection of the Main Controller PCB to following functions:
external peripherals is accomplished by 15
connectors, as listed in Table 3-5. • Keeps track of time of day.

3-3-5 Microcontroller Internal • Generates a 4 kHz square wave, which is

divided by four by address decoder U7 to
Peripherals generate the 1 kHz external interrupt signal
INT1 required to run the RTOS of the controller
The following paragraphs describe the built-in
software.
peripherals of microcontroller U4 that are utilized by
the Main Controller PCB. • Provides 56 bytes of non-volatile RAM storage
for user-defined configuration settings, backed
3-3-5-1 I2C Bus Interface
up by external 3V lithium battery BT1. Up to
The I2C bus is used to interface to Real-Time Clock three User Configurations may be stored.
(RTC) chip U6 and to the externally-mounted Information stored for each User Configuration
graphic LCD Display. is shown in Table 3-6.

3-6 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

Table 3-6. User Configuration Parameters

Range
Field Name Size (Default Value) Description/Comments
SectThickness 1-byte 01 to 99 (25) Section Thickness in µm
TrimThickness 1-byte 01 to 100 (40) Trim Thickness in µm
SafetyThickness 1-byte 00 to 99 (40) Safety Retraction Distance in µm
ICutSize 1-byte 01 to 99 (20) Intermittent Cut Size in 'Total Cut Count' or 'Total Cut
Size'
DefrostTime: Auto-Defrost Start Time in 12Hr or 24Hr BCD
format as follows:
Min 1-byte 00 to 59 Start Minute
Hr 1-byte 00 to 23 or Start Hour in 24Hr mode Start Hour in 12Hr mode
01 to 12
ChamberTemp 1-byte -35 to 0 (-3) Chamber Temperature Set-Point in ºC
OptionFlgs: User Option Flags as follows:
UsrDspCutsFlg 1-bit TRUE or FALSE TRUE: = Display 'Total Cuts'
(FALSE) FALSE: = Display "Total Thickness"
UsrICutInCutsFlg 1-bit TRUE or FALSE TRUE: = Intermittent CUT in 'Cuts'
(FALSE) FALSE: = Intermittent CUT in 'Size'
UsrHSAdvanceFlg 1-bit TRUE or FALSE TRUE: = High Speed ADV and RET
(FALSE) FALSE: = Low Speed ADV and RET
UsrKeyClickFlg 1-bit TRUE or FALSE TRUE: = Key Clicks Enabled
Default: TRUE FALSE: = Key Clicks Disabled
UsrErrorAlertFlg 1-bit TRUE or FALSE TRUE: = Error Alerts Enabled
Default: TRUE FALSE: = Error Alerts Disabled
UsrAutoDisinfectionFlg 1-bit TRUE or FALSE TRUE: = Auto-Disinfection Enabled
Default: TRUE FALSE: = Auto-Disinfection Disabled
Not Used 1-bit TRUE or FALSE
(FALSE)
Not Used 1-bit TRUE or FALSE
(FALSE)
LCDContrast 1-byte 01 to 15 (5) LCD Contrast number: 01: = lightest; 15: = darkest
Password 4-bytes '0000' to 'ZZZZ' User Password in ASCII format
(ABCD)
TOTAL: 13-bytes Size of one User Configuration Save Area

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-7

OPERATING SYSTEM
3-3-6 Graphic LCD Display 3-3-7 A/D Converters
The 240 x 64 pixel graphic LCD Display occupies The internal 8-channel multiplexed 10-bit A/D
address 50 on the I2C bus and provides visual converter is connected to external thermistors,
display of prompts, messages and system status to variable resistance potentiometers, and other analog
the user. The microcontroller and LCD Display devices through connector J3. External signals are
communicate via a shielded twisted pair cable applied through filters FC1 thru FC8 and are
connected at connector J1 (Figure 8-2). Signal de- buffered by operational amplifiers U10, U11 before
scriptions for connector J1 are shown in Table 3-7. entering the microcontroller (see Figure 8-3). Signal
descriptions for connector J3 are shown in
Table 3-8.
Table 3-7. Connector J1 Signal
Descriptions (LCD Display) The first five input channels are each biased to
ground with an 18.2K resistor R10, R14, R18, R22,
Connector Position Function R24. These special inputs can be used to interface
J1 1 +12VDC with an external 5K @ 25C thermistor for low
2 I2C Bus SCL temperature measurement. The correlation of
thermistor raw resistance values to corresponding
3 I2C Bus SDA temperature is shown in Table 3-9.
4 +12V RTN
5 Cable Shield

Table 3-8. Connector J3 Signal Descriptions (A/D Converters)

Connector Position Function Connector Position Function
J3 1 +5VDC J3 2 GND
3 ADC0 – Cryobar Thermistor 4
5 ADC1 – Handle Lock Switch 6
7 ADC2 – Chamber Thermistor 8
9 ADC3 – Ozone Isolation Valve 10
Position
11 ADC4 – Not used 12
13 ADC5 – Vertical Speed Pot 14
15 ADC6 – CdS Photo Cell 16
17 ADC7 – Ozone Sensor Level 18
19 +5VDC 20

3-8 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

Table 3-9. Correlation of Thermistor Raw Resistance to Temperature

Thermistor Raw Thermistor Raw Thermistor Raw
Temp (°C) Resistance (Ohms) Temp (°C) Resistance (Ohms) Temp (°C) Resistance (Ohms)
-40 168,300 -16 38,610 8 10,960
-39 157,500 -15 36,490 9 10,440
-38 147,500 -14 34,500 10 9951
-37 138,200 -13 32,630 11 9486
-36 129,500 -12 30,880 12 9046
-35 121,400 -11 29,230 13 8628
-34 113,900 -10 27,670 14 8232
-33 106,900 -9 26,210 15 7857
-32 100,300 -8 24,830 16 7500
-31 94,220 -7 23,540 17 7162
-30 88,530 -6 22,320 18 6841
-29 83,220 -5 21,170 19 6536
-28 78,260 -4 20,080 20 6247
-27 73,620 -3 19,060 21 5972
-26 69,290 -2 18,100 22 5710
-25 65,240 -1 17,190 23 5462
-24 61,450 0 16,330 24 5225
-23 57,900 1 15,520 25 5000
-22 54,580 2 14,750 26 4787
-21 51,470 3 14,030 27 4583
-20 48,560 4 13,340 28 4389
-19 45,830 5 12,700 29 4204
-18 43,270 6 12,090 30 4029
-17 40,860 7 11,510 31 3861

3-3-8 Pulse Width Modulator
(PWM) Outputs
The internal two-channel 8-bit Pulse Width
Modulator outputs (Figure 8-8) are used to generate
the step clock pulses for the Microtome horizontal
and vertical motors. The step clock signals are
buffered by Schmitt Trigger inverters U22 and
buffer/line drivers U24, U26 prior to application to
the external stepper motor controllers through two
34-position ribbon cables at connectors J8
(horizontal motor) and J9 (vertical motor).
Step clock pulses are looped back through the ribbon
cables, buffered by Schmitt Trigger inverters U22
and counted by the microcontroller software at the
T0 (Horizontal) and T2 (Vertical) timer inputs. If the
ribbon cable is disconnected, the software alerts the
operator of Stepper Driver Failure.
Signals on connectors J8 and J9 that are not related
to the horizontal and vertical motors come from the
8-bit external peripheral output latches of buffer/line
drivers U24 (OUT5) and U25 (OUT6). Signal
descriptions for connector J8 are provided in Table
3-10. Signal descriptions for connector J9 are
provided in Table 3-11.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-9

OPERATING SYSTEM

Table 3-10. Connector J8 Signal Descriptions (Horizontal Stepper Motor)

Connector Position Function Connector Position Function
J8 1 Not used J8 2 Not used
3 4
5 6 Step Resolution SEL3
7 HCLK Feedback 8 Horizontal Step Clocks
9 Not used 10 Not used
11 Step Resolution SEL0 12 Step Direction
13 Step Resolution SEL2 14 Not used
15 Step Resolution SEL1 16 Vcc
17 Not used 18 Not used
19 GND 20 Driver Enable
21 Not used 22 Not used
23 24 Drive Reset*
25 26 Not used
27 28 Stepper Driver Fault*
29 30 Not used
31 32 Full Step*
33 34 Not used

Table 3-11. Connector J9 Signal Descriptions (Vertical Stepper Motor)

Connector Position Function Connector Position Function
J9 1 Not used J9 2 Not used
3 4
5 6 Step Resolution SEL3
7 VCLK Feedback 8 Vertical Step Clocks
9 Not used 10 Not used
11 Step Resolution SEL0 12 Step Direction
13 Step Resolution SEL2 14 Not used
15 Step Resolution SEL1 16 Vcc
17 Not used 18 Not used
19 GND 20 Driver Enable
21 Not used 22 Not used
23 24 Drive Reset*
25 26 Not used
27 28 Stepper Driver Fault*
29 30 Not used
31 32 Full Step*
33 34 Not used

3-10 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


3-3-9 Port 4 and Bit Port 1.5
The eight bi-directional I/O bits of Port 4 (P4.0-
P4.7) and bit port P1.5 (Figure 8-6) are used to
decode the operator interface membrane keypads
(see paragraph 3-5-2 for details). A total of 20 keys
are decoded by the 4-row by 5-column matrix (only
16 positions are actually used). Diodes D1 thru D20
are used to decouple multiple keys pressed
simultaneously.
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
On Connector J6, the keypad matrix and the LED
driver status are combined according to Table 3-12.
3-3-10 RS-232 Port
The serial port of the microcontroller is connected
through RS-232 interface U8 (Figure 8-2) to
connector J2 to provide an external RS-232
interface. Signal descriptions for connector J2 are
provided in Table 3-13.

Eight LEDs for the membrane panels are set by the

microcontroller at the output latch #3 U16 (see
paragraph 3-3-11-7 for details).

Table 3-12. Connector J6 Signal Descriptions (Keypad Matrix)

Connector Position Function Connector Position Function
J6 1 Row 1, Col 1 (Func 1) J6 2 Row 2, Col 1 (Func 2)
3 Row 3, Col 1 (Func 3) 4 Row 4, Col 1 (Func 4)
5 Column 1 6 GND
7 Row 1, Col 2 (Func 5) 8 Row 2, Col 2 (Cryo+)
9 Row 3, Col 2 (Defrost) 10 Row 4, Col 2 (Ozone)
11 Column 2 12 GND
13 Row 1, Col 3 (Light) 14 Row 2, Col 3 (Not used)
15 Row 3, Col 3 (Not used) 16 Row 4, Col 3 (Raise-To-Top)
17 Column 3 18 GND
19 Row 1, Col 4 (RET) 20 Row 2, Col 4 (ADV)
21 Row 3, Col 4 (TRIM) 22 Row 4, Col 4 (Vacuum)
23 Column 4 24 GND
25 Row 1, Col 5 (Not used) 26 Row 2, Col 4 (Intermittent)
27 Row 3, Col 4 (Continuous) 28 Row 4, Col 4 (Not used)
29 Column 5 30 GND
31 LEDDRV1 (Cryo+ LED) 32 LEDDRV2 (Defrost LED)
33 LEDDRV3 (Ozone LED) 34 LEDDRV4 (Inter. LED)
35 LEDDRV5 (Cont. LED) 36 LEDDRV6 (R-T-Top LED)
37 LEDDRV7 (TRIM LED) 38 LEDDRV8 (VAC. LED)
39 Vcc 40 Vcc

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-11

OPERATING SYSTEM

Table 3-13. Connector J2 Signal Table 3-14. External Peripheral

Descriptions (RS-232 Port) Memory Addresses
Connector Position Function Address Maps Function
J2 1 Not used 0000-7FFF External Data RAM, U5 (32K)
2 Not used 8400-87FF External Input #1, U13
3 RS232 TX 8800-8FFF External Input #2, U15
4 RTS 9000-97FF Output #1, U18
5 RS232 RX 9800-9FFF Output #2, U20
6 CTS A000-A7FF Output #3, U16
7 Not used A800-AFFF Output #4, U25
8 Not used B000-B7FF Output #5, U23
9 GND B800-BFFF Output #6, U28
10 Not used C000-C7FF Parallel LCD I/F (Not Used)

3-3-11 External Peripherals 3-3-11-2 External Input No. 1

Programmable Logic Device (PLD) U7 (Figure 8-2)
decodes external peripherals in the 64K external data
memory spaces as defined in Table 3-14.
3-3-11-1 Data RAM
The bottom 32K of RAM is comprised of external
RAM device U5 (Figure 8-2), which is used by the
software for storage of all volatile constants,
variables and tables.
Eight digital inputs present at connector J4 (Figure
8-5) are read in by the microcontroller at No. 1 input
latch U13 as shown in Table 3-15. Signals are
clocked into the latch by the INPUT1* signal.
External input signals at connector J4 are applied
through filters FC9 thru FC16, and are cleaned by
Schmitt Trigger input inverters U1, U12 prior to
application to input latch U13. All input signals are
biased in the Fail Safe condition by pull up resistor
R25 to guarantee an alarm condition can be triggered
if the ribbon cable connection to the Signal Breakout
PCB is unplugged.

Table 3-15. Connector J4 Signal Descriptions (External Input No. 1)

Connector Position Function Connector Position Function
J4 1 +12VDC J4 2 GND
3 CH1 – Window Switch 4
5 CH2 – Window Lock Switch 6
7 CH3 – Foot Switch 8
9 CH4 – Not used 10
11 CH5 – EMO Switch 12
13 CH6 – Water Drain Valve 14
Position Switch
15 CH7 – Chamber Pressure 16
Switch
17 CH8 – Pump Pressure Switch 18
19 +12VDC 20

3-12 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
3-3-11-3 External Input No. 2 3-3-11-4 Input No. 5

Eight digital inputs present at connector J5 (Figure
8-4) can be read in by the microcontroller at No. 2
input latch U15 as shown in Table 3-16. Signals are
clocked into the latch by the INPPUT2* signal.
External input signals at connector J5 are applied
through filters FC17 thru FC24, and are cleaned by
Schmitt Trigger input inverters U12, U14 before
application to input latch U15. All input signals are
biased in the Fail Safe condition by pull up resistor
R26 to guarantee an alarm condition can be triggered
if the connection ribbon cable to the Signal Breakout
PCB is unplugged.
Input channel No. 5 provides the means of accessing
the Cryo3 Diagnostic mode. When in the Diagnostic
mode, electrical and electronic hardware connected
to the Cryo3 can be monitored or exercised
individually.
3-3-11-5 Inputs No. 6 and No. 7
Input channels No. 7 and No. 8 are connected to the
two Microtome Stepper Motor Drivers to monitor
driver Over Temp condition.

Table 3-16. Connector J5 Signal Descriptions (External Input No. 2)

Connector Position Function Connector Position Function
J5 1 +12VDC J5 2 GND
3 CH1 - Microtome Forward 4
Limit Switch
5 CH2 - Microtome Reverse 6
Limit Switch
7 CH3 - Microtome Upper 8
Limit Switch
9 CH4 - Microtome Lower 10
Limit Switch
11 CH5 - Diagnostic Mode 12
Selection
13 CH6 - Microtome Middle 14
Limit Switch
15 CH7 - Hardwired to 16
Horizontal Stepper Driver
fault*
17 CH8 - Hardwired to Vertical 18
Stepper Driver Fault
19 +12VDC 20

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-13

OPERATING SYSTEM
3-3-11-6 External Outputs No. 1 and No. 2 nine SSRs (CH8 thru CH16) are DC type, rated for
3A @ 60VDC.
Sixteen digital outputs present at connector J7
(Figure 8-7) are set by the microcontroller at output 3-3-11-7 External Output No. 3
latch No. 1 U18 and output latch No. 2 U20 as
shown in Table 3-17. Signals are clocked into the Eight digital outputs present at connector J6 (Figure
latches by the OUT1* and OUT2* signals, 8-6) are set by the microcontroller at output latch
respectively. The output signals are buffered by No. 3 U16. Signals are clocked into the latch by the
buffer/line drivers U19 and U21, respectively. OUT3* signal. The output signals are buffered by
buffer/line driver U17, and are used to drive the
The output interface at connector J7 facilitates eight LEDs on the three user interface membrane
control of the Solid State Relays (SSR) on the panels (see paragraph 3-5-2 for details). External
OPTO22 backplane (see paragraph 3-2-3 for output No. 3 output signals are shown in Table 3-18.
details). The first seven SSRs (CH1 thru CH7) are
AC type, rated for 3A @ 240VAC; the remaining
Table 3-17. Connector J7 Signal Descriptions (External Outputs No. 1 and No. 2)
Connector Position Function Connector Position Function
J7 1 Vcc J7 2 GND
3 Not used 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 CH. 16 - Pump Vent Valve 18
19 CH. 15 - Pump Return 20
Valve
21 CH. 14 - Filter Valve 22
23 CH. 13 - Window Solenoid 24
Release
25 CH. 12 - Window Solenoid 26
Pull
27 CH. 11 - Not used 28
29 CH. 10 - Hot Gas Valve 30
31 CH. 9 – Not used 32
33 CH. 8 - Catalyst Valve 34
35 CH. 7 - Window Heater 36
37 CH. 6 - Catalyst Heater 38
39 CH. 5 - Ozone Lamp 40
41 CH. 4 - Vacuum Pump 42
Enable
43 CH. 3 - Window Light 44
45 CH. 2 - Drain Heater 46
47 CH. 1 - Cryobar TEC 48
49 Vcc 50

3-14 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Table 3-18. External Output No. 3 Table 3-20. External Output No. 5
Signal Descriptions Signal Descriptions
Location Pin No. Function Location Pin No. Function
U17 18 CH1 – LEDDRV1 (Cryo+) U24 18 Step Clock Pulses from PWM0
16 CH2 – LEDDRV2 (Defrost) 16 Reset
14 CH3 – LEDDRV3 (Ozone) 14 Enable
12 CH4 – LEDDRV4 12 Direction
(Intermittent Section)
9 Step Resolution Select Bit 0
9 CH5 – LEDDRV5
(Continuous Section) 7 Step Resolution Select Bit 1
7 CH6 – LEDDRV6 (Raise- 5 Step Resolution Select Bit 2
To-Top) 3 Step Resolution Select Bit 3
5 CH7 – LEDDRV7 (Trim)
3-3-11-10 External Output No. 6
3 CH8 – LEDDRV8 (Vacuum)
Eight digital outputs are set by the microcontroller at
3-3-11-8 External Output No. 4 output latch No. 6 U28 (Figure 8-10). Signals are
Seven of the eight digital outputs present at clocked into the latch by the OUT6* signal. The
connector J9 (Figure 8-8) are set by the output signals are buffered by buffer/line driver U29,
microcontroller at output latch No. 4 U25. Signals and the individual bits are used to control various
are clocked into the latch by the OUT4* signal. The internal devices as shown in Table 3-21.
output signals are buffered by buffer/line driver U26,
and are used to control the Vertical Axis Stepper Table 3-21. External Output No. 6
Motor Driver. External output No. 4 output signals
are shown in Table 3-19.
Signal Descriptions
Location Pin No. Function
Table 3-19. External Output No. 4 U29 16 Compressor SSR at J11
Signal Descriptions 15 Pump Enable at J12
Location Pin No. Function 14 Water Drain Ball Valve
Direction at J13
U26 18 Step Clock Pulses from PWM1
13 Ozone Isolation Ball Valve
16 Reset
Direction at J14
14 Enable
12 Buzzer
12 Direction
11 Not used
9 Step Resolution Select Bit 0
U28 16 ADJ – Not used
7 Step Resolution Select Bit 1
19 CTRL – Not used
5 Step Resolution Select Bit 2
3 Step Resolution Select Bit 3 3-3-11-11 Miscellaneous Connectors
3-3-11-9 External Output No. 5 Signal descriptions for AC input connector J10,
compressor control connector J11, pump control
Seven of the eight digital outputs present at connector J12, water drain ball valve direction
connector J8 (Figure 8-8) are set by the control connector J13 and ozone isolation ball valve
microcontroller at output latch No. 5 U23. Signals direction control connector J14 are shown in Table
are clocked into the latch by the OUT5* signal. The 3-22. through Table 3-26.
output signals are buffered by buffer/line driver U24,
and are used to control the Horizontal Axis Stepper
Motor Driver. External output No. 5 output signals
are shown in Table 3-20.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-15

OPERATING SYSTEM

Table 3-22. AC Input Connector J10 Table 3-26. Ozone Isolation Ball Valve
Signal Descriptions Direction Control Connector J14
Connector Position Function Signal Descriptions
J10 1 Ac Line Connector Position Function
2 Ac Neutral J14 1 +12VDC
3 Earth GND 2 Ozone Isolation Valve
4 For 115VAC 3 GND
5 Jumper 4-7, 6-5
6 For 230VAC 3-4 SIGNAL BREAKOUT PCB
Jumper 5-7
Three Signal Breakout PCBs are used in the Cryo3
to facilitate distribution of signals to the Main
Table 3-23. Compressor Control Controller PCB from related Cryo3 systems and
Connector J11 Signal Descriptions equipment:

Connector Position Function 1. The first signal breakout PCB is used to input
external analog signals to the microcontroller.
J11 1 +12VDC
This PCB is mounted on the left side of the
2 Compressor Cryo3 frame.
3 GND
2. The second signal breakout PCB is used to input
external digital signals to the microcontroller.
Table 3-24. Pump Control Connector This PCB is mounted on the right side of the
J12 Signal Descriptions Cryo3 frame.
Connector Position Function 3. The third signal breakout PCB is used to input
J12 1 +12VDC Microtome limit switch positions to the
microcontroller. This PCB is mounted on top of
2 Pump Enable
the Microtome.
3 GND
On each Signal Breakout PCB, 24 terminal blocks
are allocated for eight input signals as shown in
Table 3-25. Water Drain Ball Valve Table 3-27. One 20-position header J2 is used to
Direction Control Connector J13 connect all the input signals through a ribbon cable
Signal Descriptions to the Main Controller PCB.

Connector Position Function 3-4-1 Analog Signal Breakout PCB

J13 1 +12VDC
When used as the Analog Signal Breakout PCB,
2 Water Drain Valve
signals are connected to the PCB as shown in Table
3 GND 3-28.

3-16 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION

Table 3-27. Signal Breakout PCB Table 3-28. Analog Signal Breakout
Terminal Block Assignments PCB Terminal Block Assignments
Position Signal Channel # Position Signal Channel #
1 DC Supply Voltage 1 1 Cryobar Thermistor 1
2 Signal 1 2 Cryobar Thermistor
3 DC Return 3 Cable Shield
4 DC Supply Voltage 2 4 Hand Wheel Opto Isolator 2
5 Signal 2 5V supply
6 DC Return 5 Hand Wheel position
7 DC Supply Voltage 3 6 Hand Wheel Opto Isolator
5V return
8 Signal 3
7 Chamber temperature 3
9 DC Return Thermistor
10 DC Supply Voltage 4 8 Chamber temperature
11 Signal 4 Thermistor
12 DC Return 9 Cable Shield
13 DC Supply Voltage 5 10 Ozone Isolation Ball Valve 4
14 Signal 5 Position Switch
15 DC Return 11 Ozone Isolation Ball Valve
16 DC Supply Voltage 6 Position Switch
17 Signal 6 12 Cable Shield
18 DC Return 13 Not used 5
19 DC Supply Voltage 7 14
20 Signal 7 15
21 DC Return 16 Vertical Speed Control Pot 6
22 DC Supply Voltage 8 17 Vertical Speed Control Pot
23 Signal 8 18 Cable Shield
24 DC Return 19 Ozone Lamp Photo Cell 7
20 Ozone Lamp Photo Cell
21 Cable Shield
22 Ozone Sensor Switch 8
23 Ozone Sensor Switch
24 Cable Shield

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-17

OPERATING SYSTEM
3-4-2 Digital Signal Breakout PCB 3-4-3 Microtome Signal Breakout
When used as the Digital Signal Breakout PCB,
PCB
signals are connected to the PCB as shown in Table When used as the Microtome Signal Breakout PCB,
3-29. signals are connected to the PCB as shown in Table
3-30.

Table 3-29. Digital Signal Breakout Table 3-30. Microtome Signal

PCB Terminal Block Assignments Breakout PCB Terminal Block
Position Signal Channel # Assignments
1 Not used 1 Position Signal Channel #
2 Window Switch 1 Forward Opto Supply + 1
3 Window Switch + Cable Program pin
Shield 2 Forward Opto signal
4 Not used 2 3 Forward Opto Supply
5 Window Lock Switch Return + Shield
6 Window Lock Switch + 4 Reverse Opto Supply + 2
Cable Shield Program pin
7 Not used 3 5 Reverse Opto signal
8 Foot Switch 6 Reverse Opto Supply
Return + Shield
9 Foot Switch + Cable Shield
7 Upper Opto Supply + 3
10 Not used 4
Program pin
11
8 Upper Opto signal
12
9 Upper Opto Supply
13 Not used 5 Return + Shield
14 EMO Switch 10 Lower Opto Supply + 4
15 EMO Switch + Cable Program pin
Shield 11 Lower Opto signal
16 Not used 6 12 Lower Opto Supply
17 Water Drain Ball Valve Return + Shield
Position Switch 13 Not used 5
18 Water Drain Ball Valve 14 Jumper positions 14 – 15 to
Position Switch + Cable enter the Diagnostic Mode
15
Shield
16 Middle Opto Supply + 6
19 Not used 7
Program pin
20 Chamber Pressure Switch
17 Middle Opto signal
21 Chamber Pressure Switch +
18 Middle Opto Supply
Cable Shield
Return + Shield
22 Not used 8
19 Not used 7
23 Pump Pressure Switch
20
24 Pump Pressure Switch +
21
Cable Shield
22 Not used 8
23
24

3-18 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


3-5 KEYPAD / DISPLAY
ASSEMBLIES
3-5-1 LCD Graphic Display
A 240 x 64 pixel graphic LCD is used to display all
user interface messages. The LCD communicates
with the Main Controller PCB through a two-wire
I2C bus serial interface. Operating power to the
LCD is also provided by the Main Controller PCB.
One 4-conductor cable facilitates interconnection of
the Main Controller PCB and the LCD graphic
display.
Four different font sets are preloaded into the LCD
font memory. Fonts 1 and 2 are used to support
English and European message displays. Fonts 3 and
4 are used for Japanese message displays.
An integral DC/DC inverter on the LCD graphic
display provides power the to fluorescent backlight.
The backlight is always ON. Display contrast is
operator adjustable, using the Cryo3 software.
3-5-2 User Interface Membrane
Panels
Three membrane keypad panels (Figure 8-20)
installed on the Top Cover provide the means for
programming user-selectable operating parameters,
selecting system operating modes and controlling
ancillary equipment (vacuum debris removal system,
ozone disinfection system, etc.). Depending on the
Model, some of the keypads and LEDs are not
available. The specific configuration of the
membrane panels for each model are described in
the following paragraphs.
3-5-2-1 Basic Model Membrane Keypads
The center membrane panel incorporates the LCD
graphic display, five soft function keypads, two
direct function keypads with LEDs (Cryo+, Defrost)
and the Chamber light keypad. A green Power ON
LED is also provided.
The left-side membrane panel incorporates the
keypads for horizontal motor ADV/RET control and
TRIM (with LED).
A blank right-side membrane panel is used to cover
the opening for the vertical Microtome control (used
on DM Models).
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
3-5-2-2 D Model (Disinfection and Motorized)
Membrane Keypads
The center membrane panel incorporates the LCD
graphic display, five soft function keypads, three
direct function keypads with LEDs (Cryo+, Defrost,
Ozone) and the Chamber light keypad. A green
Power ON LED is also provided.
The left-side membrane panel incorporates the
keypads for horizontal motor ADV/RET control,
TRIM (with LED), Vacuum (with LED), and the
Vacuum Strength control knob.
A blank right-side membrane panel is used to cover
the opening for the vertical Microtome control (used
on DM Models).
3-5-2-3 DM Model (Disinfection) Membrane
Keypads
The center membrane panel incorporates the LCD
graphic display, five soft function keypads, three
direct function keypads with LEDs (Cryo+, Defrost,
Ozone) and the Chamber light keypad. A green
Power ON LED is also provided.
The left-side membrane panel incorporates the
keypads for horizontal motor ADV/RET control,
TRIM (with LED), Vacuum (with LED) and the
Vacuum Strength control knob.
The right-side membrane panel incorporates the
keypads for vertical motor Continuous sectioning
(with LED), Intermittent sectioning (with LED) and
Raise-To-Top (with LED), and the Vertical Speed
control knob.
3-5-3 User I/F Signal Breakout PCB
The User I/F Signal Breakout PCB distributes Main
Controller PCB keypads matrix and LED signals to
three user interface membrane panels. Refer to
Figure 8-34 for component locations. Refer to
Figure 8-35 for schematic diagram.
One 40-position round shielded ribbon cable facili-
tates interconnection between Main Controller PCB
connector J6 and the User I/F Breakout PCB
connector J1. Three other right angle headers J2, J3
and J4 provide for connection of the center
membrane panel, left-side membrane panel and
right-side membrane panel, respectively.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-19
OPERATING SYSTEM
Terminal Block J5 is used to ground the shield layer,
which is embedded inside the membrane panels, for
EMI and static discharge protection.
3-6 MOTORIZED SECTIONING
CONTROLS AND SENSORS
(DM models only)
3-6-1 Handwheel Lock Switch
A transmissive-type Opto-Isolator (SW5) is used to
sense the position of the handwheel lock on the
handwheel (Figure 8-22). The Opto-Isolator is wired
as shown in Table 3-31. The 2nd position “L” signal
is tied to the V+ supply voltage at position 1, for
Light – ON operation mode. A 20K resistor R6 is
connected between the V+ supply voltage at position
1 and the Signal at position 3.
Table 3-31. Handwheel Lock Switch
Wire Assignments
Position Signal Wire Color
1 V+ (5 – 24VDC) Black
2 L Black
3 Signal Clear
4 GND Shield
When the Opto-Isolator slot is not blocked by an
object, the signal output is logic “low”, and a red
LED on the body of the isolator illuminates. When
the Opto-Isolator is blocked by an object, the signal
output is logic “high”, and the red LED on the body
of the isolator extinguishes.
When the handwheel lock is engaged, the Opto-
Isolator slot is blocked, and the position signal is
sensed at channel 2 (positions 4, 5, 6) of the Analog
Signal Breakout PCB by the controller software; no
automatic sectioning functions are allowed to
perform. When the handwheel is locked, the
controller software displays the message “Hand
Wheel is Locked” on the LCD display screen.
3-6-2 Emergency Motor Off (EMO)
Switch
Cryo3 DM models are equipped with a red double-
pole, double-throw, manually actuated Emergency
Motor Off switch (used for the Cryo3 DM models
only). When actuated, the EMO switch disconnects
AC supply power from the Microtome Power
3-20 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
Supply and stops Microtome vertical travel
immediately. The position of the EMO switch is also
monitored by the controller software at channel 5
(positions 14, 15) of the Digital Breakout PCB.
When the EMO is actuated, the controller software
displays the message “Microtome Emergency Off
Switch Engaged” on the LCD display screen.
Once actuated, the EMO switch position is latched
mechanically and can only be released by the
operator by rotating the switch clockwise.
3-6-3 Foot Switch
The optional foot switch is a single-pole, double-
throw switch housed inside a plastic foot pedal. The
foot pedal is enclosed by a red safety steel shroud.
The foot pedal cable is connected to a mating
connector located at the lower right side of the Cryo3
right side panel by the front footrest.
When the foot pedal is pressed and held, the position
of the foot switch is sensed by the controller
software at channel 3 (positions 8, 9) of the Digital
Signal Breakout PCB (0001177-01), and continuous
automatic sectioning starts. The continuous
sectioning stops when the foot switch is released.
3-7 HEATERS
The Cryo3 incorporates up to six AC-powered
heaters to aid in defrosting the Chamber, to prevent
condensation on and around the Window, and to
improve the ozone destruction efficiency of the
catalyst bed (D and DM models only).
3-7-1 Defrost Heaters
During a Defrost cycle, the Cryo3 software turns on
the Channel #2 AC SSR on the OPTO22 backplane.
AC power is allowed to energize the defrost and
drain heaters (0), which are connected to TB6 inside
the Cryo3 Main Power Box.
The drain and defrost heaters are two-part heaters,
connected in parallel.
3-7-1-1 Top Drain Heaters
The Top Drain Heaters are constructed of two pieces
of 0.5-inch x 17.5-inch silicone rubber strip heaters,
rated at 35 watts, 115VAC each. The nominal
resistance of the heater is 378 ohms.
REV 11JUN09

The heaters are glued to the two sides of the top
gutter on the Cryo3 stainless steel tub, from the
backside. The heaters are encapsulated by the foam
insulation applied to the tub exterior. Connection to
the heaters is accomplished using lead wires exiting
from the foam insulation.
3-7-1-2 Bottom Drain Heaters
The Bottom Drain Heaters are constructed of two
pieces of 0.5-inch x 17.5-inch silicone rubber strip
heaters, rated at 35 watts, 115VAC each. The
nominal resistance of the heater is 378 ohms.
The heaters are glued to the two sides of the bottom
gutter on the Cryo3 stainless steel tub, from the
backside. The heaters are encapsulated by the foam
insulation applied to the tub exterior. Connection to
the heaters is accomplished using lead wires exiting
from the foam insulation.
3-7-1-3 Defrost Heaters
The Defrost Heaters are constructed of two pieces of
8.75-inch x 4-inch silicone rubber strip heaters, rated
at 35watts, 115VAC each. The nominal resistance of
the heater is 378 Ohm.
The heaters are glued to the sloped surface of the
Cryo3 stainless steel tub, directly underneath the
evaporator, from the backside. The heaters are
encapsulated by the foam insulation applied to the
tub exterior. Connection to the heaters is
accomplished using lead wires exiting from the foam
insulation.
3-7-2 Rim Heaters
The Rim Heaters (0) are used to prevent water
condensation along the window openings. The Rim
Heaters are not operated under software control; the
heaters are activated whenever the Cryo3 is turned
ON.
The Rim Heaters are constructed of two 40-inch
long self-regulating low-temperature heat trace
cables, rated at 3 watts/foot, 120VAC, 10°C each.
The resistance of the Rim Heaters varies
proportionally in relation to the ambient tempera-
ture. When the ambient temperature drops (gets
colder), heater resistance decreases to produce more
wattage. At 25°C, Rim Heater resistance is
approximately 1.7Kohm (2.5 watts/foot).
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The heaters are glued to the underside of the Cryo3
inner cover, along the rim of the stainless steel tub.
The heaters are encapsulated by the foam insulation
applied to the tub exterior.
Connection to the heaters is accomplished using lead
wires exiting from the foam insulation. Two Rim
Heaters are connected in parallel, and are protected
by a 0.25A/250V fuse.
3-7-3 Window Glass Heater
The window glass heater (0) aids in preventing water
condensation on top of the sliding glass window.
The sliding glass window is a two-pane glass
window. The window glass heater is a layer of
resistive film, rated at 18 watts/foot2, applied to the
bottom side of the top glass pane. The entire window
glass heater is approximately 33 watts at 120VAC,
and the average resistance is 435 ohms.
Operation of the window glass heater is
accomplished under control of the Cryo3 software.
The Cryo3 software energizes the channel #7 AC
SSR on the OPTO22 backplane to apply operating
power to the window glass heater. The window glass
heater is turned off automatically (by de-energizing
the channel #7 AC SSR) when the window is left
open for more than 30 minutes, or when chamber
temperature is warmer than 0°C.
The level of window glass heater power can be
adjusted by operator in 25% increments. At 100%
power, the window heater is ON continuously. At
50% power, the window heater is cycled ON and
OFF for 30-second periods. This feature is useful in
increasing the efficiency of the cooling system; the
capacity of the refrigeration system increases as the
window glass heater wattage decreases.
3-7-4 Catalyst Heater
The catalyst heater is used to improve the ozone
destruct efficiency of the catalyst bed (D and DM
models only).
Operation of the catalyst heater is accomplished
under control of the Cryo3 software. The Cryo3
software energizes the channel #6 AC SSR on the
OPTO22 backplane to apply operating power to the
catalyst heater. The catalyst heater is normally OFF;
it is turned ON only during the ozone cycle. During
the ozone generation cycle, the catalyst heater is
modulated at 25% power. During the ozone purge
cycle, the catalyst heater is ON continuously.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-21
OPERATING SYSTEM
3-8 CRYO+ DEVICE
A 40mm x 40mm Thermal Electric Cooler (TEC) is
used to implement the Cryo+ function (Figure 8-12).
The function of the TEC device is based on the
Peltier Effect; i.e., whenever current flows through
two dissimilar conductors; depending on the
direction of the current flow, the junction of the two
conductors will either absorb or release heat. When
the TEC device is turned ON, the top surface of the
device absorbs heat (gets colder) and the bottom
surface of the device releases heat (gets warmer).
In the Cryo3, the TEC device is sandwiched between
the Cryo+ plate and the Cryobar. When the TEC is
turned ON, heat from the Cryo+ plate is absorbed
and transferred to the Cryobar, and is carried away
by the refrigerant.
The TEC is controlled by the Cryo3 software
through the channel #1 AC SSR on the OPTO22
backplane. When the channel #1 AC SSR is
energized, AC power is applied to 24VA TEC power
supply PS2 (see paragraph 3-2-2-3 for details), and
an unregulated 7VDC is supplied to the TEC.
The temperature of the Cryo+ device is monitored
using a glass encased thermistor bead, which is
potted into the Cryo+ section of the Cryobar. The
thermistor is rated at 5Kohms at 25ºC, and has the
same resistance/temperature curve as the chamber
temperature probe, as shown in Table 3-9. The
Cryo+ thermistor is connected at channel 1
(positions 1, 2) of the Analog Signal Breakout PCB.
3-8-1 7-Position Sealed Connector
Plug
In order to withstand the effects of ozone, cold
temperature and defrost moisture, and to maintain
the Cryo3 chamber vacuum seal, an environmentally
sealed 7-position cylindrical connector pair is used
for the TEC and the thermistor connection. The
female connector is mounted on the wall of the
stainless steel tub, below the Cryobar, and the
mating male connector is connected to the TEC and
thermistor according to Table 3-32. The connector is
rated for 7A at 875VAC per contact position.
3-22 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
Table 3-32. TEC and Thermistor Wire
Assignments
Position Signal Location
1 TEC + (Red) TEC
2 TEC - (Blk)
3 Thermistor Thermistor
4 Thermistor (No polarity)
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 Not used
The connector mating position is keyed with a
polarizing slot. Connection is made with a simple
push on the plug, when the polarizing slot is aligned.
To remove the connector plug from the mated
position, pull on the plug outer connector shell only.
Pulling on the exit wires will further lock the two
mating connectors.
3-9 FLUORESCENT LAMP AND
BALLAST
A socket-mounted, 15 watt, 1-inch diameter
fluorescent lamp (0) mounted in front of the Top
Power Box above the glass window provides for
illumination of the Chamber interior. The
fluorescent lamp is powered by Universal Input
Instant Start electronic ballast BL1. The Cryo3
software turns on the channel #3 AC SSR on the
OPTO22 backplane to energize the electronic ballast
and turn the fluorescent lamp ON.
The fluorescent lamp is activated automatically
whenever the glass window is opened, or manually
when the operator presses the Light key on the front
panel (with the lamp currently OFF). The lamp
extinguishes automatically when there has been no
activity on the unit for 30 minutes, or when the
operator presses the Light key on the front panel
(with the lamp currently ON.
3-10 SOLENOID VALVES
Up to five 24VDC-activated solenoid valves (Figure
8-12) are used in the Cryo3; one in the refrigeration
system (hot gas valve) and four in the Auto-
Disinfection System for D and DM models (catalyst
valve, debris filter valve, vent valve, return valve).
REV 11JUN09

The valves are of the normally-closed type, and are
actuated under control of the Cryo3 software control.
The valves receive operating power from the
regulated output terminals of the 24VDC power
supply assemblies (see paragraph 3-2-2-1 for
details). The Cryo3 software energizes the appropri-
ate DC SSR on the OPTO22 backplane to apply
operating power to the associated solenoid valve.
Channel assignments for the DC SSRs are listed in
Table 3-3. The DC SSR controls the 24VDC drive
side of the valve activation coil. The return side of
the valve activation coil is always connected to the
24VDC return terminals.
An arc suppression diode, housed inside a plastic
insulation displacement housing, is connected in
parallel with the coils of each valve. The cathode
side of the diode is connected to the SSR-switched
24VDC drive side, and the anode side of the diode is
connected to the 24VDC return side. It is critical that
this polarity be maintained, or the 24VDC power
supply will be shorted and damaged.
3-10-1 Refrigeration System
Solenoid Valves
Refer to paragraph 3-15 for theory of operation for
the refrigeration system.
3-10-1-1 Hot Gas Valve
The hot gas valve is used only for coarse
temperature control and defrost. When the hot gas
valve is commanded to open, it bypasses hot gas
through the 0.0625-inch diameter valve orifice to
both the Cryobar and the evaporator.
During temperature control, the valve open/close
duration is modulated proportionally to the
temperature difference between the Chamber
temperature set point and the actual chamber
temperature probe measurement.
During Defrost, the valve is opened continuously to
bring the temperatures of both the Cryobar and
Chamber to above freezing.
3-10-2 Auto-Disinfection System
Solenoid Valves
Refer to paragraph 3-16 for theory of operation for
the auto-disinfection system.
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
3-10-2-1 Catalyst Valve
The catalyst valve controls the air passage into the
catalyst canister. During normal operation, the valve
remains unactuated. During the ozone purge cycle,
the catalyst valve is opened to allow the chamber air
to be drawn through the catalyst canister by the
vacuum pump.
3-10-2-2 Debris Filter Valve
The debris filter valve controls the air passage into
the vacuum pump. During normal operation, the
valve remains unactuated. During the vacuum debris
removal cycle, the debris filter valve is opened to
allow the chamber air to be drawn through the two-
stage debris filters (located inside the Chamber) by
the vacuum pump.
3-10-2-3 Pump Return Valve
The pump return valve controls the return air
passage of the vacuum pump. During normal
operation, the valve remains unactuated. During the
vacuum debris removal cycle, when the debris filter
valve (see paragraph 3-10-2-2) is opened, the pump
return valve is also opened simultaneously. During
the ozone purge cycle, when the catalyst valve (see
paragraph 3-10-2-1) is opened, the Pump Return
Valve is also opened simultaneously.
Return air is re-circulated back into the Cryo3
chamber. An air diffuser installed at the return air
pipe opening aids in distributing the returned air
over the evaporator fins to minimize the warming
effect caused by the injected heat generated by the
vacuum pump.
3-10-2-4 Vent Valve
During normal operation, the vent valve remains
unactuated. When opened, the vent valve allows the
Cryo3 Chamber air to be drawn through the catalyst
valve (see paragraph 3-10-2-1) and catalyst canister
by the vacuum pump and exhausted to the ambient
atmosphere, thereby creating a vacuum condition
inside the Cryo3 Chamber.
A silencer attached to the outlet of the vent valve
aids in reducing air noise.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-23
OPERATING SYSTEM
3-11 BALL VALVES
Two ball valves are used in the Auto-Disinfection
System in Cryo3 D and DM models, the water drain
ball valve and the ozone sensor isolation ball valve
(refer to paragraph 3-16 for theory of operation for
the Auto-Disinfection System). Both ball valves are
AC motor driven type, with ozone resistant through-
hole valve body.
An external double pole, double throw direction
steering relay, K1 or K2, controlled by the Cryo3
software, serves to turn the ball valve AC motor ON
and OFF. Water drain ball valve relay is connected
to the Main Controller PCB at connector J13 K1
(Figure 8-25). Ozone sensor isolation ball valve
relay K2 is connected to the Main Controller PCB at
connector J14 (Figure 8-26).
Once the ball valve motor in turned ON, the AC
motor continues to turn until an internal position
limit switch is triggered by a cam coupling mounted
on the motor shaft. The next motor ON command
causes the AC motor to rotate in the opposite
direction until the cam coupling triggers the position
limit switch again. It takes approximately five
seconds for the ball valves to open or to close (90
degree rotation). Snubber networks (0.1µF + 100
ohm) are mounted across the switching contacts of
relays K1, K2 and the ball valve position limit
switch to suppress conduction noises.
3-11-1 Water Drain Ball Valve
The water drain ball valve is mounted directly on the
bottom of the Cryo3 stainless steel tub (Figure 8-25).
The valve is normally open to allow daily defrost
water or liquid cleaning chemicals used by the
operator to drain into the waste bottle.
The water drain ball valve is closed, during the
entire ozone cycle. Once closed, the ball valve will
remain closed until the ozone cycle is completed,
even in the event of loss of AC power.
3-11-2 Ozone Sensor Isolation Ball
Valve
The ozone sensor isolation ball valve (Figure 8-26)
is part of the Auto-Disinfection System plumbing. It
is physically located at the lowest point of the
plumbing system. The top side of the ball valve
opening is connected to a T joint in the ozone
destruct plumbing. The bottom side of the ball valve
3-24 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
opening is connected to the remote ozone sensor
element of the external ozone sensor (see paragraph
3-17 for details).
During normal operation, the ozone sensor isolation
ball valve is closed; no chamber-generated ozone is
allowed to reach the ozone sensor element.
During the ozone sensor check phase of the Auto-
Disinfection cycle, the ball valve is opened to allow
chamber-generated ozone to reach the ozone sensor
element. Once the ozone sensor is triggered, the ball
valve is closed immediately.
At the end of the ozone purge cycle, the ball valve is
opened again for three minutes to allow the chamber
air to reach the ozone sensor element. If no harmful
concentration of ozone is left inside the chamber, the
ozone cycle terminates normally and the ball valve
closes.
3-12 PRESSURE SWITCHES
Two pressure switches are used in the Auto-
Disinfection System in Cryo3 D and DM models; the
Chamber pressure switch and the pump pressure
switch (refer to paragraph 3-16 for theory of
operation for the Auto-Disinfection System). Both
pressure switches are single pole, single throw
differential type with two connection ports (low port
and high port). When the differential pressure
between the high port and the low port is higher than
the set point of the pressure switch, the switch is
closed by an internal diaphragm. When the
differential pressure between the high port and the
low port is less than the set point of the pressure
switch, the switch remains open.
3-12-1 Chamber Pressure Switch
A 4” H2O pressure switch is used to monitor Cryo3
chamber (Figure 8-24) pressure during the Auto-
Disinfection cycle. The high pressure port is left
open to the atmosphere, and the low pressure port is
connected to the Cryo3 Chamber.
The chamber pressure switch position is sensed by
the controller software at channel 7 (positions 20,
21) of the Digital Signal Breakout PCB. During the
Auto-Disinfection cycle, the pressure switch remains
closed at all times, except during the ozone sensor
check. If the Chamber pressure can not be
maintained at less than 4” H2O, the ozone cycle will
not start or will immediately abort.
REV 11JUN09

3-12-2 Pump Pressure Switch
A 1” H2O pressure switch is used to monitor the
pressure difference across the vacuum pump when
the pump is ON (Figure 8-24). The high pressure
port is connected to the vacuum pump outlet pipe,
and the low pressure port is connected to the vacuum
pump inlet pipe.
The Pump Pressure Switch position is sensed by the
controller software at channel 8 (positions 23, 24) of
the Digital Signal Breakout PCB. During the pump
check and ozone purge periods of the Auto-
Disinfection cycle, the pressure switch must remain
closed. If pump pressure can not be maintained at
more than 1” H2O, the ozone cycle will not start or a
Fatal error message “Ozone Purge Failure” will be
shown on LCD display screen.
3-13 VACUUM PUMP/PUMP
SPEED CONTROLLER
The Cryo3 D and DM models are equipped with a
vacuum pump used in performing the vacuum debris
removal and Auto-Disinfection operations.
For vacuum debris removal operation, the vacuum
pump, when enabled, draws sectioning waste from
the Blade Holder into the two-stage debris filters.
Vacuum strength is operator adjustable.
For Auto-Disinfection operation, the vacuum pump
is first used to establish and maintain a vacuum
inside the Cryo3 Chamber, and later to destruct
ozone through the catalyst bed. During Auto-
Disinfection operation, the vacuum pump operates at
full strength when enabled.
3-13-1 Vacuum Pump
The Cryo3 utilizes a linear vacuum pump rated at
115VAC, 50/60Hz (Figure 8-23).
The vacuum pump is capable of producing 3.6CFM
of air flow at 0” Hg, and the internal motor is
thermally protected to prevent overheating. Since the
vacuum pump is part of the Auto-Disinfection
system, its housing is specially sealed with silicone
along all the seams.
Operation of the vacuum pump is controlled by the
Cryo3 software via the channel #4 AC SSR on the
OPTO22 backplane. The neutral side of the vacuum
pump is connected to the pump speed controller
PCB (see paragraph 3-13-2 for details), where the
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
AC phase conduction angle can be adjusted by the
operator using a knob mounted on the left-side
membrane panel (see paragraph 3-5-2 for details).
3-13-2 Pump Speed Controller PCB
Once the vacuum pump is turned ON by the Cryo3
software through the channel #4 AC SSR on the
OPTO22 backplane, vacuum strength is controlled
by the pump speed controller PCB (Figure 8-23).
Refer to Figure 8-30 for a schematic diagram of the
pump speed controller.
Quadrac Q1 is the main AC switch that controls the
phase angle of the AC cycle sensed by the vacuum
pump. The phase angle is set by the combination of
resistors R4, R5, a remote panel mounted variable
resistor and capacitor C3. When the variable resistor
is set to maximum, Q1 can only be turned ON very
late into the AC cycle and the resulting RMS voltage
across the vacuum pump is low. When the variable
resistor is set low, Q1 can be turned ON early in the
AC cycle and the resulting RMS voltage across the
vacuum pump is high. When the RMS voltage
across the vacuum pump is higher (same as the
incoming AC voltage), more vacuum strength is
produced. Resistors R1, R3 and diodes D1 – D4 are
used to guarantee that time delay capacitor C3 is
always fully discharged at the beginning of every
AC cycle.
The AC SSR on the OPTO22 backplane, in
combination with Q1, reduces the maximum voltage
available to the vacuum pump by approximately
2VAC. A snubber circuit comprised of resistor R1
and capacitor C1 is added across Q1 to suppress
conduction noises.
In order to bypass the manually adjusted variable
resistor and to turn the vacuum pump ON at full
speed, a PhotoMOS OPTO1 is added across the
variable resistor. The controller software can enable
the OPTO1 and short out the variable resistor.
At 0” Hg, there is no difference in vacuum strength
between operating the vacuum pump at 50Hz or
60Hz. At 5”Hg, operating the vacuum pump at 50Hz
reduces the vacuum strength by roughly 10% when
compared to 60Hz operation.
3-14 MICROTOME SYSTEM
There are two types of Microtomes used in the
Cryo3; the semi-automatic Microtome (for Basic and
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-25
OPERATING SYSTEM
D models) and the fully automatic Microtome (for All five opto-isolators are directly wired to the J1
DM models). For the semi-automatic Microtomes, terminals of the Cryo3 Microtome Signal Breakout
the horizontal axis of Microtome is driven by a 1.8 PCB, which is installed on the top plate of the
degree size 23 stepper motor, and the vertical axis is Microtome frame. A 20-position ribbon cable
driven manually by the Microtome handwheel. For connected to Microtome Signal Breakout PCB
the fully automatic Microtomes, both the horizontal connector J2 passes the Microtome position signals
and the vertical axes are separately driven by one 1.8 to the Main Controller PCB at connector J5.
degree size 23 stepper motor.
Two opto-isolators (OPTO1, OPTO2) mounted on
The motor wiring to the connectors is keyed as the moveable shaft of the Microtome, are used for
shown in Table 3-33. detecting the horizontal (forward or reverse) limit
positions. Both opto-isolators can be interrupted by a
Table 3-33. Microtome Drive Motor stationary flag mounted on the side wall of the
Microtome frame. When the forward limit opto-
Wire Assignments isolator OPTO1 is interrupted, a warning “beeb”
Position Signal Wire Color sounds, and the LCD display shows the message
“APPROACHING MAXIMUM HORIZONTAL
1 A+ Black
TRAVEL.” The [Advance] and [Trim] keys
2 A- White disengage; however, manual or motorized sectioning
3 B- Red can still be performed. When the reverse limit opto-
4 B+ Black isolator OPTO2 is interrupted, the Microtome stops
retracting, and cannot be retracted any further. In
5 Cable Shield addition to the two opto-isolators, there are also
6 Polarize pin Vertical Motor only mechanical hard stops for the horizontal axis, in both
the forward and reverse directions.

3-14-1 Microtome Position Opto- Three opto-isolators (OPTO3 thru OPTO5),

Isolators
Five transmissive type opto-isolators (OPTO1 thru
OPTO5) (Figure 8-21) are installed on each
Microtome for the purpose of sensing Microtome
position. The opto-isolators are wired as shown in
Table 3-34. The 2nd position L signal is tied to the
V+ supply voltage at position 1, for light–ON
operation mode.
Table 3-34. Microtome Position Opto-
Isolator Wire Assignments
mounted on a stationary vertical slide rail, are used
for detecting the vertical upper, lower, and middle
limit positions. All three opto-isolators can be
interrupted by a flag mounted on the up/down
moving plate. When the upper limit opto-isolator
OPTO3 is triggered, the horizontal motor advances
one section thickness plus one retracting distance
forward. When the lower limit opto-isolator is
triggered, the horizontal motor retracts one retracting
distance backward. When the middle limit opto-
isolator is triggered twice consecutively, the
horizontal motor advances one section thickness
forward.

Position Signal Wire Color 3-14-2 Stepper Motors and Motor

1 V+ (5 – 24VDC) Brown Drivers
2 L Pink
3 Signal Black Up to two micro-stepping stepper motor drivers are
used in the Cryo3. One driver is used for the
4 GND Blue horizontal motor (Figure 8-12), and the second
driver is used for the vertical motor (Figure 8-22) in
When an opto-isolator slot is not blocked by an the DM models only.
object, the signal output is logic LOW, and a red
LED on the body of the isolator illuminates. When Each micro-stepping driver is rated to operate from
an opto-isolator slot is blocked by an object, the an input voltage between 12V – 48VDC, and can
signal output is logic HIGH, and the red LED on the regulate a user-programmable motor current of up to
body of the isolator extinguishes. 3A RMS. Motor current is programmed using a
resistor connected between positions 2 and 3 at

3-26 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


connector P2. For the horizontal motor, resistor R1
is used to set the motor current to 2A peak. For the
vertical motor, resistor R2 is used to set the motor
current to 3A peak.
Connector P2 facilitates connection of the stepper
driver to the associated stepper motor. Positions 8
and 7 are used for connection to stepper motor A
winding, and positions 6 and 5 are used for
connections to stepper motor B winding. When the
stepper motor is connected properly to the stepper
driver, the low resistance of the motor windings (less
than 5 Ohm) can be measured directly at stepper
driver connections between positions 8-7 or 6-5.
To minimize motor driver switching noises, shielded
and individually twisted pair cables are used for the
motor connections to the driver. Additionally, two
EMI suppression ferrite clamps (FR1 thru FR4) are
installed at both ends of each motor cable. The
motor cable wraps two times inside each ferrite
clamp.
The micro-stepping resolution of the stepper driver
can either be set manually (using on-board DIP
switches) or by the controller software. For the
Cryo3, the on board DIP switches must all be set to
the OFF position to enable software control of the
micro-stepping resolution. Typically, the software
sets the resolution to 50 microsteps/step.
In the event of a phase-to-phase short circuit, phase-
to-ground short circuit, phase over-current condition,
or driver over-temperature condition, the stepper
output current driver is disabled and a driver fault
signal is sent to the Cryo3 controller. When the
controller receives the driver fault signal, the
message “Microtome Horizontal or Vertical Driver
Failure” is displayed on the LCD display screen. To
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
re-enable the stepper driver after the fault is cleared,
the AC power to the Cryo3 must be cycled OFF/ON,
or the RESET signal to the driver must be toggled.
The Cryo3 controller communicates to the two
stepper drivers using 34 position ribbon cables at
connectors J8 (horizontal) and J9 (vertical).
3-15 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Refer to paragraph 1-3-6 for a physical description
of the Cryo3 refrigeration system and its compo-
nents. A schematic diagram of the refrigeration
system is shown in Figure 3-5.
Based on the current state of the instrument, the
refrigeration system will operate in one of three
modes: Normal Cooling Mode (paragraph 3-15-1),
Temperature Regulation Mode (paragraph 3-15-2) or
Defrost Mode (paragraph 3-15-3).
3-15-1 Normal Cooling Mode
Once operating power is applied to the Cryo3, power
is applied to the compressor. The compressor begins
operation automatically, and remains on so long as
power is applied, except during the Defrost Mode
holding period (see paragraph 3-15-3 for details).
The flow path of refrigerant during the normal
cooling mode is shown in Figure 3-6.
During the initial cooling period, chamber
temperature is warmer than the temperature set by
the operator. The vaporizing refrigerant absorbs heat
from the Cryo3 Chamber through the evaporator.
This absorbed heat is then dumped to the ambient air
by the condensing refrigerant inside the condenser.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-27
OPERATING SYSTEM

Figure 3-5. Refrigeration System Schematic Diagram

Figure 3-6. Refrigeration System – Normal Cooling Mode Flow Diagram

3-28 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


3-15-2 Temperature Regulation Mode
Chamber temperature is regulated according to the
difference between the temperature set point
(specified by the operator) and the actual measured
probe temperature.
When the Chamber temperature is warmer than the
set point, the hot gas bypass solenoid valve (see
paragraph 3-10-1-1 for details) is closed. When the
Chamber temperature is colder than the set point by
1°C, the hot gas bypass valve opens to allow the hot
refrigerant to enter the evaporator. The hot gas
bypass path of refrigerant flow during temperature
regulation is shown in Figure 3-7.
As a result of the hot refrigerant entering the
evaporator, the temperature of the Cryobar and the
evaporator, as well as Chamber temperature, in-
crease (get warmer). When the Chamber temperature
becomes 1°C warmer than the set point, the hot gas
bypass is turned off completely. When the measured
chamber temperature falls within ±1°C of the
chamber temperature set point, the Open and Closed
Figure 3-7. Refrigeration System – Temperature Regulation
and Defrost Modes Flow Diagram
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
periods for the hot gas bypass valve are modulated
to reflect the amount of deviation from the set point.
For example, if the Chamber temperature needs to
be warmer, the hot gas bypass valve is left Open for
a longer period than it is Closed. If the chamber
temperature needs to be colder, the hot gas bypass
valve is left Open for a shorter period than it is
Closed.
3-15-3 Defrost Mode
An automatic nightly defrost cycle can be
programmed to occur at an operator selected time.
During Defrost Mode, the hot gas bypass valve
remains Open for a period of time sufficient to bring
the temperature of the Cryobar, evaporator and
Chamber to above freezing temperature. The
refrigerant flow path during Defrost Mode is shown
in Figure 3-7.
During the Defrost Mode, the electric heaters (see
paragraph 3-7 for details) along the top and bottom
drains and under the evaporator are turned on to help
the melted water to drain into the waste bottle.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-29
OPERATING SYSTEM
When both the Chamber temperature and the
Cryobar temperature are warmer than 15°C, the
compressor is turned off to stop the generation of the
hot gas. During this holding period, if the Chamber
temperature or Cryobar temperature becomes less
than freezing, the compressor is turned back on to
generate additional hot gas. The electric heaters are
always ON during the entire Defrost Mode.
After 15 minutes of hold time, the Defrost cycle
terminates and the refrigeration system returns to
normal operation automatically.
3-16 AUTO-DISINFECTION
SYSTEM
The Auto-Disinfection System utilizes ultraviolet
radiation to generate ozone within the sealed Cryo3
Chamber for the purposes of pathogen destruction
and disinfection of surfaces within the Chamber. At
the conclusion of a disinfection cycle, ozone
produced during disinfection is reconverted to
oxygen through a catalytic converter.
Ozone is an unstable, pale-blue colored gas, with a
pungent odor. Ozone is a naturally occurring
component of earth’s atmosphere. It is produced
Figure 3-8. Auto-Disinfection System Schematic Diagram
3-30 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
primarily by interaction of the sun’s ultra-violet rays
with oxygen. The Cryo3 utilizes a 37-watt ultraviolet
(UV) lamp (see paragraph 3-18 for details) to
generate ozone through interaction with the oxygen
in the Chamber. The most important characteristic of
ozone is its extreme chemical activity. Being highly
chemically active, ozone readily combines with
itself and results in the regeneration of oxygen. At
sea level, the half-life of ozone is approximately 30
minutes.
The Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) Permissible Exposure Level (PEL) for
Ozone is 0.1ppm Time Weighted Average (TWA), 8
hours, or 0.3ppm Short Term Exposure Level
(STEL), 15 minutes.
3-16-1 Overview
Refer to paragraph 1-3-6 for a physical description
of the Cryo3 refrigeration system and its
components. A schematic diagram of the Auto-
Disinfection system is shown in Figure 3-8.
REV 11JUN09

The Auto-Disinfection System requires that the
chamber be sealed and depressurized to a minimum
of 4.0 in./H2O before the disinfection cycle can
begin. The chamber is sealed by closing and locking
the chamber window. The window switch senses the
position of the chamber window, and prevents
activation of the Auto-Disinfection System if the
window is open. Once the Chamber window is
closed, pressing the Disinfection key on the Main
Control Panel locks the Chamber window and
initiates a disinfection cycle. Additionally, if the unit
is so configured, a disinfection cycle may be
initiated automatically following the auto-defrost
cycle. The window lock position switch (see
paragraph 3-18-7 for details) associated with the
window locking mechanism senses the position of
the window lock, and prevents the application of AC
power to the UV lamp ballast in the event the
window is unlocked when a disinfection cycle is
initiated.
The Auto-Disinfection cycle is comprised of a
Chamber depressurization cycle, ozone generation
cycle, Chamber pressure and ambient atmospheric
monitoring, ozone sensor test, ozone purge cycle and
ozone check.
Figure 3-9. Auto-Disinfection System – Chamber Depressurization, Pressure and
Ambient Atmospheric Monitoring Flow Diagram
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
3-16-2 Chamber Depressurization
Cycle (Pump Down)
When a disinfection cycle is initiated, the water
drain ball valve (see paragraph 3-11-1 for details) is
closed to seal the water drain. The catalyst valve (see
paragraph 3-10-2-1 for details) and vent valve (see
paragraph 3-10-2-4 for details) are opened, and
power is applied to the vacuum pump (see paragraph
3-13 for details) for one second to depressurize the
Chamber. Atmosphere vented from the chamber is
released through the ambient exhaust port. The
Chamber pressure switch (see paragraph 3-12-1 for
details) monitors pressure within the Chamber.
Following two one-second pump down cycles, the
catalyst valve and vent valve are closed, effectively
sealing the Chamber, and AC power is removed
from the vacuum pump. The Chamber pressure
switch continues to monitor Chamber pressure for a
period of 60 seconds to verify the required pressure
is maintained, and the chamber seals are serviceable.
Vacuum flow during the Chamber depressurization
cycle is shown in Figure 3-9.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-31
OPERATING SYSTEM
3-16-3 Ozone Generation Cycle
Once the chamber has been sealed and properly
depressurized, AC power is applied through the
lamp ballast (see paragraph 3-18-4 for details) to the
UV lamp (see paragraph 3-18-1 for details), and the
65-minute UV lamp redundant timer relay (see
paragraph 3-18-6-2 for details) is energized.
The UV lamp generates ultraviolet radiation (UV-C)
at a wavelength of 185 nanometers. The ultraviolet
radiation reacts with the oxygen molecules in the
Chamber atmosphere, splitting the oxygen
molecules into two oxygen atoms, which recombine
with other oxygen molecules to create ozone.
AC power remains applied to the UV lamp for a
period of 60 minutes, during which time the ozone
concentration within the chamber reaches
approximately 1000 ppm (under ambient conditions
of 0 ft altitude and chamber temperature of -30° C).
During the ozone generation cycle, the Cadmium
Sulfide (CdS) photocell (see paragraph 3-18-2 for
details) continuously monitors UV lamp intensity. In
the event the UV lamp extinguishes prematurely
during the ozone generation cycle, the photocell
generates a signal to terminate the Auto-Disinfection
cycle immediately and an error message is shown on
the LCD display screen.
At the conclusion of the ozone generation cycle, AC
power is automatically removed from the UV lamp,
under software control. In the event of a software or
power control failure (in which case power remains
applied to the UV lamp), the 65-minute UV lamp
redundant timer relay removes power from the UV
lamp upon expiration of the 65-minute timer.
3-16-4 Chamber Pressure and
Ambient Atmospheric Monitoring
Chamber pressure is monitored throughout the
ozone generation cycle to ensure Chamber pressure
remains at less than 4 in./H2O minimum. In the
event chamber pressure becomes higher than 4
in./H2O, a one-second chamber depressurization
(pump down) cycle (see paragraph 3-16-2) is
initiated to return Chamber pressure to the specified
requirements. Vacuum flow during Chamber
pressure and ambient atmospheric monitoring is
shown in Figure 3-9.
3-32 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
During the ozone generation cycle, AC power is
applied to the catalyst heater at a 25% duty cycle to
warm the catalyst and improve catalytic conversion
efficiency during the periodic depressurization of the
refrigerated chamber.
During the first 5 minutes of the ozone generation
cycle, the ozone sensor monitors the ozone
concentration in the Cryo3 cabinet internal ambient
air to ensure ozone is not released into the
atmosphere as the result of a failed chamber seal or
other leak within the system. If the ambient ozone
concentration exceeds 0.2 ppm, AC power is
immediately removed from the UV lamp, and the
system enters the ozone purge cycle (paragraph
3-16-6).
3-16-5 Ozone Sensor Test
Following the 5-minute ambient atmospheric check,
the ozone sensor isolation ball valve (see paragraph
3-11-2 for details) is opened, allowing chamber
atmosphere to contact the ozone sensor (see
paragraph 3-17 for details) to verify sensor
serviceability. The ozone sensor is determined to be
functional when ozone within the Chamber
atmosphere “triggers” the sensor. Once the sensor is
“triggered”, the ozone sensor isolation valve is
closed, sealing the Chamber. Air flow during the
ozone sensor test is shown in Figure 3-10.
Following the ozone sensor check, it may take up to
55 minutes (the remaining ozone generation cycle
time) for the ozone sensor to clear itself and reset.
During this time, the cabinet ambient atmosphere is
not monitored.
In the event the ozone sensor is not “triggered”
within three minutes of its initial contact with
chamber atmosphere, the ozone sensor is determined
to be non-functional. The ozone sensor isolation ball
valve is closed, sealing the Chamber, and the system
enters the ozone purge cycle (paragraph 3-16-6).
3-16-6 Ozone Purge Cycle
At the conclusion of the ozone generation cycle,
unused ozone within the Chamber is reconverted to
oxygen through catalytic conversion. This
conversion is accomplished through use of a
catalytic converter comprised of a heating element
and MnO2 (manganese dioxide) catalyst bed, which
causes destruction of the ozone present in the
chamber atmosphere through oxidation.
REV 11JUN09

Figure 3-10. Auto-Disinfection System – Ozone Sensor Test and
Ozone Check Flow Diagram
The catalyst valve and pump return valve (see
paragraph 3-10-2-3 for details) are opened, and AC
power is applied to the heating element and vacuum
pump. The pump pressure switch (see paragraph
3-12-2 for details) monitors differential pressure
between the pump inlet and outlet lines to confirm
positive flow through the catalytic converter
(differential pressure of 1 in./H2O minimum), and
generates a signal to the controller that the pump is
operating and the purge airflow path is open. In the
event positive flow through the purge airflow path is
not detected, the Chamber window remains locked,
and the operator is alerted.
The pump draws atmosphere from the Chamber
through the heating element and into the MnO2
catalyst. The output of the catalyst is routed through
the return valve and back into the sealed Chamber,
creating a “closed loop” flow through the catalytic
converter. The heating element heats the atmosphere
within the purge airflow path to prevent moisture
condensation on the catalyst, and increase oxidation
efficiency. The MnO2 catalyst provides high-
efficiency ozone destruction, at ambient
temperature, and at saturation rates of up to 12%,
with a residence time of 0.36 to 0.72 second.
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Vacuum flow during the ozone purge cycle is shown
in Figure 3-11.
The full volume of atmosphere within the sealed
chamber is continuously recirculated through the
catalytic converter during the 10-minute ozone purge
cycle, ensuring adequate residence time of ozone in
the chamber atmosphere with the MnO2 catalyst. At
the conclusion of the 10-minute purge cycle, AC
power is removed from the vacuum pump, the
catalyst valve and return valve are closed, and the
system performs an ozone check (paragraph 3-16-7).
3-16-7 Ozone Check
At the conclusion of the ozone purge cycle, the
system performs an ozone check to ensure the
concentration of ozone within the Chamber
atmosphere has been reduced to less than 0.2 ppm.
The ozone sensor isolation valve is opened, and
Chamber air is allowed to seep onto the ozone
sensor element as shown in Figure 3-10. If the ozone
concentration in the chamber atmosphere is less than
0.2 ppm, the ozone sensor isolation valve closes, the
Chamber window unlocks, and the disinfection cycle
concludes.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-33
OPERATING SYSTEM
Figure 3-11. Auto-Disinfection System – Ozone Purge Flow Diagram
If the ozone concentration in the Chamber atmos-
phere is greater than 0.2 ppm, the ozone sensor
isolation valve closes, and the system repeats the
ozone purge cycle (paragraph 3-16-6). The system
will repeat the ozone purge cycle and ozone check
up to three more times. Following the final ozone
check, if the ozone concentration in the Chamber
atmosphere is greater than 0.2 ppm, the Chamber
window remains locked and the operator is alerted.
3-16-8 Aborting an Auto-Disinfection
Cycle
Once an Auto-Disinfection cycle is in process,
pressing the Disinfection key on the Main Control
Panel aborts the cycle. The manner in which the
cycle terminates depends on the current state of the
system. If AC power has not been applied to UV
lamp, the cycle terminates immediately, and the
chamber window is unlocked. If AC power has been
applied to the UV lamp, the system performs an
ozone check and performs an ozone purge cycle if
necessary (paragraph 3-16-6).
3-17 OZONE SENSOR
Cryo3 D and DM models are equipped with a
0-1ppm ozone sensor and dedicated controller PCB
(Figure 8-24). The purpose of the ozone sensor is to
3-34 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
guarantee there is no harmful concentration of ozone
left inside the Cryo3 Chamber after the ozone purge
cycle.
The ozone sensor element is installed directly behind
the ozone sensor isolation ball valve (paragraph
3-11-2) inside a T-shaped copper pipe. When the
ball valve is opened, any ozone inside the ozone
destruct plumbing seeps through the ball valve
opening and triggers the ozone sensor. An extension
cable is used to connect the remotely mounted ozone
sensor element to the dedicated ozone controller
PCB, which is installed inside the Cryo3 Optional
Power Box.
The controller PCB incorporates an adjustment
potentiometer to facilitate adjustment of the ozone
alarm concentration from 0 to 1ppm. The
potentiometer is factory-adjusted to 45%, for
0.2ppm ozone alarm. When the ozone sensor detects
an ozone concentration higher than 0.2ppm, a single
pole, double throw relay on the ozone controller
PCB is triggered. The Cryo3 controller software
monitors the ozone sensor alarm status at channel 8
(positions 22, 23) of the Analog Signal Breakout
PCB.
REV 11JUN09

At 5 minutes time into the Auto-Disinfection cycle,
the ozone sensor is purposely triggered by the ozone
generated inside the Cryo3 Chamber to confirm that
the ozone sensor is operating properly. Other than
during this check period, the ozone sensor should
not be triggered. In the event the ozone sensor is
triggered during the Auto-Disinfection cycle, Cryo3
enters the purge cycle immediately.
The ozone sensor PCB receives operating power
from the 24VDC Power Supply located inside the
Optional Power Box. During normal operation, a
green LED D3 on the PCB is illuminated to indicate
operating power is present. When the ozone
concentration is below the trigger level, a second
green LED D2 is illuminated. When the ozone
concentration is higher than the trigger level, the
green LED D2 extinguishes and a yellow LED D1
illuminates instead.
3-18 AUTO-DISINFECTION
SYSTEM OZONE GENERATION
ELECTRONICS
Refer to paragraph 3-16 for theory of operation for
the Auto-Disinfection System.
A 37-watt, U-shaped ultraviolet (UV) lamp mounted
inside the Cryo3 Chamber is used to generate ozone
during Auto-Disinfection of the Chamber. The lamp
is powered by 39-watt rapid start electronic ballast
BL2, which can operate only in the 115V 50/60Hz
range.
An 80VA chassis mount isolation transformer T2 is
used to reduce ground leakage current through the
UV ballast. The isolation transformer is fused at F1
0.5A/250V. The isolation transformer does not boost
or buck the input AC voltage.
To ensure personnel safety during Auto-Disinfection
operation, the isolation transformer output voltage is
connected to the Solenoid Driver and Timer PCB
65-minutes timer relay (paragraph 3-18-6), the
window lock solenoid position switch (paragraph
3-18-7), and the channel #5 AC SSR on the
OPTO22 backplane (paragraph 3-2-3) before
reaching the UV ballast. In order to turn the UV
lamp ON, the 65-minute timer must be running, the
software command must be activated by the
controller software, and the glass window must be
closed and locked.
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
For additional safety, cadmium sulfide (CdS)
photocell R5 is used to monitor the visible light
intensity of the UV lamp when the UV lamp is ON.
If the UV lamp does not come ON and stay ON as
required, the Cryo3 software generates a warning to
the operator.
The UV lamp assembly, which incorporates the UV
lamp, CdS photocell and the 7-position sealed
connector plug, is mounted on an aluminum
evaporator guard.
3-18-1 Ultraviolet (UV) Lamp
The 37-watt UV lamp (Figure 8-24) is a low
pressure, mercury-arc germicidal lamp that emits
ultraviolet radiation peaks at both 253.7nm and
185nm wavelengths. The 253.7nm UV (110uW/cm2
at 1 meter) is effective at killing microorganisms.
The 185nm UV (9uW/cm2 at 1 meter) is effective at
generating ozone air, which is a very active oxidizer
that aids in the destruction of microorganisms as
well. The quartz tubing for the lamp is specially
selected to yield highest UV transmittance. Care
should be taken to avoid touching the lamp.
Two white wires at each end of the lamp facilitate
connection of the lamp ballast. A low voltage from
the ballast is required to pre-heat the lamp filament,
which is connected across two wires inside the UV
lamp, before lamp starting.
As UV intensity is harmful to human eyes, the two
pane window glass is used to suppress UV
transmission to a value lower than the acceptable
Threshold Limit Value set by the ACGIH. To
prevent inadvertent exposure to UV rays, the ballast
AC power is interlocked with the window lock
switch. The UV lamp will not turn ON unless the
glass window is fully closed and locked.
3-18-2 Cadmium Disulfide Photocell
A hermetically-sealed package cadmium disulfide
(CdS) photocell (spectral wavelength peaks at
550nm) (Figure 8-24) is used to monitor the light
intensity of the UV lamp. The hermetic seal is
required to protect the CdS sensor element from
damage by ozone and cold chamber temperature.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-35
OPERATING SYSTEM
The nominal photocell resistance is 15Kohm @ 2
ftc, (average indoor lighting is between 5 – 15 ftc).
Photocell resistance increases as the light intensity
decreases. The photocell is positioned to face a
section of the UV tube away from the Cryo3 tub
opening to minimize the effect of ambient light on
the photocell resistance.
Before starting the UV lamp, the Cryo3 software
records the resistance reading of the photocell (dark
resistance value) and later compares it with the
photocell resistance reading after the UV lamp is
turned ON (light resistance value). If the dark
resistance valve is not higher than the light
resistance value by a predefined threshold, the
software generates a UV LAMP FAILURE error
message. If the photocell resistance value falls below
a pre-determined resistance threshold when the UV
lamp is ON during an Auto-Disinfection cycle, the
software also generates a UV LAMP FAILURE
error message.
3-18-3 7-Position Sealed Connector
In order to withstand the effects of ozone, cold
temperature and defrost moisture, and to maintain
the Cryo3 chamber vacuum seal, an environmentally
sealed 7-position cylindrical connector pair (Figure
8-24) is used for the UV lamp voltage and CdS
photocell resistance signal. The female connector is
mounted on the wall of the stainless steel tub, and
the mating male connector is connected to the UV
lamp and CdS photocell as shown in Table 3-35.
The connector is rated for 7A @ 875VAC per
contact position.
Table 3-35. UV Lamp and Photocell
Wire Assignments
Position Signal Location
1 Ozone lamp Ballast C UV lamp end
terminal
2 Ozone lamp Ballast C
terminal
3 Ozone lamp Ballast UV lamp end
L1 terminal
4 Ozone lamp Ballast
L1 terminal
5 CdS Photocell Photocell
6 CdS Photocell
7 Not used
3-36 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
The connector mating position is keyed with a
polarizing slot. Connection is made with a simple
push on the plug, when the polarizing slot is aligned.
In order to remove the connector plug from the
mated position, pull on the plug outer connector
shell only. Pulling on the exit wires will further lock
the two mating connectors.
3-18-4 UV Lamp Ballast
The UV lamp ballast (Figure 8-24) is a 39-watt
electronic ballast that operates between
60V – 130VAC @ 50/60Hz.
The UV lamp ballast has a built in soft-start feature
to reduce the starting stress on the lamp and help to
increase lamp life.
Connections to the ballast are made using 18GA
solid wires that fit into the push-wire connectors on
the ballast. In order to remove the wire from the
push-wire connector, use a suitable tool (such as a
small piece of 18GA wire) to press the tension
contact inside the connector.
AC power to the ballast is provided by 80VA
isolation transformer T2 (paragraph 3-2-1). The
neutral line is connected to the ballast directly, while
the hot line is always interlocked with Solenoid
Driver and Timer PCB 65-minutes timer relay
(paragraph 3-18-6), the window lock solenoid
position switch (paragraph 3-18-7), and the channel
#5 AC SSR on the OPTO22 backplane (paragraph
3-2-3).
3-18-5 UV Lamp Ballast Isolation
Transformer
Due to the Y-type filter capacitor used inside the UV
lamp ballast, the normal ballast operation ground
leakage current of 0.5mA is too high to pass the
UL61010A Laboratory Safety Standard. The
addition of the isolation transformer (Figure 8-24)
offers the ballast ground leakage current a path to
return to the transformer instead to the chassis.
3-18-6 Solenoid Driver and Timer
PCB
The Solenoid Driver and Timer PCB assembly
(Figure 8-26) is used in the D and DM models only.
It provides the following two functions: controls the
operation of the latching window lock solenoid, and
provides the 65-minute redundant timer function for
REV 11JUN09

the UV lamp. See Figure 8-32 and Figure 8-33 for
schematic diagram.
3-18-6-1 Window Lock Solenoid Control
The window lock solenoid is a 24VDC operated
latching type solenoid, which means once the
position of the solenoid is established; no voltage
across the relay coil is required to maintain it’s
position. The latching solenoid is comprised of a
permanent magnet, bi-directional activation coil, a
plunger inside the solenoid cavity and a return
spring.
The solenoid plunger is mechanically linked to a
pivoting blade that blocks the movement of the
window when the plunger is released. To allow the
window to open, the plunger in the solenoid is
retracted, the spring is compressed and the blade is
raised. To lock the window, the plunger in the
solenoid is released, the spring is relaxed and the
blade is dropped.
The latching solenoid coil requires bi-directional DC
driving voltages for operation. To retract the
plunger, +24VDC is required. To release the
plunger, -10VDC is required.
The PCB incorporates an H-bridge comprised of
FETs Q1 thru Q4. The gates to all four FETs are
normally biased OFF with 4.7K resistors R3 thru
R6. FET input control opto-isolators U1A thru U1D
are connected in series pairs. As a result of this
configuration, the FETs can only be turned on in
pairs (Q1-Q2 or Q3-Q4). Opto-isolators U1A and
U1B are connected in series, and control operation
of FETs Q1 and Q2 as a pair. Opto-isolators U1C
and U1D are connected in series, and control
operation of FETs Q3 and Q4 as a pair. When Q1
and Q2 are ON, 24VDC is supplied to the solenoid,
and the plunger is retracted. When Q3 and Q4 are
ON, -10VDC is supplied to the solenoid, and the
plunger is released. Series voltage drop resistor R7 is
used to generate the required -10VDC. R7 is
bypassed by diode D1 for 24VDC operation.
The retract and release commands to the opto-
isolated U1 are supplied by DC SSR channels 13
REV 11JUN09
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
and 12 on the OPTO22 motherboard. The Cryo3
software turns DC SSR #13 ON to open the window
lock, and turns DC SSR #12 ON to lock the window.
3-18-6-2 65-Minute UV Lamp Redundant Timer
To ensure the UV lamp can always be turned off in
the event of software timer runaway or the ballast
control AC SSR short circuit, a redundant timer is
used to disconnect the AC power to the UV lamp
ballast after 65 minutes of UV lamp ON time.
The timer electronics is powered by fused 2.4VA
transformer T1, which is energized whenever the
UV lamp ballast is ON. A 14-stage binary counter
U3 is used to divide a RC-based timer circuit made
up of resistor R12, variable resistor R14 and
capacitor C2. Variable resistor R14 is used to adjust
the 65-minute delay to accommodate for
components tolerance. Capacitor C2 is constructed
of X7R-type material to minimize capacitance
degradation due to temperature variation.
The timer Q14 output is used to drive parallel
connected inverters U2C thru U2F, which drive the
12VDC coil of double pole, double throw relay LS1.
When the timer is counting, the relay is enabled to
pass the input AC power (at J3-1) to the UV Lamp
Ballast (at J3-2). When the timer is expired, the relay
is disabled and the AC power to the ballast is turned
off.
3-18-7 Window Lock Position Switch
The window lock position switch (Figure 8-26,) is
used to detect the position of the window lock blade.
When the window lock bade is released by the
solenoid, the blade presses the long lever arm on the
switch to engage the switch contacts.
A double pole, double throw switch is used as the
window lock position switch. The first pole is used
to interlock the AC power to the UV lamp, and the
second pole is used to provide a signal
representative of the position of the switch to the
controller software (Digital Signal Breakout PCB
positions 5, 6).
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 3-37
OPERATING SYSTEM

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

3-38 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


SECTION 4
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
4-1 GENERAL
This section provides general maintenance,
operational checkout and test procedures for the
Cryo3. General maintenance procedures consist
essentially of cleaning and disinfecting the
instrument. Operational checkout and test
procedures are intended for use in conjunction with
SECTION 6, TROUBLESHOOTING, to verify the
instrument is in serviceable condition, and to locate
and identify the cause(s) of equipment malfunctions.
4-2 EXTERIOR MAINTENANCE
Wipe the exterior of the Cryo3 with a clean cloth
moistened with water. Do not use solvents of any
kind on the front of the control panel.
To disinfect the exterior surfaces, including control
panels, LCD display, Handwheel and window
(window should be completely closed), spray with
hospital-grade disinfectant. Let stand 10 minutes,
then wipe dry.
4-2-1 Cleaning the Ventilation Panels
and the Condenser Coils
WARNING: TURN THE POWER SWITCH
OFF AND UNPLUG THE POWER CORD
FROM THE UNIT BEFORE PROCEEDING.
AVOID TOUCHING SHARP EDGES OF
CONDENSER COILS THAT ARE EXPOSED
WHEN THE LEFT VENTILATION PANEL IS
REMOVED.
1. Vacuum the ventilation panels on each side of
the cabinet to remove dirt and lint.
2. Remove the ventilation panel from the left side
of the unit to access the condenser coils.
3. Vacuum the condenser coils to remove dirt and
lint.
4. Reinstall the left-side ventilation panel.
REV 11JUN09
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
5. Reconnect the power cord, and restore power to
the unit.
4-2-2 Cleaning and Disinfecting the
Waste Bottle
WARNING: WASTE BOTTLE MAY CONTAIN
BIOHAZARDOUS WASTE. DISPOSE OF
CONTENTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL
REGULATIONS. IF WASTE BOTTLE IS
FULL, USE CARE TO AVOID SPILLING
CONTENTS.
1. Carefully lift the waste bottle from its shelf.
2. Empty waste bottle contents in accordance with
laboratory waste disposal policy.
3. Rinse waste bottle with 70-95% alcohol (ethanol
or methanol) and/or 0.5% bleach (sodium
hypochlorite). Rinse waste bottle with warm
water within 20 minutes of application of
alcohol and/or bleach.
4. Pour approximately 200 mL of 10% formalin
into waste bottle.
5. Insert drain tube directly into waste bottle.
6. Position waste bottle so that is rests secuely on
the instrument.
4-3 REFRIGERATED CHAMBER
4-3-1 Cleaning and Disinfecting the
Chamber
Clean and disinfect the chamber as needed,
especially before long-term storage or transportation
of the instrument. Use the standard procedures
practiced in your laboratory, or follow those
provided in paragraph 4-3-2.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 4-1
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
NOTE: For D and DM models, it is recommended
that the following procedures be performed daily to
help reduce microbial population until the unit can
be cleaned and disinfected chemically (refer to the
Cryo3 Operating Manual for more information).
• Remove debris from the Chamber using the
Vacuum Debris Removal System.
• Perform a manual defrost cycle to remove frost
and ice buildup from the surfaces inside the
Chamber.
• Perform a manual disinfection cycle.
4-3-2 Chemical Disinfection of the
Chamber (All Models)
The instrument must be turned off, unplugged, and
cleaned and disinfected at room temperature.
Disinfect in a well-ventilated area, and use proper
personal protection equipment. After disinfecting the
unit, allow the instrument to thoroughly dry before
powering on.
Compatible cleaning/disinfecting agents are listed
below.
• Isopropyl alcohol
• Ethanol
• Methanol
• Amphyl
• Theracide® Plus
• Household bleach (5.25% sodium hypochlorite)
• Cidex®
• MadaCide-1, MadaCide-FD
• Gluteraldehyde (3.2% aqueous solution)
• Xylene (compatible, but NOT recommended as a
cleaning/disinfecting agent)
WARNING: REMOVE THE DISPOSABLE
BLADE FROM THE BLADE HOLDER AND
DISPOSE PROPERLY (REFER TO THE
CRYO3 OPERATING MANUAL FOR MORE
INFORMATION).
4-2 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
WARNING: FOR MODELS D AND DM
MODELS, DO NOT SPRAY OR POUR LIQUID
INTO THE CHAMBER UNLESS THE OZONE
PORT AND VACUUM PORTS ARE PRO-
PERLY CAPPED. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY
RENDER THE VACUUM DEBRIS REMOVAL
SYSTEM AND DISINFECTION SYSTEM
NON-OPERATIONAL.
1. If necessary, service and clean waste bottle in
accordance with paragraph 4-2-2.
2. Remove utility tray, heat extractor, Cryobar
inserts and anti-roll rake; set aside and disinfect
in accordance with paragraph 4-3-4.
3. Remove blade holder; set aside and disinfect in
accordance with paragraph 4-4.
4. For D and DM models only:
• Carefully remove vacuum filter set as one
piece (DO NOT disassemble components).
Dispose of properly as biohazardous waste.
• Install ozone port and vacuum port stoppers
to prevent spray or liquid from entering the
ports.
5. Clean surfaces inside the Chamber with a
hospital-grade disinfectant, and let stand for 10
minutes (reapply as necessary to ensure surfaces
remain wet for the full 10-minute period).
6. Rinse surfaces with water, followed by a
3-minute rinse of a 10% bleach solution.
Thoroughly rinse surfaces with water.
NOTE: Empty waste bottle between rinses, and
properly dispose of disinfectant and bleach solutions
as hazardous waste.
7. Allow interior chamber to air dry thoroughly.
8. For D and DM models only:
• Remove ozone port and vacuum port
stoppers.
• Install a new vacuum filter set.
9. Reinstall all accessories after they have been
cleaned, disinfected, and dried.
REV 11JUN09

WARNING: FOR D AND DM MODELS,
PEROXIDE, CHLORATES, ACETYLENE,
ORGANIC SOLVENTS, AND OTHER LIQUID
RESIDUE MUST BE REMOVED BEFORE
ACTIVATING THE DISINFECTION CYCLE.
FAILURE TO DO SO MAY DAMAGE THE
DISINFECTION SYSTEM.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
4-4 CLEANING THE BLADE
HOLDER
To prevent chattering and thick/thin problems during
sectioning, the blade clamping area must be kept
clean and free of all debris and ice. Use the
following procedure to clean the Blade Holder.

4-3-3 Cleaning the Drain 1. Loosen tension on the Clamping Plate by

turning Blade Lock Lever away from Clamping
To prevent blockage of the waste drain, clean the Plate (Figure 4-2).
drain using the supplied drain cleaning brush.

1. Pour a small amount of alcohol down the drain.

2. Insert the drain cleaning brush into the drain

(Figure 4-1); brush up and down vigorously
several times. Reach as far as possible down the
drain passage.

Figure 4-2. Removing Clamping Plate

Tension
2. If installed, carefully remove disposable blade.

3. Free clamping plate by pulling clamping pin

straight out from blade holder (Figure 4-3).
Figure 4-1. Cleaning the Drain
3. Carefully pour a small amount of alcohol down
the drain again to rinse out the passage.

4. Repeat as necessary.

4-3-4 Cleaning and Disinfecting the

Accessories
1. Spray utility tray and heat extractor with
disinfectant and let stand for 10 minutes, then
wipe dry.

2. Soak anti-roll rake, Cryobar inserts, specimen

holders and vacuum hose attachment (for D and Figure 4-3. Removing Clamping Pin
DM models only) in disinfectant for 10 minutes,
then dry.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 4-3

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
4. Lift clamping plate up and outward from blade
holder (Figure 4-4).
Figure 4-4. Removing Clamping Plate
CAUTION: Be careful not to lose the two small
compression springs (Figure 4-5).
Figure 4-5. Clamping Plate
Compression Springs
5. Use 100% alcohol solution and tissue wipes to
clean surfaces of clamping plate and back plate.
6. After cleaning, reassemble clamping plate by
positioning clamping plate on blade holder, then
re-inserting clamping pin.
4-4 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
4-5 GENERAL MAINTENANCE
CHECKLIST
A General Maintenance Checklist is provided at the
end of this section. Use the Checklist to record the
results of the operational checkout and diagnostic
tests outlined in the following paragraphs.
4-6 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT
Unless otherwise specified, instrument must be
powered on for a minimum of 10 minutes before
performing the following procedures.
Use the Operational Checkout Checklist provided at
the end of this section to record the results of the
operational checkout.
4-6-1 Window/Chamber Light
Operational Check
1. Confirm window heater operation by verifying
window is warm to the touch.
2. Open and close window. Verify there is no
evidence of sticking or binding. Verify that,
when fully opened, window remains in open
position without sliding toward closed position.
3. Verify fluorescent light turns on automatically
when window is opened.
4. Leave window open for 30 minutes. Verify an
audible alarm sounds. Leave window open and
verify audible alarm repeats three times, at
five-minute intervals.
5. Close window; verify fluorescent light extin-
guishes after 30 minutes.
6. With window closed and fluorescent light off,
press Chamber Light key. With fluorescent light
on, press Chamber Light key. Verify fluorescent
light turns off.
4-6-2 Subsystem Functional Tests
Refer to Section 2, Operating System, for a
description of the location and function of Cryo3
operating controls and indicators.
Unit must be powered on and operating before
performing the following procedures.
REV 11JUN09

4-6-2-1 Microtome Subsystem Check
1. Press and release Motorized Advance key.
Verify Microtome advances toward blade holder
one section thickness.
2. Press and hold Motorized Advance key. Verify
Microtome advances toward blade holder
continuously. When forward limit position is
reached, verify Microtome automatically retracts
from blade holder toward reverse limit position.
Press Motorized Advance key. Verify movement
of Microtome stops.
3. Press and release Motorized Retraction key.
Verify Microtome retracts from blade holder one
section thickness.
4. Press and hold Motorized Retraction key. Verify
Microtome retracts from blade holder
continuously. When reverse limit position is
reached, verify Microtome stops automatically
and an audible beep sounds.
5. Press and hold Trim key, and rotate handwheel.
Verify Microtome advances toward the blade
holder one trim thickness for each full rotation
of the handwheel.
6. For DM models only: Press and release
Intermittent Motorized Sectioning key; verify
instrument performs intermittent sectioning.
Rotate Vertical Speed Control knob clockwise;
verify vertical sectioning speed increases. Rotate
Vertical Speed Control knob counterclockwise;
verify vertical sectioning speed decreases. Press
and release Intermittent Motorized Sectioning
key a second time; verify intermittent sectioning
operation stops.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
4-6-2-2 Emergency Motor Off (EMO) Switch
Test
1. Press and release Continuous Motorized
Sectioning key; verify instrument performs
continuous sectioning.
2. Press EMO switch. Verify power is removed
from Microtome (movement of Microtome
stops).
3. Manually rotate EMO switch to reset.
4-6-2-3 Vacuum Debris Removal System Test
(D and DM models only)
1. Press and release the Vacuum key. Verify the
debris removal vacuum turns on. Rotate Vacuum
Suction Control knob clockwise; verify vacuum
suction increases. Rotate Vacuum Suction
Control knob counterclockwise; verify vacuum
suction decreases.
4-6-3 Settings Adjustment Tests
The LCD display (Figure Figure 4-6) main menu
screen provides indications of current equipment
conditions and operating status of the instrument,
provides for adjustment of current equipment
operating parameters, and allows up to three user-
defined settings containing pre-selected operating
parameters to be saved and recalled.

7. For DM models only: Press and release

Continuous Motorized Sectioning key; verify
instrument performs continuous sectioning.
Rotate Vertical Speed Control knob clockwise;
verify vertical sectioning speed increases. Rotate
Vertical Speed Control knob counterclockwise;
verify vertical sectioning speed decreases. Press
and release Continuous Motorized Sectioning
key a second time; verify continuous sectioning
operation stops.

8. Press Raise To Top key; verify Microtome raises

to its upper limit. Figure 4-6. Main Menu
The main menu is a two page screen. Pressing the
More button toggles between the two pages.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 4-5

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1. From the Main Menu, press the [SETUP] key;
the Setting Selection screen displays
(Figure 4-7).
Figure 4-7. Setting Selection Screen
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to scroll through the
available setting numbers (1, 2, 3, ALL), then
press the [SELECT] key to edit the parameters
for the desired Setting number.
3. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to scroll through the
parameters in the menu. A “beep” sounds when
you reach the first or last parameter in the
Settings menu.
4. Press the [MODIFY] key from the Settings
menu to modify values for the currently
displayed parameter, as follows.
NOTE: Be sure to make note of the parameters
assigned to the Setting number for reference and
verification.
Language (Figure 4-8)
Figure 4-8. Language Setting
• The flashing characters in the Set Language
field show the currently selected Display
language. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys until the
desired setting is reached. Press the [SAVE]
key to accept the displayed value.
NOTE: The default value for Language is
“English”.
4-6 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
System Time (Figure 4-9)
Figure 4-9. System Time Setting
• The flashing characters in the Set System
Time field indicate the “time display
format” setting. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to
toggle the “time display format” setting
between “12Hr” and “24Hr”. Press the [-->]
key when the desired setting is reached, The
“time of day - hours” setting flashes.
• Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to increment or
decrement the “time of day - hours” setting.
Press the [-->] key when the desired setting
is reached, The “time of day - minutes”
setting flashes.
• Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to increment or
decrement the “time of day - minutes”
setting. Press the [SAVE] key when the
desired time setting is entered to accept the
displayed values.
NOTE: The default value for time display
format is “12Hr”. The default value for System
Time is the current time.
Auto-Defrost Start Time (Figure 4-10)
Figure 4-10. Auto-Defrost Start
Time Setting
NOTE: The defrost start time parameter utilizes
a “12 hour” or “24 hour” clock, depending on
the mode selected for “Set System Time”.
REV 11JUN09

• The flashing digits in the Set Auto Defrost
Start Time field indicate the current
“hours” setting for the defrost start time.
Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to increment or
decrement the defrost start time “hours”
setting. Press the [-->] key when the desired
setting is reached,. The defrost start time
“minutes” setting flashes.
• Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to increment or
decrement the defrost start time “minutes”
setting. Press the [SAVE] key when the
desired setting is entered to accept the
displayed value.
NOTE: The default value for Auto-Defrost Start
Time is “01:00 AM”.
Auto-Disinfection (Figure 4-11)
NOTE: For D and DM models only.
Figure 4-11. Auto-Disinfection Setting
• The flashing characters in the Auto-
Disinfection field indicate the current auto-
disinfection setting. Press the [ ] or [ ]
keys to toggle the auto-disinfection setting
between the available values. Press the
[SAVE] key when the desired setting is
reached to accept the displayed value.
NOTE: The default value for Auto-Disinfection
is “Yes”.
Retraction Distance (Figure 4-12)
NOTE: If the auto-retract distance is set to “0”,
the Microtome functions as a non-retractable
Microtome.
REV 11JUN09
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Figure 4-12. Retraction Distance
Setting
• The flashing digit(s) in the Set Retraction
Distance field indicate the current retraction
distance setting. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to
increment or decrement the retraction
distance. Press the [SAVE] key when the
desired retraction distance setting is reached
to accept the displayed value.
NOTE: The default value for Retraction
Distance is “40 µm”.
Retract/Advance Speed (Figure 4-13)
Figure 4-13. Retract/Advance
Speed Setting
NOTE: For DM models only.
NOTE: If the auto-retract distance is set to “0”,
the Microtome functions as a non-retractable
Microtome.
• The flashing characters in the Set Retract/
Advance Speed field indicate the current
retract/advance speed setting. Press the [ ]
or [ ] keys to toggle the retract/advance
speed between the available values. W Press
the [SAVE] key when the desired retract/
advance speed setting is reached to accept
the displayed value.
NOTE: The default value for Retract/Advance
Speed is “High”.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 4-7
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
LCD Contrast (Figure 4-14)
Figure 4-14. LCD Contrast Setting
• The flashing characters in the Set LCD
Contrast field indicate the current Display
contrast setting. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to
increment or decrement the Display contrast
setting.
NOTE: The Display contrast will change as you
scroll through the available settings.
• Press the [SAVE] key when the desired
Display contrast setting is reached to accept
the displayed value.
NOTE: The default value for LCD Contrast is
“5”.
Window Heater (Figure 4-15)
Figure 4-17. Audible Alarms Setting
Figure 4-15. Window Heater Setting
• The flashing digits in the Set Window
Heater field indicates the current Window
Heater setting. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to
increment or decrement the Window Heater
setting. Press the [SAVE] key when the
desired Window Heater setting is reached to
accept the displayed value.
NOTE: The default value for Window Heater is
“50%”.
4-8 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
Key Sounds (Figure 4-16)
Figure 4-16. Key Sounds Setting
• The flashing characters in the Key Sounds
field indicate the current key sounds setting.
Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to toggle the key
sounds setting between the available values.
Press the [SAVE] key when the desired key
sounds setting is reached to accept the
displayed value.
NOTE: The default value for Key Sounds is
“Yes”.
Audible Alarms (Figure 4-17)
• The flashing characters in the Audible
Alarms field indicate the current audible
alarms setting. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to
toggle the audible alarms setting between
the available values. Press the [SAVE] key
when the desired audible alarms setting is
reached to accept the displayed value.
NOTE: The default value for Audible Alarms is
“Yes”.
REV 11JUN09
 GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Chamber Temperature (Figure 4-17) • Press the [Reset] key to reset the section
counter. The COUNTER value indication
immediately resets to “000”.

• Press the [SAVE] key when the section

thickness, mode and section counter settings
have been set to the desired values to accept
the displayed values.

NOTE: The default value for Section Thickness

is “5µm”; the default value for Mode is “number
Figure 4-18. Chamber Temperature of sections”.
Setting
Trim Thickness (Figure 4-20)
• The flashing digit(s) in the Set Chamber
Temperature field indicate the current
chamber temperature setting. Press the [ ]
or [ ] keys to increment or decrement the
chamber temperature. Press the [SAVE] key
when the desired chamber temperature
setting is reached to accept the displayed
value.

NOTE: The default value for Chamber

Temperature is “-30°C”.
Figure 4-20. Trim Thickness Setting

Section Thickness (Figure 4-19)
• The flashing digit(s) in the Set Trim
Thickness field indicate the current trim
thickness setting. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys
to increment or decrement the trim
thickness. Press the [SAVE] key when the
desired trim thickness setting is reached to
accept the displayed value.

NOTE: The default value for Trim Thickness is

“40 µm”.

Intermittent Number of Sections

Figure 4-19. Section Thickness Setting
(Figure 4-21)
NOTE: The Section Thickness Setting lets you
NOTE: For DM models only. The Intermittent
make adjustments to the section thickness and
Number of Sections Setting lets you make
operating mode, and reset the section counter.
adjustments to the intermittent section mode and
• The flashing digit(s) in the Set Section intermittent section value used by the
Thickness field indicate the current section Intermittent Motorized Sectioning feature.
thickness setting. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys
to increment or decrement the section
thickness.

• Press the [Mode] key to toggle the mode

setting between number of sections and total
distance sectioned.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 4-9

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Figure 4-21. Intermittent Number of
Sections Setting
• The current intermittent Section mode is
displayed before the flashing digit(s). Press
the [MODE] key to toggle between Number
of Sections and Section Thickness.
NOTE: Be sure the intermittent section mode
setting is set to the desired value before
proceeding.
• The flashing digit(s) in the Set Intermittent
Number of Sections field or the Set
Intermittent Section Thickness field
indicate the current value. Press the [ ] or
[ ] keys to increment or decrement the
value. Press the [SAVE] key when the
desired value is reached to accept the
displayed value.
NOTE: The default value for intermittent
section mode is “number of sections”; the
default value for intermittent section value is
“3”.
4-10 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
Password (Figure 4-22)
NOTE: For D and DM models only.
Figure 4-22. Password Setting
• The flashing character in the Set Password
field indicates the first character of the
current password setting. Press the [ ] or
[ ] keys to increment or decrement the first
character of the password. Press the [-->]
key when the desired character is reached to
accept current value.
• Select the second, third and fourth
characters of the password similarly. Press
the [SAVE] key when the desired password
has been entered to accept the displayed
password.
NOTE: The default value for Password is
“ABCD”.
5. When all parameters have been set to the desired
values, press the [EXIT] key on the Settings
menu and confirm your changes, as follows
(Figure 4-23):
• Press the [YES] key to save your changes to
memory; press the [NO] key to discard your
changes and retain the current setting
parameters); press the [CANCEL] key to
cancel confirmation and return to the
Settings menu to verify or modify your
changes, as appropriate.
REV 11JUN09

Figure 4-23. Setting Confirmation
6. Review the modified setting to ensure all
changes are properly saved by the software.
4-6-4 Temperature Stability Tests
Temperature stability test are performed with the
chamber window closed, and with the chamber
window open.
4-6-4-1 Closed Window Temperature Stability
Test
1. From the Main Menu, press the [CHAMBER]
key to display the Chamber Temperature screen
(Figure 4-24). The flashing digit(s) in the Set
Chamber Temperature field indicate the
current chamber temperature setting.
Figure 4-24. Set Chamber
Temperature Screen
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to increment or
decrement the chamber temperature, in 1°C
increments, until a set point of -20°C is
obtained. Press the [SAVE] key to accept the
displayed value.
3. Allow the chamber temperature to stabilize to
the -20°C set point as indicated in the
CHAMBER field of the LCD display.
4. When the chamber temperature has stabilized,
note the time (start time) and actual chamber
temperature.
REV 11JUN09
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
5. Note and record the actual chamber temperature
every 15 minutes for a total time of 60 minutes.
Verify chamber temperature at each reading is
-20°±1°C.
4-6-4-2 Open Window Temperature Stability
Test
1. From the Main Menu, press the [CHAMBER]
key to display the Chamber Temperature screen
(Figure 4-24). The flashing digit(s) in the Set
Chamber Temperature field indicate the
current chamber temperature setting.
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to increment or
decrement the chamber temperature, in 1°C
increments, until a set point of -20°C is
obtained. Press the [SAVE] key to accept the
displayed value.
3. Allow the chamber temperature to stabilize to
the -20°C set point as indicated in the
CHAMBER field of the LCD display.
4. When the chamber temperature has stabilized,
open the chamber window. Note the time (start
time) and actual chamber temperature.
5. Note and record the actual chamber temperature
every 15 minutes for a total time of 60 minutes.
Verify chamber temperature at each reading is
-30°±3°C.
4-6-5 Normal Operation (Sectioning)
Test
1. From the Main Menu, press the [CHAMBER]
key to display the Chamber Temperature screen
(Figure 4-25). The flashing digit(s) in the Set
Chamber Temperature field indicate the
current chamber temperature setting.
Figure 4-25. Set Chamber
Temperature Screen
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 4-11
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to increment or
decrement the chamber temperature, in 1°C
increments, until a set point of -26°C is
obtained. Press the [SAVE] key to accept the
displayed value.
3. Press the [Cryo+ Cycle] key to initiate the
Cryobar active cooling cycle. Verify the Cryo+
section of the of the Cryobar cools to -15°C
within five minutes.
4. Prepare and process (freeze) a sample for
sectioning using O.C.T Compound. Verify the
O.C.T. Compound freezes within five minutes
maximum.
5. From the Main Menu, press the {SECTION}
key to display the Section Thickness Setting
screen (Figure 4-26). The flashing digit(s) in the
Section Thickness Setting field indicate the
current section thickness setting.
Figure 4-26. Section Thickness Setting
6. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to increment or
decrement the section thickness setting, in 1
micrometer increments, until a section thickness
of 20 micrometers is obtained. Press the [SAVE]
key to accept the displayed value.
7. Mount the O.C.T sample in the chuck and cut
several sections. Verify all sections are of equal
and correct size.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for Section Thickness
Settings of 10, 8, 6 and 2 micrometers.
4-6-6 Defrost Time Test
1. From the Main Menu, press the [CHAMBER]
key to display the Chamber Temperature screen
(Figure 4-27). The flashing digit(s) in the Set
Chamber Temperature field indicate the
current chamber temperature setting.
4-12 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
Figure 4-27. Set Chamber
Temperature Screen
2. Press the [ ] or [ ] keys to increment or
decrement the chamber temperature, in 1°C
increments, until a set point of -30°C is
obtained. Press the [SAVE] key to accept the
displayed value.
3. Allow the chamber temperature to stabilize to
the -30°C set point as indicated in the
CHAMBER field of the LCD display.
4. Note the start time, and press the [Defrost} key
to initiate the defrost cycle.
5. Verify functional current during the defrost
cycle is in accordance with the following
requirements:
• 115V models – less than 12 amperes
• 100V models – less than 13 amperes
• 230V models – less than 9 amperes
6. Verify the top drain heater, bottom drain heater
and defrost heaters are warm to the touch.
7. Note the warmest chamber temperature reached
during defrost (when the LED indicator on the
[Defrost] key extinguishes), as indicated in the
[CHAMBER] field of the LCD display.
8. Allow the chamber temperature to stabilize to
the -30°C set point as indicated in the
CHAMBER field of the LCD display.
9. Note the defrost end time (when chamber
temperature returns to -30°C) and the total
elapsed defrost time.
REV 11JUN09

4-6-7 Ozone Concentration Test (D
and DM Models Only)
1. Close the chamber window.
2. Press the [Disinfection] key to initiate a
disinfection cycle.
3. Using an ozone leak tester, verify ozone
concentration within the chamber reaches 729
ppm minimum.
4. Verify that ozone leakage to ambient air does
not exceed 0.2 ppm.
5. Allow the disinfection cycle to conclude
normally.
4-6-8 Handwheel Torque Test
1. Attach a torque tester to the handwheel does not
exceed 6 in. lbs.
2. Verify torque required to operate the handwheel
4-6-9 Diagnostic Mode
The Cryo3 software incorporates a Diagnostic Mode
that allows service personnel to exercise the major
functions and components of the Cryo3 for the
purposes of diagnosis and troubleshooting. The
Diagnostic Mode is enabled by setting a hardware
jumper.
4-6-9-1 Enabling the Diagnostic Mode
WARNING: THE INSTRUMENT MUST BE
POWERED DOWN WHEN ENABLING THE
DIAGNOSTIC MODE. FAILURE TO COMPLY
MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE
INSTRUMENT.
1. Verify the power switch on the back of the
instrument is set to OFF (O).
2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the four
red screws from the main power box and back
cover (basic model) or auxiliary power box (D
and DM models), and open the panels to access
the cabinet interior.
3. Locate the Microtome Breakout PCB (mounted
on top of the Microtome).
4. Connect a jumper wire between terminals 14 and
15 of the Microtome Breakout PCB. The
REV 11JUN09
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Diagnostic Mode Menu displays, counting from
right to left.
5. Perform diagnostic mode tests in accordance
with the following paragraphs.
4-6-9-2 Keypad and LED Subsystem Test
1. Verify all characters are shown properly on the
LCD display.
2. Press the [SELECT] key to select the Keypad
and LED Subsystem Test, then press the
following keys, as applicable. Verify each key is
reflected on the LCD display when pressed,
integral LEDs function properly (as applicable),
and all keys have a “positive” fell when pressed.
• Advance • Func 2 • Disinfection
• Retract • Func 3 • Light
• Trim • Func 4 • Intermittent
• Vacuum • Cryo+ • Continuous
• Func 1 • Defrost • Adv to Top
3. Press the [EXIT] key, then press the [NEXT]
key and proceed to the Vacuum Subsystem Test.
4-6-9-3 Vacuum Subsystem Test (D and DM
models only)
1. Continuing from the Keypad and LED
Subsystem Test, press the [SELECT] key to
select the Vacuum Subsystem Test.
2. Press the [RtnVlv] key as necessary to verify
the return valve opens and closes properly.
Leave the return valve open.
3. Press the [FltVlv] key as necessary to verify the
filter valve opens and closes properly. Leave the
filter valve open.
4. Press the [CatVlv] key as necessary to verify the
catalyst valve opens and closes properly. Leave
the catalyst valve closed.
5. Press the [VntVlv] key as necessary to verify
the vent valve opens and closes properly. Leave
the vent valve closed.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 4-13
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
6. Press the [Vpump] key to verify operation of
the vacuum pump. Rotate the vacuum suction
control knob clockwise and counterclockwise,
and verify vacuum pump strength increases with
clockwise rotation, and decreases with
counterclockwise rotation. Press the [Vpump]
key to turn the vacuum pump off.
7. Press the [VPFull] key to turn the vacuum pump
on full strength. Verify the debris pressure swith
actuates properly. Press the [VPFull] key to tun
the vacuum pump off.
8. Press the [EXIT] key, then press the [NEXT]
key and proceed to the Refrigeration Subsystem
Test.
4-6-9-4 Refrigeration Subsystem Test
1. Continuing from the Vacuum Subsystem Test,
press the [SELECT] key to select the
Refrigeration Subsystem Test.
2. Press the [DefVlv] key as necessary to verify
operation of the defrost valve/hot gas valve (as
indicated by BIT change on the LCD display).
3. Press the [TempReg] key to activate
temperature regulation (set to –20º C).
4. Press the [WndwHtr] key to activate the
window heater. Verify the window is warm to
the touch.
5. Press the [DrnHtr] key to activate the drain
heaters. Verify the top and bottom drain
channels are warm to the touch.
6. Press the [Tec] key to active the Cryo+ device
(thermoelectric cooler). Verify the Cryo+
section of the Cryobar cools to –50ºC within two
minutes.
7. Press the [EXIT] key, then press the [NEXT]
key and proceed to the Ozone Subsystem Test.
4-6-9-5 Ozone Subsystem Test (D and DM
models only)
1. Close the chamber window.
2. Continuing from the Refrigeration Subsystem
Test, press the [SELECT] key to select the
Ozone Subsystem Test.
4-14 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
WARNING: MANUALLY CLOSE ALL
NECESSARY VALVES BEFORE TESTING
THE ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT TO PREVENT
OZONE LEAKAGE. INITIATE AN OZONE
PURGE CYCLE FOLLOWING ULTRA-
VIOLET LIGHT TEST.
3. Press the [WdVlv] key as necessary to verify
operation of the water drain valve (as indicated
by BIT change on the LCD display). Leave the
water drain valve closed.
4. Press the [WndwLk] key as necessary to verify
operation of the window lock (as indicated by
BIT change on the LCD display). Leave the
window locked.
5. Press the [PmpDwn] key to activate the vacuum
pump.
6. Press the [UVLamp] key to turn the ultraviolet
lamp on. Leave the lamp on for 15 minutes, and
verify the Cds sensor changes value. Press the
[UVLamp] key to turn the ultraviolet lamp off.
7. Press the [Purge] key to initiate an ozone purge
cycle. Allow the purge cycle to run for 10
minutes.
8. Press the [O3Snsr] key to open the ozone sensor
valve and verify ozone has been purged from the
instrument.
9. Press the [EXIT] key, then press the [NEXT]
key and proceed to the Input Subsystem Test.
WARNING: IN DIAGNOSTIC MODE,
DURING PURGE OPERATION, DO NOT
DISCONNECT THE PUMP RETURN VALVE
SOLENOID. IF THE PUMP RETURN VALVE
SOLENOID IS DISCONNECTED, THE
CHAMBER WILL BE OVER-VACUUMED,
AND THE CHAMBER SEALS WILL
RUPTURE.
4-6-9-6 Input Subsystem Test
1. Continuing from the Ozone Subsystem Test,
press the [SELECT] key to select the Input
Subsystem Test.
2. Using a heat gun, apply heat to the Cryobar
temperature probe. Verify temperature change is
indicated on the LCD display.
REV 11JUN09

3. Using a heat gun, apply heat to the chamber
temperature probe. Verify temperature change is
indicated on the LCD display.
4. Press the Emergency Off switch and verify
proper operation (as indicated by BIT change on
the LCD display).
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
6. Using a flashlight, verify proper operation of the
photocell. Value should decrease when light is
directed at the photocell, and increase when light
is removed.
7. Press the [Exit] key.

5. Rotate the Vertical Speed knob and verify

proper operation as indicated by value change
(clockwise rotation = maximum; counter-
clockwise rotation = minimum).

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 4-15

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Operational Checkout Checklist

WINDOW / CHAMBER LIGHT OPERATIONAL CHECK (PARAGRAPH 4-6-1)
Model Item Requirements Pass Fail
All Window Heater Window is warm to touch
All Window Operation No evidence of sticking or binding; window
remains in open position without sliding
All Fluorescent Light Turns on automatically when window is opened
All Audible Alarm Alarm sounds when window is left open for
more than 30 minutes; repeats three times at five
minute intervals if window remains open
All Fluorescent Light Extinguishes automatically 30 minutes after
window is closed
All Chamber Light Key Turns fluorescent light on and off
MICROTOME SUBSYSTEM CHECK (PARAGRAPH 4-6-2-1)
Model Item Requirements Pass Fail
All Motorized Advance Key Press and release - Microtome advances toward
blade holder one section thickness
Press and hold - Microtome advances toward
blade holder continuously
Forward limit – Warning “beep” sounds and
LCD display shows message “APPROACHING
MAXIMUM HORIZONTAL TRAVEL.”
All Motorized Retraction Press and release - Microtome retracts from
Key blade holder one section thickness
Press and hold - Microtome retracts from blade
holder continuously
Reverse limit – Microtome stops automatically;
audible alarm sounds
All Trim Key Press and hold - Microtome advances toward
blade holder one trim thickness for each full
rotation of handwheel.
DM Intermittent Motorized Press and release – performs intermittent
Sectioning Key motorized sectioning (stops automatically after
specified number of section is reached)
Vertical Speed Control Vertical sectioning speed increase and decreases
with clockwise and counterclockwise adjustment
DM Continuous Motorized Press and release – performs intermittent
Sectioning Key motorized sectioning (press and release to stop)
Vertical Speed Control Vertical sectioning speed increases and
decreases with clockwise and counterclockwise
adjustment
All Raise To Top Key Microtome raises to upper limit
EMERGENCY MOTOR OFF (EMO) SWITCH TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-2-2)
Model Item Requirements Pass Fail
DM EMO Switch Removes power from Microtome (manually
release to reset)

4-16 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Operational Checkout Checklist

VACUUM DEBRIS REMOVAL SYSTEM TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-2-3)
Model Item Requirements Pass Fail
D/DM Vacuum Key Press and release – Vacuum pump turns on
(press and release to stop)
D/DM Vacuum Suction Control Vacuum suction increases and decreases with
clockwise and counterclockwise adjustment
SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT TESTS (PARAGRAPH 4-6-3)
Model Item Default Value Entered Value Pass Fail
All User Configuration All
All Language English
All System Time 12Hr
Current time
All Auto-Defrost Start Time 01:00 AM
D / DM Auto-Disinfection Yes
All Retraction Distance 40 µm
DM Retract/Advance Speed High
All LCD Contrast 5
All Window Heater 50%
All Key Sounds Yes
All Audible Alarms Yes
All Chamber Temperature -30°C
All Section Thickness 5 µm (thickness)
# of Sections (mode)
000 (counter)
All Trim Thickness 40u
DM Intermittent Number of # of Sections (mode)
Sections 3 (section value)
D / DM Password ABCD
CLOSED WINDOW TEMPERATURE STABILITY TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-4-1)
Model Item Time Requirements Displayed Value Pass Fail
All Start Time -20°C ± 1°C
All After 15 min -20°C ± 1°C
All 30 min -20°C ± 1°C
All 45 min -20°C ± 1°C
All End Time -20°C ± 1°C
OPEN WINDOW TEMPERATURE STABILITY TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-4-2)
Model Item Time Requirements Displayed Value Pass Fail
All Start Time -30°C ± 3°C
All After 15 min -30°C ± 3°C
All 30 min -30°C ± 3°C
All 45 min -30°C ± 3°C
All End Time -30°C ± 3°C

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 4-17

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Operational Checkout Checklist

NORMAL OPERATION (SECTIONING) TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-5)
Model Item Requirements Pass Fail
All Chamber tempERATURE set to -26°C
All Cryo+ Cooldown tIME Down to -15°C in 5 min.
All OCT Freeze Time Freezes in < 5 min
All Check for equal section size at: 20 Micron
All 10 Micron
All 8 Micron
All 6 Micron
All 2 Micron
DEFROST TIME TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-6)
Model Item Requirements Actual Value Pass Fail
All Chamber Temperature -30°C
Defrost Start Time
All Functional Current: 115V < 12 A
All 100V < 13 A
All 230 V <9A
Heater Verification
All Top Drain Heater Warm
All Bottom Drain Heater Warm
All Defrost Heater Warm
All Warmest Temperature
All Elapsed time to returnt to
-30°C
All Defrost End Time
All Defrost Total time
OZONE CONCENTRATION AND LEAK TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-7)
Model Item Requirements Actual Value Pass Fail
D / DM Check Ozone Concentration 729 ppm min.
D / DM Check Ozone Leak 0.2 ppm max.
HANDWHEEL TORQUE TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-8)
Model Item Requirements Actual Value Pass Fail
All Handwheel Maximum Torque 6 in.-lbs
KEYPAD AND LED SUBSYSTEM TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-9-2)
Model Item Pass Fail
All Check all Characters
All Motorized Advance Key
All Motorized Retract Key
All Trim Key (and LED)
D / DM Vacuum Key (and LED)
All Variable Function Key 1
All Variable Function Key 2

4-18 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Operational Checkout Checklist

KEYPAD AND LED SUBSYSTEM TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-9-2) - Continued
All Variable Function Key 3
All Variable Function Key 4
All Cryo+ Key (and LED)
All Defrost Key (and LED)
D / DM Disinfection Key (and LED)
All Chamber Light Key
DM Intermittent Motorized Sectioning Key (and LED)
DM Continuous Motorized Sectioning Key (and LED)
DM Raise To Top Key (and LED)
VACUUM SUBSYSTEM TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-9-3)
Model Item Requirements Pass Fail
D / DM [RtnVlv] Return Valve Leave Open
D / DM [FltVlv] Filter Valve Leave Open
D / DM [CatVlv] Catalyst Valve Leave Closed
D / DM [VntVlv] Vent Valve Leave Closed
D / DM [Vpump] Vacuum Pump Clockwise to maximum
D / DM Clockwise to minimum
D / DM [VPFull] Vacuum Pump Full Turn on to check pressure switch
REFRIGERATION SUBSYSTEM TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-9-4)
Model Item Requirements Pass Fail
All [DefVlv} Hot Gas Valve Open/Closed
All [TmpReg] Temperature Regulation On (set to -20°C)
All [WndwHtr] Window Heater. Warm to touch
All [DrnHtr] Drain Heater Warm to touch
All [Tec] Thermo-electric Cooler At -30°C, cools to -50°C within five
minutes
OZONE SUBSYSTEM TEST (PARAGRAPH 4-6-9-5)
Model Item Requirements Pass Fail
D / DM [WdVlv] Water Drain Vlv Open and Close
D / DM Leave Closed
D / DM [WndwLk} Window Lock Open and Close
D / DM Leave Closed
D / DM [PmpDwn] Pump Down 30. second seal check
D / DM [UVLamp] UV Light Turn On for 15 minutes
D / DM Purge 2 sec Check Valve Cds Sensor Chg.
D / DM [Purge] O3 Purge 10 minute Purge
D / DM Press [Purge] Purge Stop
D / DM [O3Snr] O3 Sensor Open Valve
D / DM Ozone Sensor Check

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 4-19

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

4-20 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


SECTION 5
SERVICE
5-1 GENERAL
This section provides procedures for the removal,
disassembly, repair, reassembly and installation of
components and assemblies of the Cryo3.
Procedures include associated graphics, or are
referenced to the parts location drawings contained
in SECTION 7, ILLUSTRATED PARTS
BREAKDOWN.
General procedures are provided where servicing
should be apparent to the service technician.
Detailed procedures are provided where step-by-step
servicing should be followed.
5-2 UNPACKING AND
REPACKING
5-2-1 Unpacking
Refer to the Tissue-Tek Cryo3 Microtome /
Cryostat Operating Manual for detailed unpacking
instructions.
5-2-2 Repacking
Defrost, disinfect, clean and dry the Cryo3 prior to
packaging for shipment. Package the Cryo3 for
shipment using the original shipping container and
packing materials.
In the United States, please call Sakura Technical
Support at 1-800-725-8723 for the correct return
procedures.
5-3 DECONTAMINATION
Refer to the Tissue-Tek Cryo3 Microtome /
Cryostat Operating Manual for detailed procedures
to clean and disinfect the instrument.
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
5-4 GENERAL REPAIR
INSTRUCTIONS
All servicing should be performed with the Cryostat
in the normal upright position. If the instrument
must be laid on its back, oil in the compressor may
migrate into the refrigeration and condenser tubing.
CAUTION: If service is performed with the
instrument laid on its back, allow the instrument
to sit upright for at least 24 hours before the
power is turned on.
5-4-1 Preparation for Servicing
1. Unless otherwise noted, perform all removal,
repair and replacement procedures with the unit
turned off, and the AC line cord disconnected
from the facility power source.
2. Verify the unit has been cleaned and disinfected
prior to performing any servicing procedures.
Clean and disinfect the unit if necessary
(paragraph 5-3).
3. Remove the front cover assembly (paragraph
5-5-3-1) and access panels (paragraph 5-5-4-1)
as needed to facilitate removal and replacement
of components.
4. If a failure occurred in the ozone destruct system
during a disinfection cycle, allow the instrument
to remain idle for nine hours minimum to allow
sufficient time for any ozone in the system to
decay.
5-4-2 Wiring Repair / Cable
Replacement
When removing, repairing and replacing wires,
cables or harness assemblies, observe the following
general guidelines:
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-1
SERVICE
1. Note and record the routing and location of
wires and harnesses, prior to removal, as an aid
in installation.
2. Loosen or remove tie wraps, loop clamps, laces,
etc., as needed, to facilitate removal of wires and
harnesses.
3. Replace individual wires with wiring of the
same gauge and color.
5-5 CABINET SERVICING
2. Lift foot rest (15) at front edge, pivot upward,
and slide foot rest free from frame assembly.
5-5-2-2 Installation
The foot rest has tabs that slide into slots in the
frame assembly. Be sure to align tabs properly when
installing the foot rest. Install the foot rest as
follows:
1. Align tabs on foot rest (15) with slots in frame
assembly and slide foot rest into position.

2. Secure foot rest (15) to frame assembly with two

5-5-1 Waste Bottle screws (17) and flat washers (16).
Refer to Figure 7-64 and Figure 7-65, as appropriate,
for parts location. 5-5-3 Front Cover Assembly
5-5-1-1 Removal Removal of the front cover may be necessary to
provide access for servicing of components located
WARNING: THE WASTE BOTTLE MAY inside the Cryo3 cabinet.
CONTAIN BIO-HAZARDOUS WASTE.
DISPOSE OF CONTENTS IN ACCORDANCE 5-5-3-1 Removal
WITH LOCAL REGULATIONS.
Refer to Figure 7-64 and Figure 7-65, as appropriate,
Lift the waste bottle (19) off the shelf in the front for parts location.
cover assembly and remove from the drain tube.
1. Remove the waste bottle (paragraph 5-5-1-1).
5-5-1-2 Installation 2. Remove the handwheel from the handwheel
NOTE: Prepare the waste bottle for use only when assembly (paragraph 5-7-1-1).
all other servicing has been completed. 3. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
1. Pour approximately 200 mL of 10% formalin against the restrainers.
into the waste bottle (19).
NOTE: Exercise care to avoid damaging drain tube
2. Insert the drain tube directly into the waste when removing front cover.
bottle (19).
4. Pull out on the front cover (24) to free the
3. Position the waste bottle (19) so that it rests locking rollers from the slots in the frame
securely on the shelf in the front panel assembly. assembly, and remove cover.

5-5-3-2 Roller Replacement

5-5-2 Footrest
Refer to Figure 7-66 for parts location.
Refer to Figure 7-64 and Figure 7-65, as appropriate,
for parts location. The front cover rollers secure the front cover in
place on the frame assembly. Replace damaged
5-5-2-1 Removal rollers as necessary.
The foot rest is secured to the frame assembly at the 1. Remove screw (2) securing damaged roller (5)
two front edge bottom corners. Remove the foot rest to front cover.
as follows:
2. Apply Threadlock (Loctite 262) (4) to threads of
1. Remove two screws (17) and flat washers (16) screws (2).
securing foot rest (15) to frame assembly.

5-2 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


3. Position roller (5) in place on front cover (1) and
secure in place with screw (2).
5-5-3-3 Installation
Refer to Figure 7-64 and Figure 7-65, as appropriate,
for parts location.
NOTE: Exercise care to avoid damaging drain tube
when installing front cover.
1. Route drain tube through cutout in front cover
(24). Position front cover in place on frame, and
press firmly to engage locking rollers with slots
in the frame assembly.
2. Carefully lower the top cover.
3. Install the handwheel on the handwheel
assembly (paragraph 5-7-1-2).
4. Install the waste bottle (paragraph 5-5-1-2).
5-5-4 Access Panels
Some servicing operations require removal of the
access panels to gain sufficient access to the interior
of the instrument. Remove the access panels as
necessary to facilitate servicing operations.
Refer to Figure 7-64 and Figure 7-65, as appropriate,
for parts location.
NOTE: When removing the right and left side
access panels (8, 9, Figure 7-64 and Figure 7-65) it
is necessary to remove the front cover (see
paragraph 5-5-3) as well as the top and bottom back
panels (11, 12), and to open the main power box and
option power box to gain access to the attaching
hardware for the side panels.
5-5-4-1 Removal
1. Remove the front cover (see paragraph 5-5-3).
2. Remove two red screws and lock washers and
open main power box door.
3. For D and DM models only: remove two red
screws and lock washers and open option power
box door.
4. For Basic models only: Remove two screws (5,
Figure 7-64), two flat washers (6), five nuts (26)
and five lock washers (25), and remove back
cover (18).
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
5. Remove top back panel (11, Figure 7-64 and
Figure 7-65) from frame by removing 10 screws
(10).
6. Remove bottom back panel (12) from frame by
removing 10 screws (10).
7. Remove right panel (8) from frame by removing
seven nuts (14).
8. Remove left panel (9) from frame by removing
seven nuts (14).
5-5-4-2 Installation
1. Install left panel (9, Figure 7-64 and Figure 7-
65) on frame and secure with seven nuts (14).
2. Install right panel (8) on frame and secure with
seven nuts (14).
3. Install bottom back panel (12) on frame and
secure with 10 screws (10).
4. Install top back panel (11) on frame and secure
with 10 nuts (10).
5. For Basic models only: Install back cover (18,
Figure 7-64) on frame and secure with two
screws (5), flat washers (6), five nuts (26) and
five lock washers (25).
6. For D and DM models only: Close option
power box door and secure with two red screws
and lock washers).
7. Close main power box door and secure with two
red screws and lock washers.
5-6 TOP COVER SERVICING
The top cover assembly houses the controls and
indicators necessary for operation of the instrument.
5-6-1 Removal
The Top Cover Assembly is attached to a hinge on
the Cryo3 cabinet. In most cases, opening the top
cover assembly will provide sufficient access for the
performance of servicing procedures. Remove the
top cover assembly only when necessary to facilitate
a given servicing procedure.
Refer to Figure 7-46 and Figure 7-38 through Figure
7-40, as appropriate, for parts location.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-3
SERVICE
CAUTION: Provide adequate support for the top
cover during removal to prevent stressing of the
top cover or frame hinge.
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
NOTE: Pump speed potentiometer (11, Figure
7-39 and Figure 7-40) is used on D and DM
models only.
2. Disconnect pump speed potentiometer (R4)
harness assembly from pump speed
potentiometer (11, Figure 7-39 and Figure 7-40).
NOTE: Vertical speed potentiometer (11,
Figure 7-40) is used on DM models only.
3. Disconnect vertical speed potentiometer (R3)
harness assembly from vertical speed
potentiometer (11, Figure 7-40).
NOTE: Emergency off switch (13, Figure 7-40)
is used on DM models only.
4. Unplug spade lugs from terminals of emergency
off switch.
5. Remove screw (2, Figure 7-38 through
Figure 7-40) securing each lanyard (1) to the top
power box.
6. Disconnect controller J6 - to - user I/F center
PCB harness assembly from connector J1 of user
I/F breakout PCB (6).
7. Disconnect membrane keyboard ground cable
from connector J5 of user I/F breakout PCB.
8. Disconnect controller J1 – to – serial LCD
harness assembly from LCD (7).
9. Remove five screws (3, Figure 7-46) and lock
washers (4) securing top cover to frame hinge,
and remove top cover.
5-6-2 Restrainers
Two restrainers associated with the top cover
prevent the cover from falling over backwards when
in the open position.
CAUTION: Provide adequate support for the top
cover when replacing restrainers to prevent
stressing of the top cover or frame hinge.
5-4 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
NOTE: Note orientation of restrainers to aid in
installation.
5-6-2-1 Removal
Refer to Figure 7-46 for parts location.
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Remove screw (2) and lock washer (4) securing
each lanyard (1) to the top power box.
3. Remove screw (3) and lock washer (4) securing
each lanyard (1) to top cover.
5-6-2-2 Installation
Refer to Figure 7-46for parts location.
1. Position loop clamps (5, 6) on top cover, and
secure each lanyard (1) to top cover using screw
(3) and lock washer (4). Make sure lanyards are
oriented as noted during removal.
2. Secure each lanyard (1) to top power box with
screw (2) and lock washer (4). Tighten screws
(2) to 35 inch-pounds.
3. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-6-3 Door Catch
Refer to Figure 7-46 for parts location.
5-6-3-1 Removal
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Remove two screws (8) and lock washers (9),
and remove door catch (7) from tub assembly.
5-6-3-2 Installation
1. Position door catch (7) on tub assembly and
secure with two screws (8) and lock washers (9).
Tighten screws (8) to 70 inch-ounces.
2. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-6-4 User I/F Breakout PCB
The User I/F Signal Breakout PCB distributes Main
Controller PCB keypads matrix and LED signals to
the user interface membrane panels.
REV 11JUN09

5-6-4-1 Removal
Refer to Figure 7-38 through Figure 7-40, as
appropriate, for parts location.
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Disconnect controller J6 - to - user I/F center
PCB harness assembly from connector J1 of user
I/F breakout PCB (6).
3. Disconnect center membrane panel ribbon cable
from connector J2 of user I/F breakout PCB.
4. Disconnect left membrane panel ribbon cable
from connector J3 of user I/F breakout PCB.
NOTE: Right membrane panel is used on DM
models only.
5. Disconnect right membrane panel ribbon cable
from connector J4 of user I/F breakout PCB.
6. Disconnect membrane keyboard ground cable
from connector J5 of user I/F breakout PCB.
7. Remove four nuts (3) securing user I/F breakout
PCB to top cover, and remove user I/F breakout
PCB. Remove four standoffs (2) from screws
(4). Do not remove screws.
5-6-4-2 Installation
Refer to Figure 7-38 through Figure 7-40, as
appropriate, for parts location.
1. Install four standoffs (2) on screws (4). Position
user I/F breakout PCB (6) on top cover, and
secure in place with four nuts (3). Tighten nuts
(3) to 36 inch-ounces.
2. Connect membrane keyboard ground cable to
connector J5 of user I/F breakout PCB.
NOTE: Right membrane panel is used on D and
DM models only.
3. Connect right membrane panel ribbon cable to
connector J4 of user I/F breakout PCB.
4. Connect left membrane panel ribbon cable to
connector J3 of user I/F breakout PCB.
5. Connect center membrane panel ribbon cable to
connector J2 of user I/F breakout PCB.
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
6. Connect controller J6 – to - user I/F center PCB
harness assembly from connector J1 of user I/F
breakout PCB.
7. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-6-5 LCD Display
The graphic LCD display provides visual display of
prompts, messages and system status to the user.
5-6-5-1 Removal
Refer to Figure 7-38 through Figure 7-40, as
appropriate, for parts location.
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Disconnect controller J1 – to – serial LCD
harness assembly from LCD (7).
3. Remove four nuts (3) securing LCD to top
cover, and remove LCD. Remove four standoffs
(19, Figure 7-38; 20, Figure 7-39 and
Figure 7-40) from screws (20, Figure 7-38; 21,
Figure 7-39 and Figure 7-40). Do not remove
screws.
5-6-5-2 Installation
Refer to Figure 7-38 through Figure 7-40, as
appropriate, for parts location.
1. Install four standoffs (19, Figure 7-38; 20,
Figure 7-39 and Figure 7-40) on screws (20,
Figure 7-38; 21, Figure 7-39 and Figure 7-40).
Position LCD (7) on top cover and secure with
four nuts (3). Tighten nuts (3) to 36 inch-ounces.
2. Connect controller J1 – to – serial LCD harness
assembly to LCD.
3. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-6-6 Membrane Panel Servicing
Three membrane keypad panels installed on the top
cover provide the means for programming user-
selectable operating parameters, selecting system
operating modes and controlling ancillary equipment
(vacuum debris removal system, ozone disinfection
system, etc.).
Membrane panels are secured to the top cover by
adhesive backing. Exercise care when replacing
membrane panels to avoid scratching the top cover.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-5
SERVICE
Refer to Figure 7-38 through Figure 7-40, as
appropriate, for parts location.
5-6-6-1 Center Membrane Panel Removal
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Disconnect center membrane panel ribbon cable
from connector J2 of user I/F breakout PCB.
3. Using a knife or other suitable tool, carefully
peel center membrane panel (8) off of top cover.
Route center membrane panel ribbon cable out
through slot in top cover. Discard membrane
panel.
4. Clean adhesive residue from mounting surface
on top cover as necessary.
5-6-6-2 Center Membrane Panel Installation
1. Route ribbon cable of new center membrane
panel through slot in top cover and position in
place on top cover.
2. Remove protective backing from center
membrane panel.
CAUTION: Exercise care to ensure proper
positioning of membrane panel on top cover.
3. Place center membrane panel in position on top
cover, and apply firm, even pressure from the
center outward to affix.
4. Connect center membrane panel ribbon cable to
connector J2 of user I/F breakout PCB.
5. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-6-6-3 Left Membrane Panel Removal
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Disconnect left membrane panel ribbon cable
from connector J3 of user I/F breakout PCB.
NOTE: Pump speed potentiometer (11) is used
on D and DM models only.
3. Remove control knob (12, Figure 7-39 and
Figure 7-40 from pump speed potentiometer
(11).
4. Using a knife or other suitable tool, carefully
peel left membrane panel (9) off of top cover.
5-6 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
Route left membrane panel ribbon cable out
through slot in top cover. Discard membrane
panel.
5-6-6-4 Left Membrane Panel Installation
1. Clean adhesive residue from mounting surface
on top cover as necessary.
2. Route ribbon cable of new left membrane panel
through slot in top cover and position in place
on top cover.
3. Remove protective backing from left membrane
panel.
CAUTION: Exercise care to ensure proper
positioning of membrane panel on top cover.
4. Place left membrane panel in position on top
cover, and apply firm, even pressure from the
center outward to affix.
NOTE: Pump speed potentiometer (11) is used on D
and DM models only.
5. Install control knob (12, Figure 7-39 and Figure
7-40) on pump speed potentiometer (11).
Tighten control knob setscrew to 60 inch-
ounces.
6. Connect left membrane panel ribbon cable to
connector J3 of user I/F breakout PCB.
7. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-6-6-5 Right Membrane Panel Removal
NOTE: Right membrane panel is used on DM
models only.
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Disconnect right membrane panel ribbon cable
from connector J4 of user I/F breakout PCB.
3. Remove control knob (12) from vertical speed
potentiometer (11).
4. Using a knife or other suitable tool, carefully
peel right membrane panel (10) off of top cover.
Route right membrane panel ribbon cable out
through slot in top cover. Discard membrane
panel.
REV 11JUN09

5-6-6-6 Right Membrane Panel Installation
NOTE: Right membrane panel is used on DM
models only.
1. Clean adhesive residue from mounting surface
on top cover as necessary.
2. Route ribbon cable of new right membrane panel
through slot in top cover and position in place
on top cover.
3. Remove protective backing from right mem-
brane panel.
CAUTION: Exercise care to ensure proper
positioning of membrane panel on top cover.
4. Place right membrane panel in position on top
cover, and apply firm, even pressure from the
center outward to affix.
5. Install control knob (12) on vertical speed
potentiometer (11). Tighten control knob
setscrew to 60 inch-ounces.
6. Connect right membrane panel ribbon cable to
connector J4 of user I/F breakout PCB.
7. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-6-7 Pump Speed Potentiometer
The pump speed potentiometer is associated with the
left membrane panel.
NOTE: The pump speed potentiometer is used on D
and DM models only.
Refer to Figure 7-39 and Figure 7-40, as appropriate,
for parts location.
5-6-7-1 Removal
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Remove control knob (12) from pump speed
potentiometer (11).
3. Disconnect pump speed potentiometer (R4)
harness assembly from pump speed
potentiometer (11).
4. Remove nut and washer securing pump speed
potentiometer (11) to top cover, and remove
potentiometer and mylar tape (19). Retain nut
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
and washer with potentiometer. Discard mylar
tape.
5-6-7-2 Installation
1. Install new mylar tape (19) and pump speed
potentiometer (11) on top cover, and secure with
nut and washer. Tighten nut to 35 inch-ounces.
2. Connect pump speed potentiometer (R4) harness
assembly to pump speed potentiometer (11).
3. Install control knob (12) on pump speed
potentiometer (11). Tighten control knob
setscrew to 60 inch-ounces.
4. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-6-8 Vertical Speed Potentiometer
The vertical speed potentiometer is associated with
the right membrane panel.
NOTE: The vertical speed potentiometer is used on
DM models only.
Refer to Figure 7-40 for parts location.
5-6-8-1 Removal
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Remove control knob (12) from vertical speed
potentiometer (11).
3. Disconnect vertical speed potentiometer (R3)
harness assembly from vertical speed
potentiometer (11).
4. Remove nut and washer securing vertical speed
potentiometer (11) to top cover, and remove
potentiometer and mylar tape (19). Retain nut
and washer with potentiometer. Discard mylar
tape.
5-6-8-2 Installation
1. Install new mylar tape (19) and vertical speed
potentiometer (11) on top cover, and secure with
nut and washer. Tighten nut to 35 inch-ounces.
2. Connect vertical speed potentiometer (R3)
harness assembly to vertical speed potentiometer
(11).
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-7
SERVICE
3. Install control knob (12) on vertical speed
potentiometer (11). Tighten control knob
setscrew to 60 inch-ounces.
4. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-6-9 Emergency Stop Switch
NOTE: The emergency stop switch is used on DM
models only.
Refer to Figure 7-40 for parts location.
5-6-9-1 Removal
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Unplug spade lugs from terminals of emergency
off switch (13).
3. Release spring clip and remove emergency stop
switch (13) from to cover.
5-6-9-2 Installation
1. Install emergency stop switch (13) through top
cover and secure with spring clip.
2. Connect two spade lugs to terminals of
emergency off switch (13).
3. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-6-10 Keeper
Refer to Figure 7-38 through Figure 7-40, as
appropriate, for parts location.
5-6-10-1 Removal
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
NOTE: Screws (15) are secured with adhesive.
Some force may be required to loosen.
2. Remove two screws (15) and lock washers (16),
and remove keeper (14) from top cover.
5-6-10-2 Installation
1. Apply adhesive (17) to threads of two screws
(15).
2. Position keeper (14) on top cover, and secure
with two screws (15) and lock washers (16).
5-8 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
3. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-6-11 Installation
Refer to Figure 7-46 and Figure 7-38 through Figure
7-40, as appropriate, for parts location.
CAUTION: Provide adequate support for the top
cover during installation to prevent stressing of
the top cover or frame hinge.
1. Position loop clamps (5, 6, Figure 7-38 through
Figure 7-40) on hinge. Align top cover with
mounting holes in frame hinge, and secure cover
to hinge with five screws (3, Figure 7-46).
Tighten screws (3) to 70 inch-ounces.
2. Connect controller J1 – to – serial LCD harness
assembly to LCD (7, Figure 7-38 through Figure
7-40).
3. Connect membrane keyboard ground cable to
connector J5 of user I/F breakout PCB (6).
4. Connect controller J6 - to - user I/F center PCB
harness assembly to connector J1 of user I/F
breakout PCB.
5. Secure each lanyard (1) to top power box with
screw (2) and lock washer (4). Tighten screws
(2) to 35 inch-pounds.
NOTE: Emergency off switch (13, Figure 7-40)
is used on DM models only.
6. Connect two spade lugs to terminals of
emergency off switch (13).
NOTE: Vertical speed potentiometer (11) is
used on DM models only.
7. Connect vertical speed potentiometer (R3)
harness assembly to vertical speed potentiometer
(11).
NOTE: Pump speed potentiometer (11, Figure
7-39 and Figure 7-40) is used on D and DM
models only.
8. Connect pump speed potentiometer (R4) harness
assembly to pump speed potentiometer (11).
9. Carefully lower the top cover.
REV 11JUN09

5-7 HANDWHEEL ASSEMBLY
SERVICING
Refer to Figure 7-1 through Figure 7-3, Figure 7-5
through Figure 7-7, and Figure 7-56, as appropriate,
for parts location.
5-7-1-1 Removal
1. Remove screw (1, Figure 7-56), lock washer (3)
and flat washer (4), and remove handwheel (2,
Figure 7-1 through Figure 7-3) from handwheel
bearing adapter assembly (3). Retain key (5,
Figure 7-56).
2. Disconnect spring (4, Figure 7-5) from
handwheel lock lever (6).
NOTE: Shoulder screw (11) is secured with
adhesive. Some force may be required to loosen.
3. Remove shoulder screw (11) and wave springs
(10), and remove handwheel lock lever (6) from
handwheel.
NOTE: Screw (7) is secured with adhesive.
Some force may be required to loosen.
4. Remove handwheel finger knob (3) from
handwheel lock lever (6) by removing screw (7).
NOTE: Screw (9) is secured with adhesive.
Some force may be required to loosen.
5. Remove screw (9), with spring (4) and lock nut
(8) attached, from handwheel (1). Loosen lock
nut and remove spring.
6. Remove fold-away handle (5) from handwheel
(1) by removing screw.
7. For DM models only: Remove cable ties from
handwheel mounting brace (9, Figure 7-6).
Disconnect photo sensor connector from photo
sensor (13). Remove photo sensor (13) from
handwheel bearing adapter assembly (5) by
removing two screws (12).
NOTE: Screws (10, Figure 7-56) are secured
with adhesive. Some force may be required to
loosen.
8. Remove two screws (10) and remove
counterweight (9) from handwheel shaft.
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
9. Loosen two captive screws on flexible coupling
(6) and slide coupling onto Microtome shaft.
10. Remove retaining ring (6, Figure 7-7). Remove
four screws (7) and separate bearing mount plate
(5) from bearing adapter (4). Pull bearing mount
plate (5) off of handwheel shaft (8). Do not
separate bearing (1) from bearing mount plate
unless replacement is necessary.
11. Remove timing belt (13, Figure 7-56) from
timing pulleys (7, Figure 7-6).
NOTE: Timing pulley (7) setscrews are secured
with adhesive. Some force may be required to
loosen.
12. Loosen two setscrews associated with each
timing pulley (7) and remove timing pulleys
from handwheel shaft (3) and handwheel
bearing adapter assembly (3, Figure 7-1 through
Figure 7-3).
13. Remove bearing adapter (4, Figure 7-7), with
bearing (1) and handwheel shaft (8) attached,
from cabinet by removing two screws (7, Figure
7-56), two lock washers (3) and four flat
washers (4).
14. Press bearing adapter (4, Figure 7-7) off of
handwheel shaft (8). Do not remove bearing (1)
from bearing adapter (4) unless replacement is
necessary.
15. Remove flexible coupling (6, Figure 7-56) from
Microtome shaft.
16. Remove handwheel mounting brace (9, Figure
7-6), with attached components, from cabinet by
removing three screws (7, Figure 7-56), three
lock washers (3), flat washer (4) and screw (11).
17. Remove handwheel bearing adapter assembly
(3, Figure 7-1 through Figure 7-3) from
handwheel mounting brace (9, Figure 7-6) by
removing three screws (10) and lock washers
(11).
NOTE: Nut (18) is secured with adhesive. Some
force may be required to loosen.
18. Remove nut (18) and remove idler assembly
(items 14 through 17) from handwheel mounting
brace (9).
NOTE: Nut (14) is secured with adhesive. Some
force may be required to loosen.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-9
SERVICE
19. Disassemble idler assembly by removing nut
(14), and removing sleeve bearing (15) and shim
(17) from shoulder screw (16).
5-7-1-2 Installation
1. Install handwheel bearing adapter assembly (3,
Figure 7-1 through Figure 7-3) on handwheel
mounting brace (9, Figure 7-6) and secure with
three screws (10) and lock washers (11).
2. Apply a coat of adhesive (8) to threads of two
setscrews associated with each idler pulley (7).
3. Install pulleys (7) on handwheel bearing adapter
assembly (3, Figure 7-1 through Figure 7-3).
4. Install handwheel mounting brace (9, Figure 7-
6), with attached timing belt (13, Figure 7-56),
on cabinet and secure with three screws (7) three
lock washers (3), flat washer (4) and screw (11).
5. Apply a coat of adhesive (8, Figure 7-6) to
threads of nut (14).
6. Assemble idler assembly by installing shim (17)
and sleeve bearing (15) on shoulder screw (16);
secure with nut (14).
7. Apply a coat of adhesive (8) to threads of nut
(18).
8. Install idler assembly (items 14 through 17) on
handwheel mounting brace (9) and secure with
nut (18).
9. Press bearing adapter (4, Figure 7-7) onto
handwheel shaft (8).
10. Install bearing adapter (4) onto cabinet and
secure with two screws (7, Figure 7-56), two
lock washers (3) and four flat washers (4). Do
not fully tighten screws (7).
11. Install flexible coupling (6) onto Microtome
shaft.
12. Install handwheel shaft (8, Figure 7-7). Tighten
setscrews to 12 ±2 in.-lbs.
13. Install timing belt (13, Figure 7-56) on idler
pulleys (7, Figure 7-6; 2, Figure 7-7).
14. Install bearing mount plate (5) on handwheel
shaft (8).
5-10 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
15. Make best possible alignment between
handwheel shaft (8) and Microtome shaft, then
slide flexible coupling (6, Figure 7-56) back
onto handwheel shaft (8, Figure 7-7). Ensure
flexible coupling cover approximately 3/8-inch
of each shaft. Check for proper alignment by
checking for light between the first few slots on
either end of the coupling. Do not tighten the
integral screws at this time.
16. Secure bearing adapter (4) to cabinet by
tightening two screws (7, Figure 7-56) to 45 ±2
in.-lbs.
17. Secure bearing mount plate (5, Figure 7-7) to
bearing adapter (4) with four screws (7). Tighten
screws to 45 ±2 in.-lbs. Install retaining ring (6).
18. Install spring (4, Figure 7-5) on screw (9) and
tighten lock nut (8) to secure.
19. Apply a coat of adhesive (12) to threads of
screw (9) Install screw on handwheel (1).
20. Apply a coat of adhesive (12) to threads of
screw (7).
21. Install handwheel finger knob (3) on handwheel
lock lever (6) and secure with screw (7).
22. Apply Microtome grease (2) to surface of
handwheel lock lever (6) that mates with
handwheel (1).
23. Apply a coat of adhesive (12) to threads of
screw (11).
24. Install handwheel lock lever (6) on handwheel
(1) and secure with screw (11) and wave springs
(10). Connect spring (4) to handwheel lock
lever.
25. Install fold-away handle (5) on handwheel (1)
and secure with screw.
26. Place key (5, Figure 7-56) in slot in shaft of
handwheel bearing adapter assembly (3, Figure
7-1 through Figure 7-3).
27. Install handwheel (1, Figure 7-5) on shaft of
handwheel bearing adapter assembly (3, Figure
7-1 through Figure 7-3), and secure with screw
(1, Figure 7-56), lock washer (3) and flat washer
(4).
28. Lock the Microtome and handwheel in the
topmost positions.
REV 11JUN09
 SERVICE
29. Adjust idler assembly to provide approximately 5-8-2 Vacuum Debris Filter
1/8-inch belt slack. After adjustment, tighten
screw (16, Figure 7-6) to 120 ±5 in.-lbs. NOTE: The vacuum debris filter is installed on D
and DM models only.
30. Recheck alignment of flexible coupling (6,
Figure 7-56) between handwheel shaft (8, Figure 5-8-2-1 Removal
7-7) and Microtome shaft. When alignment is
correct, tighten two integral screws to 35 ±2 in.- 1. Open the chamber window.
lbs.
2. Remove the utility tray.
31. Apply a coat of adhesive (2, Figure 7-56) to
threads of screws (10). WARNING: REMOVE THE DEBRIS FILTER
AS ONE PIECE; DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.
32. Install counterweight (9), positioned downward,
on handwheel shaft and secure with two screws 3. Gently pull the corrugated hose free from the
(10). Tighten screws to 45 ±2 in.-lbs. blade holder port.

33. For DM models only: Install photo sensor (13, 4. Gently pull the microbial filter free from the
Figure 7-6) on handwheel bearing adapter chamber vacuum port.
assembly and secure with two screws (12).
5. Remove o-ring from the chamber vacuum port.
Attach photo sensor connector to photo sensor.
Secure connector cable to handwheel mounting WARNING: USED DEBRIS FILTER MAY
brace with cable ties. CONTAIN BIOHAZARDOUS WASTE.
DISPOSE OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL
5-8 TUB ASSEMBLY SERVICING REGULATIONS.
5-8-1 Heat Extractor Holder 5-8-2-2 Installation
Refer to Figure 7-1 through Figure 7-3, as appro- 1. Install o-ring on the chamber vacuum port.
priate, for parts location.
2. Connect microbial filter of new debris filter to
The heat extractor holder (6) is mounted inside the chamber vacuum port.
refrigerated chamber, on the left side wall of the tub
assembly (5), above the Cryobar. 3. Connect corrugated hose of debris filter to blade
holder port.
5-8-1-1 Removal
4. Install the utility tray.
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers. 5. Close the chamber window.

2. Remove two screws and lock washers securing 5-8-3 Window Return Spring
heat extractor holder to tub assembly; remove
heat extractor holder. Refer to Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-55 for parts
location.
5-8-1-2 Installation
5-8-3-1 Removal
1. Position heat extractor in place on tub assembly
and secure with two screws and lock washers. 1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Carefully lower the top cover.
2. Open the chamber window.

3. Remove nut (1, Figure 7-55) securing constant

force spring (17, Figure 7-4) to the window
assembly.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-11

SERVICE
4. Remove screw (20), lock washer (19), and flat
washer (18), and remove window return spring
mandrel (16) and constant force spring (17) from
return spring bracket (15).
5. Remove leveling foot (23) and nut (22) from
return spring bracket (15).
6. Remove two nuts (21) and remove return spring
bracket (15) from frame.
5-8-3-2 Installation
1. Install return spring bracket (15, Figure 7-4) on
frame and secure with two nuts (21).
2. Install nut (22) and leveling foot (23) on return
spring bracket (15).
3. Assemble window return spring mandrel (16) on
constant force spring (17).
4. Install constant force spring and window return
spring mandrel, as an assembly, on return spring
bracket, and secure with screw (20), lock washer
(19) and flat washer (18).
5. Secure constant force spring to window
assembly using nut (1, Figure 7-55).
6. Close the chamber window.
7. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-8-4 Window Tracks
Refer to Figure 7-54 for parts location.
5-8-4-1 Removal
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Remove extension springs (9) from window
track extenders (5, 6) and extender mounting
brackets (3, 4).
3. Remove nut (10), three screws (11) and three
lock washers (15), and remove extender
mounting brackets (3, 4) and window
suppressors (1, 2) from tub assembly.
NOTE: Screws (8) are secured with adhesive.
Some force may be required to loosen.
4. Remove two screws (8), lock washers (12), flat
washers (7) and flat washers (14), and remove
5-12 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
window track extenders (5, 6) from extender
mounting brackets (3, 4).
5-8-4-2 Installation
1. Apply a thin coat of adhesive (13) to threads of
two screws (8).
2. Position window track extenders (5, 6) on
extender mounting brackets (3, 4) and secure
with two screws (8), lock washers (12), flat
washers (7) and flat washers (14).
3. Position window suppressors (1, 2) and extender
mounting brackets (3, 4) on tub assembly and
secure with nut (10), three screws (11) and three
lock washers (15).
4. Connect extension springs (9) between window
track extenders (5, 6) and extender mounting
brackets (3, 4).
5. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-8-5 Chamber Thermistor
Refer to Figure 7-9 for parts location.
5-8-5-1 Removal
1. Open the chamber window.
NOTE: Screws (13) are secured with adhesive.
Some force may be required to loosen.
2. Remove two screws (13) and remove
temperature sensor holder retainer (12) and
temperature sensor holder (11) from tub.
3. Remove chamber thermistor (RT2) connection
(J43) harness assembly (4) from temperature
sensor holder (11). Remove O-rings (14, 15)
from temperature sensor holder.
4. Disconnect harness assembly from chamber
thermistor harness assembly.
5-8-5-2 Installation
1. Connect chamber thermistor (RT2) connection
(J43) harness assembly (4) to chamber
thermistor harness assembly.
2. Apply lubricant (22) to two O-rings (14, 15).
Install O-rings in temperature sensor holder (11).
REV 11JUN09

3. Insert harness assembly through underside of tub
and into temperature sensor holder (11).
4. Apply a coat of adhesive (16) to threads of two
screws (13).
5. Install temperature sensor holder (11) and
temperature sensor holder retainer (12) in tub
and secure with two screws (13).
6. Close the chamber window.
5-9 WINDOW ASSEMBLY
SERVICING
5-9-1 Removal
Refer to Figure 7-55 for parts location.
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Open the chamber window.
3. Remove nut (1) securing constant force spring to
window assembly, and detach spring.
4. Disconnect the window heater connector.
5. Slide window assembly forward, past window
track extenders until lower window rollers align
with slots in window tracks, then lift up to
release rollers from tracks.
6. Slide window back until upper window rollers
clear the window suppressors, then lift the
window out of the tub.
5-9-2 Window Guide Roller
5-9-2-1 Removal
1. Remove window assembly (paragraph 5-9-1).
NOTE: Screws are secured with sealant. Some force
may be required to loosen.
2. Remove rollers from window guides by
removing screws.
5-9-2-2 Installation
1. Apply a thin coat of adhesive to threads of
screws.
2. Install rollers on pins on window guides and
secure in place with screws.
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
3. Install window assembly (paragraph 5-9-3).
5-9-3 Installation
Refer to Figure 7-55 for parts location.
1. Engage upper rollers of window assembly in the
tracks behind the window suppressors.
2. Slide window forward until lower rollers are
aligned with slots in window tracks, then engage
rollers in tracks.
3. Continue to slide window back until window is
fully open.
4. Attach constant force spring to window
assembly and secure with nut (1).
5. Connect the window heater connector.
6. Close the chamber window.
7. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-10 HEAT EXTRACTOR
SERVICING
5-10-1 Heat Extractor Holder
The heat extractor holder is mounted inside the
refrigerated chamber, on the left side wall of the tub
assembly, above the Cryobar.
5-10-1-1 Removal
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Remove two screws and lock washers securing
heat extractor holder to tub assembly; remove
heat extractor holder.
5-10-1-2 Installation
1. Position heat extractor holder on tub assembly
and secure with two screws and lock washers.
2. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-11 KNIFE HOLDER ASSEMBLY
SERVICING
Refer to Figure 7-51 for parts location.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-13
SERVICE
5-11-1 Removal
1. Turn knife holder removal lever (right side)
counter-clockwise until loose.
2. Pull knife holder removal lever until its shaft
slides out (away from body of the knife holder)
approximately 1.5 inches.
3. Lift up on the knife holder to remove it from the
knife holder base.
5-11-2 Installation
1. Pull knife holder removal lever until its shaft
slides out (away from body of the knife holder)
approximately 1.5 inches.
2. Place knife holder in chamber so that opening
under knife holder rests on the post of the knife
holder base.
3. Secure knife holder to the knife holder base by
pushing knife holder removal lever until its shaft
slide back into body of the knife holder.
4. Turn knife holder removal lever clockwise to
immobilize the knife holder.
5-12 CHUCK ASSEMBLY
SERVICING
Refer to Figure 7-50 for parts location.
5-12-1 Removal / Disassembly
1. Open the chamber window.
2. Remove anti-roll rake assembly.
3. Loosen cam lock 1 (5) and slide front block (2)
off of rear block (1).
4. If necessary, remove nut (11) and flat washer
(9), and remove holder (7) and knob from front
block (2). Remove cam lock 2 (6), with knob
(15) attached, from front block (2).
5. Loosen and remove cam lock 1 (5), with lever
(8) attached, from rear block (1).
6. Remove lock nut (3), with cam screw (4)
attached, from rear block (1).
NOTE: Cam screw (4) is secured with adhesive.
Some force may be required to loosen.
5-14 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
7. If necessary, separate cam screw (4) from lock
nut (3).
8. Remove screw (10) and Belleville washer (13),
and remove rear block (1) from Microtome
assembly.
5-12-2 Knob Replacement
NOTE: Knob (15) is secured with adhesive. Some
force may be required to loosen.
1. Secure cam lock 2 (6), by flats, in a vise or other
suitable holding fixture.
2. Unscrew and remove knob (15) from cam lock 2
(6).
3. Apply Loctite threadlock (12) to threads of cam
lock 2 (6). Thread new knob (15) onto cam lock
2 (6) and tighten securely.
5-12-3 Lever Replacement
NOTE: Lever (8) is secured with adhesive. Some
force may be required to loosen.
1. Secure cam lock 1 (5), by flats, in a vise or other
suitable holding fixture.
2. Remove screw (18), lock washer (17) and flat
washer (16) from cam lock 1 (5). Unscrew and
remove lever (8) from cam lock (5).
3. Apply Loctite threadlock (12) to threads of cam
lock 1 (5). Thread lever (8) onto cam lock 1 (5)
and tighten securely.
4. Install screw (18), lock washer (17) and flat
washer (16).
5-12-4 Assembly / Installation
1. Apply lubricant (19) to threads of screw (10).
2. Install rear block (1) on Microtome assembly
and secure with Belleville washer (13) and
screw (10). Torque screw to 60 inch-pounds.
3. If necessary, apply a thin coat of Loctite
threadlock (12) to threads of cam screw (4), and
assemble screw to locknut (3). Install locknut
(3), with cam screw (4) attached, in rear block
(1).
REV 11JUN09

NOTE: Use cam screw (4), as necessary, to adjust
position of lock nut (3) to allow insertion of cam
lock 1 (5).
4. Install cam lock 1 (5), with lever (8) attached, in
rear block (1), and tighten cam lock.
5. If necessary, insert cam lock 2 (6), with knob
(15) attached, in front block (2). Install knob and
holder (7), and secure in place with nut (11) and
flat washer (9).
6. Slide front block (2) into place on rear block (1),
and tighten cam lock.
7. Close the chamber window.
5-13 EVAPORATOR SHIELD
NOTE: The evaporator shield is installed on Basic
models only.
5-13-1 Removal
1. Open the window assembly.
2. Remove four screws and lock washers, and
remove evaporator shield from tub assembly.
3. Remove four screws, lock washers and flat
washers, and remove two shield brackets from
evaporator shield.
5-13-2 Installation
1. Position two shield brackets on evaporator
shield and secure in place with four screws, lock
washers and flat washers. Tighten screws to 30
inch-pounds.
2. Position evaporator shield in tub assembly and
secure in place with four screws and lock
washers.
3. Close the Window assembly.
5-14 ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT
ASSEMBLY SERVICING
WARNING: ALWAYS WEAR GLOVES WHEN
HANDLING THE ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT
ASSEMBLY. NEVER TOUCH THE OZONE
LAMP WITH BARE HANDS.
NOTE: The ultraviolet light assembly is installed on
D and DM models only.
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
Refer to Figure 7-52 for parts location.
5-14-1 Removal
1. Open the window assembly.
2. Remove four screws (3) and lock washers (2)
securing ozone lamp assembly to tub assembly.
3. Grasp evaporator shield at both ends and pull
out carefully.
4. Disconnect ozone lamp harness assembly (6)
from ozone lamp extension (J89) harness
assembly.
5. Remove ultraviolet light assembly from tub
assembly.
6. Remove four screws (3), lock washers (2) and
flat washers (4), and remove two shield brackets
(1) from ultraviolet light assembly.
5-14-2 Installation
1. Position two shield brackets (1) on ultraviolet
light assembly and secure in place with four
screws (3), lock washers (2) and flat washers
(4). Tighten screws (3) to 30 inch-pounds.
2. Connect ozone lamp harness assembly (6) to
ozone lamp extension (J89) harness assembly
(by aligning the red dots) and press firmly to
engage.
3. Carefully position ultraviolet light assembly in
place in tub assembly.
4. Secure ultraviolet light assembly in place using
four screws (3) and lock washers (2). Tighten
screws (3) to 30 inch-pounds.
5. Close the window assembly.
6. Reset the ozone lamp counter as necessary (refer
to the Cryo3 Operating Manual for details).
5-15 MICROTOME ASSEMBLY
SERVICING
5-15-1 Microtome Assembly
Refer to Figure 7-1 through Figure 7-3, Figure 7-7,
0, Figure 7-18, Figure 7-49 and
Figure 7-56, as appropriate, for parts location.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-15
SERVICE
5-15-1-1 Removal
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Open the chamber window.
3. Remove the chuck assembly (paragraph 5-12-1).
4. Remove three screws (10, Figure 7-49) and
remove insulator cap (11) from Microtome shaft
by reinstalling screw (10, Figure 7-50) a few
turns, then tapping lightly on the screw to
release the nut insert (13, Figure 7-49) from rear
of insulator cap (11).
5. Lock Microtome and handwheel in topmost
positions.
6. Loosen two integral screws on flexible coupling
(6, Figure 7-56) and slide coupling onto
handwheel shaft (8, Figure 7-7).
7. Disconnect controller J5 to Microtome breakout
PCB harness assembly (17, Figure 7-1; 22,
Figure 7-2; 22, Figure 7-3) from connector J2 of
Microtome breakout PCB.
8. Remove four screws (3, Figure 7-49), lock
washers (2) and flat washers (1) and remove
Microtome, with Microtome breakout PCB
attached, from cabinet.
5-15-1-2 Installation
1. Apply O-ring lubricant (14) to O-ring (9). Install
O-ring (9) and insulator tube (8) on Microtome.
2. Slide flexible coupling (6, Figure 7-56) onto
Microtome shaft.
3. Position Microtome, with Microtome breakout
PCB attached, on Microtome support bracket,
and secure with four screws (3, Figure 7-49),
lock washers (2) and flat washers (1).
4. Connect controller J5 to Microtome breakout
PCB harness assembly (17, Figure 7-1; 22,
Figure 7-2; 22, Figure 7-3) to connector J2 of
Microtome breakout PCB.
5. Slide flexible coupling (6, Figure 7-56) onto
handwheel shaft. Ensure flexible coupling
covers approximately 3/8-inch of both
Microtome shaft and handwheel shaft (8, Figure
7-7). Check for proper alignment by checking
5-16 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
for light between the first few slots on either end
of the coupling. Tighten both integral screws.
6. Unlock the Microtome and handwheel.
7. Install nut insert (13, Figure 7-49) in rear of
insulator cap (11).
8. Apply Teflon anti-seize lubricant (12) to threads
of three screws (10).
9. Install insulator cap (11) on Microtome shaft and
secure with three screws (10). Tighten screws to
20 inch-pounds.
10. Install the chuck assembly (paragraph 5-12-4).
11. Close the chamber window.
12. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-15-2 Microtome Diaphragms
Refer to Figure 7-49 for parts location.
5-15-2-1 Removal
1. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
2. Open the chamber window.
3. Remove the chuck assembly (paragraph 5-12-1).
4. Remove cable tie (5) from upper (black)
Microtome rubber seal (4).
5. Remove rubber seal (4) from tub.
6. Remove cable tie (5) from lower (orange)
Microtome rubber seal (7).
7. Remove rubber seal (7) from tub.
8. Remove Microtome (paragraph 5-15-1-1).
5-15-2-2 Installation
1. Install lower (orange) rubber seal (7) onto the
insulator tube (8).
2. Install upper (black) rubber seal (4) onto the
insulator tube with the inner O-ring positioned
in the groove (as shown in Figure 7-49).
3. Install the Microtome and insulator tube, as an
assembly, into the Microtome opening in the
tub, with the upper (black) seal (4) inside the
REV 11JUN09

tub, and the lower (orange) seal (7) outside the
tub.
4. Install upper (black) seal (4) over rim on inside
of tub. Install lower (orange) seal (7) over rim
on underside of tub.
5. Secure with cable ties (5). Tighten cable ties to
50 inch-ounces.
6. Install the Microtome (paragraph 5-15-1-2).
7. Install the chuck assembly (paragraph 5-12-4).
8. Close the chamber window.
9. Carefully lower the top cover.
5-15-3 Microtome Breakout PCB
Refer to 0 and Figure 7-18, as appropriate, for parts
location.
5-15-3-1 Removal
1. Remove Microtome assembly (paragraph
5-15-1).
2. Disconnect five opto-switch cable assemblies
from terminals 1~3 (OPTO1), 4~6 (OPTO2),
7~9 (OPTO3), 10~12 (OPTO4) and 16~18
(OPTO5) of Microtome breakout PCB.
3. Remove four screws (4) and lock washers (5)
and remove Microtome breakout PCB (2) from
Microtome (1).
4. If necessary, remove four standoffs (3) from
Microtome (1).
5-15-3-2 Installation
1. If removed, install four standoffs (3) on
Microtome (1).
2. Position Microtome breakout PCB (2) on
standoffs (3) and secure with four screws (4) and
lock washers (5).
3. Connect five opto-switch cable assemblies to
terminals 1~3 (OPTO1), 4~6 (OPTO2), 7~9
(OPTO3), 10~12 (OPTO4) and 16~18 (OPTO5)
of Microtome breakout PCB.
4. Install Microtome assembly (paragraph 5-15-2).
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
5-16 WATER DRAIN ASSEMBLY
SERVICING
Refer to Figure 7-57 for parts location.
5-17 OZONE DESTRUCT
ASSEMBLY SERVICING
5-17-1 General Plumbing Repairs
5-17-1-1 Thread Sealing Procedures
WARNING: TO PREVENT OZONE FROM
SEEPING INTO THE ATMOSPHERE DURING
OPERATION, AND TO ENSURE THE
SYSTEM MAINTAINS PROPER VACUUM
DURING OPERATION, ALL THREADED
CONNECTION MUST BE PROPERLY
SEALED.
When installing plumbing components of the ozone
destruct assembly, apply sealant to male pipe threads
in accordance with the following:
• For CPVC-to-CPVC pipe connections, CPVC-
to-brass connections, and CPVC-to-pump
housing connections, use PTFE Joint and Thread
Sealant (25, Figure 7-20).
• For brass-to-brass connections, brass-to-pump
housing connections, and SST-to-SST
connections, use Red Permatex High-
Temperature Silicone Sealant (29, Figure 7-20).
5-17-2 Bottle
Refer to paragraph 5-5-1 for removal and installation
procedures.
5-17-3 Muffler
Refer to Figure 7-20 for parts location.
5-17-3-1 Removal
1. Prepare the instrument for servicing as necessary
(paragraph 5-4-1).
2. Unscrew and remove muffler (15) from pump
vent valve (V7) connection (J111) harness
assembly (1).
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-17
SERVICE
5-17-3-2 Installation
1. Apply sealant (29) to threads of muffler (15), as
appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
2. Thread muffler into pump vent valve (V7)
connection (J111) harness assembly (1). Tighten
hand-tight, then use a wrench to tighten one
revolution further.
3. Reinstall access panels and close and secure
access doors as appropriate.
5-17-4 Pump Vent Valve (V7)
connection (J111) Harness Assembly
Refer to Figure 7-20 for parts location.
5-17-4-1 Removal
1. Prepare the instrument for servicing as necessary
(paragraph 5-4-1).
2. Remove muffler (15) (paragraph 5-17-3-1).
3. Disconnect pump vent valve (V7) connection
(J111) harness assembly (1) from pump vent
valve power (J112) harness assembly.
4. Unscrew and remove vent valve (1) from brass
nipple (14).
5-17-4-2 Installation
1. Apply sealant (29) to threads of brass nipple
(14), as appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
2. Thread pump vent valve (V7) connection (J111)
harness assembly (1) onto brass nipple (14).
Tighten hand-tight, then use a wrench to tighten
one revolution further.
3. Connect vent valve harness assembly (1) to
pump vent valve power (J112) harness
assembly.
4. Install muffler (15) (paragraph 5-17-3-2).
5-17-5 Chamber Pressure Switch
Refer to Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-59, as appropriate,
for parts location.
5-17-5-1 Removal
1. Prepare the instrument for servicing as necessary
(paragraph 5-4-1).
5-18 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
2. Unplug flexible tubing (8, Figure 7-59) from
inlet of chamber pressure switch (2).
3. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
4. Disconnect pressure switch harness assembly
from terminals 20, 21 of digital signal breakout
PCB (10, Figure 7-4).
5. Remove two screws (11, Figure 7-59) securing
pressure switch (2) to frame, and remove switch.
Disconnect pressure switch harness assembly
from pressure switch.
5-17-5-2 Installation
1. Connect chamber pressure switch (PT2)
connection harness assembly to pressure switch
(2, Figure 7-59). Apply Adhesive (31) to threads
of two screws (11). Position chamber pressure
switch (2) on frame, and secure with two screws
(11).
2. Connect pressure switch harness assembly to
terminals 20, 21 of digital signal breakout PCB
(10, Figure 7-4).
3. Carefully lower the top cover.
4. Connect flexible tubing (8, Figure 7-59) to inlet
of pressure switch (2).
5-17-6 Catalyst Air Flow Switch (PT3)
Connection Harness Assembly
Refer to Figure 7-20 and Figure 7-59, as appropriate,
for parts location.
5-17-6-1 Removal
1. Prepare the instrument for servicing as necessary
(paragraph 5-4-1).
2. Unplug silicone tubing adapter fitting (30,
Figure 7-59) from flexible tubing (8) at inlet port
of catalyst air flow switch (PT3) connection
harness assembly.
3. Carefully lift the top cover and rotate it back
against the restrainers.
4. Disconnect air flow switch harness assembly
from terminals, 23, 24 of digital signal breakout
PCB.
REV 11JUN09

5. Unscrew and remove air flow switch harness
assembly (12) from pipe reducer (13, Figure 7-
20).
6. Remove flexible tubing (8, Figure 7-59) from air
flow switch.
5-17-6-2 Installation
1. Install a 1-inch length of flexible tubing (8,
Figure 7-59) on inlet of catalyst air flow switch
(PT3) connection harness assembly.
2. Apply sealant to threads of air flow switch, as
appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
3. Thread air flow switch into pipe reducer (13,
Figure 7-20). Tighten hand-tight, then use a
wrench to tighten one revolution further
(maximum), until switch inlet is pointing
upward.
4. Connect air flow switch harness assembly to
terminals 23, 24 of digital signal breakout PCB.
5. Carefully lower the top cover.
6. Connect silicone tubing adapter fitting (30,
Figure 7-59) to flexible tubing (8) at inlet port of
air flow switch.
5-17-7 Catalyst Heater (HTR11)
Connection (J91) Harness Assembly
Refer to Figure 7-21 for parts location.
5-17-7-1 Removal
1. Prepare the instrument for servicing as necessary
(paragraph 5-4-1).
2. Disconnect catalyst heater (HTR11) connection
(J91) harness assembly (7) from catalyst heater
power (J92) harness assembly.
3. Unscrew and remove catalyst heater (7) from
pipe reducer (5).
5-17-7-2 Installation
1. Thread catalyst heater (HTR11) connection
(J91) harness assembly (7) into pipe reducer (5).
Tighten hand-tight, then use a wrench to tighten
one revolution further.
2. Connect catalyst heater harness assembly (7) to
catalyst heater power (J92) harness assembly.
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
5-17-8 Catalyst Assembly
Refer to Figure 7-20, Figure 7-21, Figure 7-42 and
Figure 7-59, as appropriate, for parts location.
5-17-8-1 Removal
1. Prepare the instrument for servicing as necessary
(paragraph 5-4-1).
2. Loosen hose clamps (12, Figure 7-59) and
remove silicone tubing (13) from between elbow
adapters (16, Figure 7-20; 1, Figure 7-21).
3. Remove catalyst harness (1, Figure 7-42) by
removing two screws (2), lock washers (3) and
flat washers (4).
4. Unscrew and remove brass nipple (3, Figure 7-
21) from tee pipe fitting (4) and remove catalyst
assembly (2).
5. Unscrew and remove brass nipple (3) and elbow
adapter (1) from catalyst assembly (2).
5-17-8-2 Installation
1. Apply sealant to threads of brass nipple (3,
Figure 7-21), as appropriate (paragraph
5-17-1-1).
2. Thread brass nipple (3) into tee pipe fitting (4).
Tighten hand-tight, then use a wrench to tighten
one revolution further.
3. Apply sealant to threads of elbow adapter (1), as
appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
4. Secure elbow adapter (1) in a vise, or other
suitable holding fixture.
5. Thread catalyst assembly (2) onto elbow adapter
(1). Tighten hand-tight, then use a wrench to
tighten one revolution further.
6. Apply sealant to threads of brass nipple (3), as
appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
7. Thread catalyst assembly (2) onto brass nipple
(3). Tighten hand-tight, then use a wrench to
tighten one revolution further (maximum), until
elbow adapters (16, Figure 7-20; 1, Figure 7-21)
are aligned.
8. Install catalyst harness (1, Figure 7-42) on
catalyst assembly and secure to frame using two
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-19
SERVICE
screws (2), lock washers (3) and flat washers
(4).
9. Install silicone tubing (13, Figure 7-59) between
elbow adapters (16, Figure 7-20; 1, Figure 7-21)
and install hose clamps (12, Figure 7-59) to
secure.
5-17-9 Pump Return Valve (V6)
(J109) Harness Assembly
Refer to Figure 7-20, Figure 7-21 and Figure 7-59,
as appropriate, for parts location.
5-17-9-1 Removal
1. Prepare the instrument for servicing as necessary
(paragraph 5-4-1).
2. Loosen hose clamps (12, Figure 7-59) and
remove silicone tubing (13) from between tube-
pipe adapters (12, Figure 7-21; 24, Figure 7-59).
3. Unplug silicone tubing adapter fitting (30) from
flexible tubing (8) at pipe-tube adapter (6).
4. Unscrew and remove tee (8, Figure 7-20), with
tube-pipe adapter (12, Figure 7-21), pipe-pipe
reducer (11, Figure 7-20), pipe-tube adapter (6,
Figure 7-59) and flexible tubing (12) attached,
from nipple (9, Figure 7-20).
5. Disconnect pump return valve (V6) (J109)
harness assembly (2, Figure 7-20) from pump
return valve power (J110) harness assembly.
6. Unscrew and remove pump return valve (2),
with nipple (9, Figure 7-20) attached, from
nipple (9). Remove nipple (9) from pump return
valve (2).
5-17-9-2 Installation
1. Apply sealant to threads of nipple (9, Figure 7-
20), as appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
NOTE: Ensure directional arrow on return valve
points upward when installed.
2. Thread pump return valve (V6) (J109) harness
assembly (2) onto nipple (9). Tighten hand-tight,
then use a wrench to tighten one revolution
further (maximum), until valve is positioned
parallel to tee (8).
5-20 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
3. Apply sealant to threads of nipple (9), as
appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
4. Thread nipple (9) into pump return valve (2).
Tighten hand-tight, then use a wrench to tighten
one revolution further.
5. Connect pump return valve harness assembly (2)
to pump return valve power (J110) harness
assembly.
6. Apply sealant to threads of nipple (9), as
appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
7. Thread tee (8), with tube-pipe adapter (12,
Figure 7-21), pipe-pipe reducer (11, Figure 7-
20), pipe-tube adapter (6, Figure 7-59) and
flexible tubing (12) attached, onto nipple (9).
Tighten hand-tight, then use a wrench to tighten
one revolution further, (maximum), until tee (8)
is at a 90-degree angle to pump return valve (2).
8. Connect silicone tubing adapter fitting (30) to
flexible tubing (8) at pipe-tube adapter (6).
5-17-10 Filter Valve (V4) Connection
(J87) Harness Assembly
Refer to Figure 7-20 and Figure 7-59, as appropriate,
for parts location.
5-17-10-1 Removal
1. Prepare the instrument for servicing as necessary
(paragraph 5-4-1).
2. Loosen hose clamps (12, Figure 7-59) and
remove silicone tubing (13) from between tube-
pipe adapters (3).
3. Unscrew and remove elbow (5, Figure 7-20),
with tube-pipe adapter (10) attached, from
nipple (18).
4. Disconnect filter valve (V4) connection (J87)
harness assembly (3) from filter valve power
(J88) harness assembly.
5. Unscrew and remove filter valve (3), with nipple
(18) attached, from nipple (18). Remove nipple
(18) from filter valve (3).
5-17-10-2 Installation
1. Apply sealant to threads of nipple (18, Figure 7-
20), as appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
REV 11JUN09

NOTE: Ensure directional arrow on filter valve
points toward nipple (18) when installed.
2. Thread filter valve (V4) connection (J87)
harness assembly (3) onto nipple (18). Tighten
hand-tight, then use a wrench to tighten one
revolution further (maximum), until filter valve
is positioned upright.
3. Apply sealant to threads of nipple (18), as
appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
4. Thread nipple (18) into filter valve (3). Tighten
hand-tight, then use a wrench to tighten one
revolution further.
5. Connect filter valve harness assembly (3) to
filter valve power (J88) harness assembly.
6. Apply sealant to threads of nipple (18), as
appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
7. Thread elbow (5), with tube-pipe adapter (10)
attached, onto nipple (18). Tighten hand-tight,
then use a wrench to tighten one revolution
further (maximum), until nipple (18) is upright.
8. Install silicone tubing (13, Figure 7-59) between
tube-pipe adapters (3) and install hose clamps
(12) to secure.
5-17-11 Catalyst Valve (V8)
Connection (J136) Harness Assembly
Refer to Figure 7-20, Figure 7-21 and Figure 7-59,
as appropriate, for parts location.
5-17-11-1 Removal
1. Prepare the instrument for servicing as necessary
(paragraph 5-4-1).
2. Loosen hose clamps (12, Figure 7-59) and
remove silicone tubing (13) from between tube-
pipe adapters (3).
3. Unscrew and remove elbow (5, Figure 7-20),
with tube-pipe adapter (10) attached, from
nipple (18).
4. Unplug silicone tubing adapter fitting (30,
Figure 7-59) from flexible tubing (8) at pipe-
tube adapter (6).
5. Unscrew and remove pipe-pipe reducer (5,
Figure 7-21), with pipe-tube adapter (13) and
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
flexible tubing (8, Figure 7-59) attached, from
tee (9, Figure 7-21).
6. Unscrew and remove tee (9), with nipple (10)
attached, from nipple (3).
7. Disconnect catalyst valve (V8) connection
(J136) harness assembly (8) from catalyst valve
power (J137) harness assembly.
8. Unscrew and remove catalyst valve (8), with
nipple (3) attached, from nipple (3). Remove
nipple (3) from catalyst valve (8).
5-17-11-2 Installation
1. Apply sealant to threads of nipple (3, Figure 7-
21), as appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
NOTE: Ensure directional arrow on catalyst valve
points toward tee (4) when installed.
2. Thread catalyst valve (V8) connection (J136)
harness assembly (8) onto nipple (3). Tighten
hand-tight, then use a wrench to tighten one
revolution further (maximum), until catalyst
valve is positioned upright.
3. Apply sealant to threads of nipple (3), as
appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
4. Thread nipple (3) into catalyst valve (8). Tighten
hand-tight, then use a wrench to tighten one
revolution further.
5. Connect catalyst valve harness assembly (8) to
catalyst valve power (J137) harness assembly.
6. Apply sealant to threads of nipple (3), as
appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
7. Thread tee (9, Figure 7-21), with nipple (18,
Figure 7-20) attached, onto nipple (3, Figure 7-
21). Tighten hand-tight, then use a wrench to
tighten one revolution further (maximum), until
nipple faces slightly downward and away from
sub-pump assembly (28).
8. Apply sealant to threads of pipe-pipe reducer (5,
Figure 7-21), as appropriate (paragraph
5-17-1-1).
9. Thread pipe-pipe reducer (5), with pipe-tube
adapter (13) and flexible tubing (8, Figure 7-59)
attached, to tee (9, Figure 7-21). Tighten hand-
tight, then use a wrench to tighten one
revolution further.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-21
SERVICE
10. Connect silicone tubing adapter fitting (30, • -Reactivity – 1 (slight)
Figure 7-59) to flexible tubing (8) at pipe-tube
adapter (13, Figure 7-21). Boiling point at 1 atmosphere:

11. Apply sealant to threads of nipple (18, Figure 7- • -45.45ºC (-51.62ºF)

20), as appropriate (paragraph 5-17-1-1).
Refrigerant Temperatures
12. Thread elbow (5), with tube-pipe adapter (10)
attached, onto nipple (18). Tighten hand-tight, PSIG Refrigerant Temperature ºF
then use a wrench to tighten one revolution 0 -51
further (maximum), until tube-pipe adapters (10)
are aligned. 2 -46

13. Install silicone tubing (13, Figure 7-59) between 4 -41

tube-pipe adapters (3) and install hose clamps 6 -37
(12) to secure.
8 -33
5-18 REFRIGERATION 10 -30
ASSEMBLY SERVICING 12 -27
IMPORTANT: A certified or registered 14 -23
refrigeration service person is required for repair
16 -20
of the refrigeration system. In areas where
refrigeration servicing facilities are not available, 18 -18
a service agreement with a refrigeration company
20 -15
is recommended.
22 -12
5-18-1 General Repair and 24 -10
Replacement Procedures
26 -8
Refrigerant R404-A is a near-azeotropic blend of the 28 -5
following refrigerants:
30 -3
• HFC-125 (44%) Pentafluorethane

• HFC-143A (52%) Trifluoroethane 5-18-1-1 Leak Detection and Repair

• HFC-134A (4%) Tetrafluoroethane
NOTE: Refrigerant cannot be recovered and reused.
Leaking and losses change the above blend
percentages resulting in characteristic changes.
Inhalation of high concentrations of refrigerant
vapor is harmful. Necessary personal protective
equipment depends on usage conditions. For normal
servicing, wear chemical splash eye protection and
impervious gloves. Liquid contact can cause
frostbite.
If refrigerant leakage is suspected, a leak detector or
a soap solution may be used. Refer to the detector
instructions for proper use. When checking for leaks,
check at all joints.
Nitrogen gas pressurized to 180~190 psi may be
used for leak detection. Pressure should not decrease
over a 48-hour monitoring period.
NOTE: Refrigerant must be recovered from the
instrument prior to using nitrogen gas for leak
detection.

NPCA-HMIS Ratings: Repair leaking joints by brazing using silver brazing

alloy (28, Figure 7-8; 13, Figure 7-25; 3,
• -Health – 1 (slight) Figure 7-47), safety brazing alloy (14, Figure 7-25)
and brazing flux (15, Figure 7-25), as appropriate.
• -Flammability – 0 (minimal) Refer to the appropriate repair paragraphs for

5-22 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


procedures and precautions associated with brazing
joints for specific components.
Observe the following during all brazing operations:
• Install a flame protection shield, if necessary, in
areas that may be damaged by excessive heat.
• Before brazing copper tubing, place nitrogen gas
in the system to displace oxygen and minimize
oxidation. A continuous flow of nitrogen gas
through the system is recommended during all
brazing operations.
• Perform all brazing operations in a well-
ventilated area.
5-18-1-2 Insulation Removal and Repair
Remove insulation only as necessary to gain access
to components requiring repair/replacement. Note
the type of insulation used, and the manner and
methods of applying insulation as an aid in repair.
Replace insulation following repair using pipe
insulation, tube insulation, cork tape and cable ties.
5-18-1-3 Recovering Refrigerant
When the refrigeration system is serviced, it is
necessary to recover the refrigerant currently in the
system. A manual or automatic recovery system may
be used. Recovered refrigerant should be reclaimed.
5-18-1-4 Charging the System
Evacuate and charge the refrigeration system in
accordance with the following:
• Evacuation: Pump must be capable of pulling
50 microns. Evacuate the unit until 50 microns
is pulled.
• Charging: Charge unit with refrigerant (1,
Figure 7-69) to 1.2 pounds or 18 ounces ±1
ounce.
5-18-2 Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Refer to Figure 7-25 for parts location.
5-18-2-1 Removal
1. Recover system refrigerant (paragraph
5-18-1-3).
NOTE: Recovered refrigerant cannot be reused.
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
2. Remove brazed connections at joints between
thermostatic expansion valve (1) and tubing, and
remove valve.
5-18-2-2 Installation
NOTE: Clean all surfaces to be brazed with a fine
Emery cloth sandpaper.
1. Position thermostatic expansion valve (1) in
place and braze all joints using 15% brazing rod.
2. Vacuum and recharge refrigeration system
(paragraph 5-18-1-4).
5-18-3 Filter Driers
Refer to Figure 7-25 for parts location.
5-18-3-1 Removal
1. Recover system refrigerant (paragraph
5-18-1-3).
2. Wrap sight glass (11) with a damp towel.
3. Remove tie straps securing filter drier (2) to
frame.
4. Remove brazed connections at joints of tubing
and remove filter drier (2).
5. Remove brazed connections at joints of tubing
and remove filter drier (2).
5-18-3-2 Installation
NOTE: Clean all surfaces to be brazed with a fine
Emery cloth sandpaper.
NOTE: Place a thermo trap below solder joints of
filter drier(s) (2) to protect paint from burning.
1. Position filter drier (2) between tubing and braze
all joints using silver brazing alloy (13).
2. Wrap sight glass (11) with a damp towel.
3. Position filter drier (2) between tubing and braze
all joints using silver brazing alloy (13).
4. Secure filter drier (2) to frame using cable ties.
5. Vacuum and recharge refrigeration system
(paragraph 5-18-1-4).
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-23
SERVICE
5-18-4 Check Valve 3. Position crankcase in place.

Refer to Figure 7-25 for parts location. NOTE: Maximum heat allowed on crankcase
body during brazing is 140ºC. Spray crankcase
5-18-4-1 Removal with water during brazing to prevent
overheating.
1. Recover system refrigerant (paragraph
5-18-1-3). 4. Attach temperature probe from a digital
thermometer to crankcase body. Wrap crankcase
NOTE: Recovered refrigerant cannot be reused. body with a damp towel.
2. Remove brazed connections at check valve (4) 5. Braze all joints using silver brazing alloy (13).
inlet and outlet, and remove check valve.
6. Reinstall O-ring, cap screw and back cover.
5-18-4-2 Installation
7. Vacuum and recharge refrigeration system
NOTE: Clean all surfaces to be brazed with a fine (paragraph 5-18-1-4).
Emery cloth sandpaper.
5-18-6 Schraeder Valves
1. Install tubing at check valve (4) inlet and outlet.
Refer to Figure 7-25 for parts location.
2. Position check valve in place, ensuring flow
arrow on check valve points upward. 5-18-6-1 Removal
3. Cover check valve with a damp towel. 1. Recover system refrigerant (paragraph
5-18-1-3).
4. Braze all joints using silver brazing alloy (13).
NOTE: Recovered refrigerant cannot be reused.
5. Vacuum and recharge refrigeration system
(paragraph 5-18-1-4). 2. Remove brazed connections at joints of pipes
and Schraeder valve (6), and remove Schraeder
5-18-5 Pressure Regulator Crank valve.
Case
3. Remove brazed connections at joints of pipe and
Refer to Figure 7-25 for parts location. Schraeder valve (7), and remove Schraeder
valve.
5-18-5-1 Removal
5-18-6-2 Installation
1. Recover system refrigerant (paragraph
5-18-1-3). NOTE: Clean all surfaces to be brazed with a fine
Emery cloth sandpaper.
NOTE: Recovered refrigerant cannot be reused.
NOTE: Valve core must be removed from
2. Remove brazed connections at joints of reducers Schraeder valve before brazing.
(9) and remove pressure regulator crankcase.
1. Position Schraeder valve (7) in place and braze
5-18-5-2 Installation all joints using silver brazing alloy (13).

NOTE: Clean all surfaces to be brazed with a fine 2. Position Schraeder valve (6) in place and braze
Emery cloth sandpaper. all joints using silver brazing alloy (13).

1. Remove back cover of pressure regulator
crankcase (5); remove and retain cap screw and
O-ring.
2. Install reducers (9) at pressure regulator
crankcase (5) inlet and outlet.
3. Vacuum and recharge refrigeration system
(paragraph 5-18-1-4).
5-18-7 Suction Accumulator
Refer to Figure 7-25 for parts location.

5-24 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 SERVICE
5-18-7-1 Removal 2. Place sight glass in position and braze all joints
with silver brazing alloy (13).
1. Recover system refrigerant (paragraph
5-18-1-3). 3. Vacuum and recharge refrigeration system
(paragraph 5-18-1-4).
NOTE: Recovered refrigerant cannot be reused.
5-18-9 Heat Exchanger
2. Remove brazed connection at joint of reducer
(9) and tubing. Refer to Figure 7-25 for parts location.
3. Remove brazed connection at joint of reducer 5-18-9-1 Removal
(9) and tube.
1. Recover system refrigerant (paragraph
4. Remove nut, lock washer and flat washer and 5-18-1-3).
remove accumulator from accumulator bracket.
NOTE: Recovered refrigerant cannot be reused.
5-18-7-2 Installation
2. Remove brazed tubing connections at joints of
NOTE: Clean all surfaces to be brazed with a fine reducers (9) and tubing, and remove heat
Emery cloth sandpaper. exchanger (12).
1. Install accumulator on accumulator bracket and 5-18-9-2 Installation
secure with nut, lock washer and flat washer.
NOTE: Clean all surfaces to be brazed with a fine
2. Install reducers (9) on accumulator inlet and Emery cloth sandpaper.
outlet ports.
1. Install reducers (9) on heat exchanger (12) and
3. Braze all joints using silver brazing alloy (13). place heat exchanger in position.
4. Vacuum and recharge refrigeration system NOTE: Maximum heat allowed on heat
(paragraph 5-18-1-4). exchanger during brazing is 660ºC. Spray heat
exchanger with water during brazing to prevent
5-18-8 Sight Glass overheating.
Refer to Figure 7-25 for parts location. 2. Attach temperature probe from a digital
thermometer to heat exchanger body. Wrap heat
5-18-8-1 Removal exchanger body with a damp towel.
1. Recover system refrigerant (paragraph 3. Braze joints between heat exchanger (12) and
5-18-1-3). reducers (9) using 15% brazing rod.
NOTE: Recovered refrigerant cannot be reused. 4. Braze joint between heat exchanger (12) and
tubing using 15% brazing rod.
2. Remove brazed tubing connections at joints of
sight glass (11) and tubing, and remove sight 5. Braze joint between heat exchanger (12) and
glass. tubing using 15% brazing rod.
5-18-8-2 Installation 6. Vacuum and recharge refrigeration system
(paragraph 5-18-1-4).
NOTE: Clean all surfaces to be brazed with a fine
Emery cloth sandpaper.

1. Wrap sight glass (11) with a damp towel.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 5-25

SERVICE

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

5-26 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 SERVICE

SECTION 6
TROUBLESHOOTING

6-1 GENERAL components of the Cryo3 for the purposes of

The information provided in this section is intended
to assist in the diagnosis and troubleshooting of
instrument malfunctions. The section includes
general troubleshooting procedures, as well as
procedures for correcting monitored failures.
6-1-1 Diagnostic Mode
In addition to the troubleshooting procedures
provided in this section, the Cryo3 software
incorporates a Diagnostic Mode that allows service
personnel to exercise the major functions and
diagnosis and troubleshooting. Refer to paragraph
4-6-9, Diagnostic Mode, on page 4-13 for details.
6-2 GENERAL TROUBLE-
SHOOTING PROCEDURES
Table 6-1, TROUBLESHOOTING CHART, lists
general problems that could occur during operation
of the Cryo3 instrument. Probable causes and
suggested remedies are provided for each problem
listed, so problems can be quickly diagnosed and
corrected.

Table 6-1. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Unit will not operate (AC 1. Defective AC line fuse 1. Check and replace AC line fuse
line cord plugged in)

Chamber fluorescent 1. Defective fluorescent lamp 1. Check for evidence of “black bands” at both
lamp does not operate ends of the lamp (indicating a worn lamp).
Replace fluorescent lamp as necessary.

2. Defective lamp ballast 2. Service or replace lamp ballast assembly, as

assembly needed.

• Chamber Light key 1. Fluorescent lamp is loose 1. Verify the lamp is securely seated at both ends
will not activate in the lamp sockets inside the lamp sockets.
fluorescent lamp
2. Defective fluorescent lamp 2. Check for evidence of “black bands” at both
ends of the lamp (indicating a worn lamp).
Replace fluorescent lamp as necessary.

3. Keypads are not 3. Verify five variable function keys, CRYO+

responding key, O3 key (for D and DM models only) on
center keypad are functional. Perform
diagnostic testing of keypads as necessary
(paragraph 4-6-9-2).

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-1

TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-1. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY
• Chamber Light key 4. Defective chamber light 4a. Verify red LED on SSR #3 on OPTO22
will not activate control SSR backplane is ON when Chamber Light key is
fluorescent lamp actuated or when chamber window is open.
(continued)
4b. Verify instrument operating AC voltage
(measured between OPTO22 backplane
terminal block position 6 and neutral terminal
block) is present when SSR #3 red LED is ON.

4c. Replace SSR #3 fuse or SSR #3 as necessary.

5. Defective lamp ballast 5. Service or replace lamp ballast assembly, as

assembly needed.

• Chamber window will 1. Window switch defective 1a. Verify fluorescent lamp can be activated using
not activate or out of adjustment Chamber Light keypad. If Chamber Light key
fluorescent lamp does not activate lamp, refer to “Chamber
Light key will not activate fluorescent lamp”
on page 6-1 for troubleshooting procedures.

1b. Verify window switch SW4 is properly

installed and secured; verify electrical cabling
connectors are attached securely.

1c. Verify wire switch actuator is actuating the

window switch plunger when the window is
open.

2. Defective window switch
connection to controller
2a. With window closed, use a voltmeter to verify
5V is present at Signal Breakout PCB terminal
block positions 2 and 3. With window opened,
use a voltmeter to verify 0V is present at Signal
Breakout PCB terminal block positions 2 and
3. If voltage is not as specified, check for open
or shorted wiring between window switch SW4
and Signal Breakout PCB terminal blocks;
repair or replace wiring as necessary.

2b. With window closed, use a voltmeter to verify

5V is present between microcontroller U1 pins
5 and 7 on Main Controller PCB. With window
open, use a voltmeter to verify 0V is present
between microcontroller U1 pins 5 and 7 on
Main Controller PCB. If voltage is not as
specified, check ribbon cable between Signal
Breakout PCB and Main Controller PCB for
opens or shorts; replace ribbon cable as
necessary.

6-2 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 SERVICE

Table 6-1. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Refrigerated chamber 1. Chamber temperature set 1. Verify chamber temperature set point is set at
does not function point misadjusted desired chamber temperature. If instrument is
recovering from nightly automatic defrost
cycle, allow instrument additional time to cool.

2. Cabinet air inlets / outlets 2. Make sure there are no obstructions around
obstructed; condenser fan cabinet air inlet and outlet panels. Verify
not drawing air properly condenser fan is operating, and is drawing
ambient air into cabinet.

3. Condensing unit not 3a. Verify Chamber temperature is within 1°C of

functioning properly set point; verify Cryobar temperature is 10°C
colder than Chamber temperature.

3b. If temperature readings from step 3a are

incorrect, verify condensing unit is operating
(top of compressor is warm to touch, and com-
pressor vibrates).

3c. If compressor is not running, connect

compressor connector J17 directly to AC wall
outlet. If compressor operates from wall outlet,
check condensing unit control components:

• Verify control cable from Main Controller

PCB J11 to SSR1 is secure and fully
seated.

• Verify control cable from Main Controller

PCB J11 to SSR1 is in serviceable
condition (able to drive an LED in series
with a 1K resistor between pins 1 and 2);
replace as necessary.

• Check SSR #1 in Main Power Box for

OPEN condition; replace SSR #1as
necessary.

3d. If compressor is running but condenser fan is

not running, check condition of fan motor;
replace fan motor as necessary.

4. Refrigerant leak or 4a. Verify evaporator fins are cold (-40°C

insufficient charge minimum at -35°C temperature set point).
pressure

4b. Inspect sight glass for evidence of refrigerant

leak; sight glass should appear green with no
evidence of bubbles. Repair refrigerant leak as
necessary (paragraph 5-18-1).

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-3

TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-1. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Refrigerated chamber 4. Refrigerant leak or 4c. Check suction pressure, verify a slight vacuum
does not function insufficient charge is indicated. Vacuum check plumbing and
(continued) pressure (continued) recharge system as necessary (paragraph
5-18-1).

Refrigerated chamber will 1. Hot gas bypass valve 1a. Verify red LED on SSR #10 cycles ON and
not maintain temperature control problem (Chamber OFF while system operates. When LED is on,
is too cold) verify 24VDC is present from terminals 19 and
20 of OPTO22 backplane to TB17 position B.

• If 24VDC is not present at terminal 19,

check condition of 24VDC Power Supply
PS3; replace 24VDC Power Supply as
necessary.

• If 24VDC is not present at terminal 20,

check condition of fuse on SSR #10;
replace fuse as necessary.

1b. Momentarily disconnect Hot Gas Valve V2

connector J7 from J88, then reconnect. Verify
an audible click is heard when valve is
energized; verify a high-pitched hissing is
heard when hot gas bypass occurs.

1c. If 24VDC is present from terminals 19 and 20

of OPTO22 backplane, but clicking is not
heard, check condition of hot gas bypass valve:

• Verify anti-arc diode is installed properly,

with cathode (marked by a line on diode
body) is connected to 24VDC line.

• Verify coil is properly installed and secured

to valve stem; tighten retaining screw as
necessary.

• Verify coil resistance at connector J7 is

approximately 70 ohms; replace hot gas
bypass valve or coil as necessary.

2. Excessive environmental 5. Chamber is capable of cooling to

conditions (Chamber is too -35°C at ambient conditions of +25°C
warm) temperature and 50% relative humidity. If
ambient temperature is too warm or instrument
is under direct sunlight, relocate instrument.

3. Refrigerated chamber not 6. See “Refrigerated chamber does not function”

functioning (Chamber is on page 6-3 for troubleshooting procedures.
too warm)

6-4 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 SERVICE

Table 6-1. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Refrigerated chamber will 4. Glass window heater set 4. Adjust window heater setting to lower value to
not maintain temperature too high (Chamber is too reduce loading on refrigeration system.
(continued) warm)

5. Defrost heater control 5. Verify defrost heaters are not being actuated
problem (Chamber is too erroneously:
warm)
• Check for shorted SSR on OPTO22
backplane; replace as necessary.

• Verify SSR #2 is not commanded ON (red

LED is OFF).

• Verify absence of AC voltage between

terminal 4 of OPTO22 backplane and
neutral terminal blocks TB7 thru TB11
(any position).

6. Electronics problem 6. Verify the electronics are correct:

(Chamber is too warm)
• Observe LCD Display. Note and record
Chamber temperature indication and
Cryobar temperature indication.

• With both Power Boxes open, locate

Chamber thermistor connection (J94 to
J44) and Cryobar thermistor connection
(J45 to J42).

• Swap thermistor connections (connect J94

to J42 and J45 to J44). Verify Chamber
temperature noted above is shown in
CRYO+ field on LCD Display; verify
Cryobar temperature noted above is shown
in CHAMBER field. Return thermistor
connections to their original locations.

6. Electronics problem • If temperature indications are not swapped

(Chamber is too warm) as described above, check condition of
(continued) thermistor cabling and Main Controller
PCB; replace thermistor cabling or Main
Controller PCB as necessary.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-5

TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-1. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Refrigerated chamber will 7. Chamber thermistor 7a. Check Chamber thermistor resistance at
not maintain temperature defective (Chamber is too connector J94 and compare resistance value
(continued) warm) with temperature indication on LCD Display.
Verify thermistor resistance corresponds to
displayed Chamber temperature within ±1°C
as shown in Table 3-9. If resistance is not
within limits, replace Chamber thermistor
(paragraph 5-8-5).

7b. Check Chamber temperature with an external

thermometer and compare to temperature
derived from Chamber thermistor resistance;
temperatures should agree within ±2°C. If
Chamber thermistor resistance matches
temperature shown on LCD Display, but dif-
fers from external thermometer by more than
+2°C, replace Chamber thermistor (paragraph
5-8-5). NOTE: A shorted thermistor will
always read warmer than actual temperature.

Condensation on 1. Window Heater setting too 1. Increase window heater power setting (window
Chamber window low heater power setting can be changed in 25%
increments from 0% to 100%).

2. Defective Window Heater 2a. Verify red LED on SSR #7 on OPTO22

control SSR backplane is steady ON (at 100% power) or
blinks at a rate proportional to power setting.

2b. Verify 120VAC voltage, measured between

OPTO22 backplane terminal block position 14
and neutral terminal block, is present when
SSR #7 red LED is ON.

2c. Replace SSR #7 fuse or SSR #7 as necessary.

3. Window Heater is open 3a. Verify window heater resistance (at connector
J24 of Window Assembly) is approximately
340 ohms.

3b. Verify 120VAC voltage, measured between

cable connector J25 positions 1 and 2, is
present when SSR #7 red LED is ON. NOTE:
It may be necessary to use a 39-watt (or
higher), 120V light bulb as a “dummy” load in
place of window heater when performing this
test.

3c. Repair or replace Window Assembly as

necessary (paragraph 5-9).

6-6 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


Table 6-1. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE
Excessive frost buildup 1. Air leakage into Chamber
on cooling coils or due to faulty insulation
Cryobar
2. Defective drain heaters
Ice buildup in Chamber 1. Air leakage into Chamber
due to faulty insulation
2. Defective drain heaters
Instrument will not 1. Air leakage into Chamber
defrost due to faulty insulation
CRYO+ feature does not 1. CRYO+ key does not
operate respond
2. Defective Cryo+ control
SSR
3. Defective Cryo+ Power
Supply
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
REMEDY
1. Check for faulty insulation; repair or replace
insulation as necessary.
2. Service or replace drain heaters as needed.
1. Check for faulty insulation; repair or replace
insulation as necessary.
2. Service or replace drain heaters as needed.
1. Check for faulty insulation; repair or replace
insulation as necessary.
1a. Verify variable functions keys, Chamber Light
key, O3 key (for D and DM models only) on
Main Control Panel (center membrane keypad)
are operational (instrument responds
appropriately when key is actuated).
1b. Verify Cryo+ LED lights when Cryo+ key is
actuated.
1c. If instrument does not respond as described,
perform diagnostic testing of keypads
(paragraph 4-6-9-2).
2a. With Cryo+ key actuated, verify red LED on
SSR #1 on OPTO22 backplane is ON.
2b. Verify 120VAC voltage, measured between
terminal block position 2 on OPTO22
backplane and the Neutral terminal block, is
present.
2c. Replace SSR #1 fuse or SSR #1 as necessary.
3a. With Cryo+ key actuated, verify green LED on
TEC Power Supply PS2 is ON. Check for
proper AC input voltage at terminals 1 and 2 of
connector J1 (input voltage should match
instrument operating voltage). Replace fuse
on Power Supply as necessary.
3b. With Cryo+ key actuated, verify 7VDC
voltage, measured across TEC Power Supply
PCB filter capacitor C1, is present. Repair or
replace Power Supply PCB as necessary.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-7
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 6-1. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE
CRYO+ feature does not 3. Defective Cryo+ Power
operate (continued) Supply (continued)
4. Defective TEC device
Microtome binds, or 1. Diaphragms are caught on
handwheel difficult to Chuck
turn
2. Microtome vertical
bearing needs lubrication
3. Handwheel bearings need
lubrication
4. Counterweight
misadjusted
5. Belt tension pulley
misadjusted
6. Damaged or defective
vertical bearing cages
Motorized coarse 1. Drive motor problem
adjustment problem*
6-8 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
REMEDY
3c. With Cryo+ key actuated, verify 7VDC
(approximate), measured between connector
J116 positions 1 and 2 (located on left-side tub
wall) is present. If voltage is not as specified,
check for proper connection of cable between
TEC Power Supply and tub. NOTE: Cable
from tub connection to Cryo+ device is encased
in foam insulation.
4a. With instrument at ambient room temperature,
verify TEC resistance, measured between
connector J117 position 1 and 2, is approxi-
mately 10 ohms; verify thermistor resistance,
measured between connector J117 positions 3
and 4, is approximately 5K ohms.
4b. With Cryo+ key actuated, verify temperature of
TEC device top surface decreases (gets colder),
and temperature of bottom surface increases
(gets warmer). Repair or replace TEC device as
necessary.
1. Make sure diaphragm is not caught on edge of
Chuck.
2. Remove Microtome (paragraph 5-15-1) and
lubricate vertical bearing.
3. Lubricate Handwheel bearings (paragraph 5-7).
4. Adjust counterweight (paragraph 5-7).
5. Adjust belt tension pulley (paragraph 5-7).
6. Repair or replace Microtome as necessary
(paragraph 5-15-1).
1a. Change to High-speed operation and verify
motor is operating.
1b. With Cryo3 powered ON, verify horizontal
motor shaft cannot be turned by hand.
REV 11JUN09
 SERVICE

Table 6-1. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Motorized coarse 1. Drive motor problem 1c. With Cryo3 powered OFF, verify horizontal
adjustment problem* (continued) motor shaft can be turned by hand in both
(continued) directions (when facing the motor from the
back side of the unit, clockwise rotation
retracts the Microtome, counterclockwise
rotation advances the Microtome).

• If motor shaft cannot be turned by hand,

remove Microtome (paragraph 5-15-1).

• If motor shaft can be turned, but

Microtome is not turning, verify flexible
coupling between horizontal motor and
Microtome is secure; tighten as necessary
(paragraph 5-15-1).

2. No 24VDC to drive motor 2. Check for 24VDC at Horizontal Motor Driver

terminal block positions 3 and 4.

• If 24VDC is not present at Horizontal

Motor Driver terminal block, verify green
LED on 24VDC power supply (in Main
Power Box) is illuminated; replace fuse or
24VDC power supply as necessary.

3. Defective drive motor 3. With Cryo3 powered OFF, measure motor

winding resistance at Horizontal Motor Driver
terminal block positions 7 and 8, and 5 and 6.
Verify resistance for both readings is less than
2 ohms.

• If measured motor winding resistance is

high or open, recheck winding resistance
directly at the motor; replace horizontal
motor as necessary.

4. Loose cable connection 4. Verify cable connections of 34-position ribbon

between Main Controller cable between stepper driver and Main
and Stepper Driver Controller connector J8 are secure.

5. Defective Stepper Driver 5. Replace Stepper Driver as necessary.

Foot pedal does not 1. Foot Pedal not properly 1. Verify Foot Pedal is properly connected to the
function (optional feature) connected instrument (refer to the Cryo3 Operating
Manual for installation instructions).

2. Defective Foot Pedal 2a. With Foot Pedal unactuated, verify contact at
internal wiring connector J72 is open.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-9

TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-1. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Foot pedal does not 2. Defective Foot Pedal 2b. With Foot Pedal actuated, verify contact at
function (optional feature) internal wiring (continued) connector J27 is shorted.
(continued)

2c. If contact does not respond as specified, repair

Foot Pedal internal wiring as necessary.

3. Defective wiring between 3a. With Foot Pedal unactuated, verify 5V voltage,
Foot Pedal and Signal measured between Signal Breakout PCB
Breakout PCB terminal block positions 8 and 9, is present.

3b. With Foot Pedal actuated, verify 0V voltage,

measured between Signal Breakout PCB
terminal block positions 8 and 9, is present.

3c. If voltages are not as specified, check for open

connections in wiring between Foot Pedal and
Signal Breakout PCB. Repair as necessary.

4. Defective Main Controller 4a. With Foot Pedal unactuated, verify 5V voltage,
PCB measured between Main Controller PCB
microcontroller U1 pins 7 and 11, is present.

4b. With Foot Pedal actuated, verify 0V voltage,

measured between Main Controller PCB
microcontroller U1 pins 7 and 11, is present.

4c. Verify ribbon cable between Signal Breakout

PCB and Main Controller PCB is secure and in
good condition.

4d. Replace Main Controller PCB as necessary.

Vacuum debris system 1. Keypads are not re- 1a. Verify other keys (ADV, REV, TRIM) on Left
does not function** sponding Control Panel (left-side membrane keypad) are
operational (instrument responds appropriately
when key is actuated).

1b. Verify Vacuum LED lights when Vacuum key

is actuated.

1c. If instrument does not respond as described,

perform diagnostic testing of keypads
(paragraph 4-6-9-2).

2a. With Vacuum key actuated, verify red LED on

SSR #4 on OPTO22 backplane is ON.

2b. Verify 115VAC voltage, measured between

terminal block 7 positions 7 and 8 on OPTO22
backplane and the Neutral terminal block, is
present.

6-10 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


Table 6-1. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE
Vacuum debris system 2. Vacuum pump not
does not function** operating (continued)
(continued)
3. Defective Pump Speed
Controller or related
wiring
4. Defective vacuum pump
5. Vacuum debris removal
system control valves not
operating properly (are
closed continuously)
*Models 5753, 5802 and 5805 only
** Models 5752, 5801, 5802, 5804 and 5805 only
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
REMEDY
2c. Replace SSR #4 fuse or SSR #4 as necessary.
3a. Verify cable from Main Controller PCB
Connector J12 to Pump Speed Controller
connector J3 is secure and in good condition.
3b. Verify cable from Pump Speed Adjustment
potentiometer to Pump Speed Controller
connector J4 is secure and in good condition.
3c. Verify Pump Motor resistance, measured at
connector J77 positions 1 and 2, is
approximately 5.5 ohms.
3d. Repair or replace Pump Speed Controller as
necessary.
4. Verify vacuum pump operates when powered
directly from a 115VAC outlet at connector
J77. Repair or replace vacuum pump as
necessary.
5a. Verify red LEDs on SSR #8 and SSR #15 are
ON during Vacuum Pump check (indicating
Catalyst Valve V6 and Pump Return Valve V7
are open).
5b. Verify 24VDC voltage measured between
OPTO22 backplane positions 16 and 30 to
TB21 (PS4 24V return) is present. Replace
SSR #15 fuse or SSR #15 as necessary.
5c. Verify 24VDC voltage measured between
OPTO22 backplane positions 15 and 29 to
TB21 (PS4 24V return) is present. Replace
SSR #8 fuse or SSR #8 as necessary.
5d. Verify green LED on 24VDC Power Supply
(inside the Optional Power Box) is ON. If
green LED is not ON, check for open fuse on
Power Supply; replace fuse as necessary.
5e. Verify coil resistance of Catalyst Valve V6 and
Pump Return Valve V7, measured at connec-
tors J109 and J111, respectively, is approxi-
mately 65 ohms. Replace Catalyst Valve V8
(paragraph 5-17-11) and/or Pump Return Valve
V6 (paragraph 5-17-9) as necessary.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-11
TROUBLESHOOTING
6-3 MONITORED PARAMETERS
Certain components and operating parameters are
monitored while the instrument is powered on, and
during operation, to ensure the instrument is in
serviceable condition. When a monitored component
or parameter falls outside the established limits or
operating criteria, a message is shown on the
Display. Depending on the component or operating
parameter involved, one of two types of messages
are displayed:
• Non-Critical Warnings - indicate out-of-
tolerance operation or failure of a non-critical
component. Operation of certain instrument
features or functions may be limited, degraded
or unavailable, but basic freezing and sectioning
operations can be performed.
• Critical Errors - indicate out-of-tolerance
operation or failure of a critical component, and
the instrument is not operational.
6-3-1 Error Messages and Instrument
States
Table 6-2, ERROR MESSAGES AND
INSTRUMENT STATE TABLE, provides a listing
of all non-critical warnings and critical error
messages that may be displayed during operation of
the instrument. The table is divided into subsections,
by monitored system or component. Each line in the
table lists the full text of the error message,
identifies the message type (Non-Critical warning
message or Critical error message), describes the
triggering event (equipment condition that caused
the messages to display), and references a
description of the current operating condition of the
instrument (machine state) provided in Table 6-3,
MACHINE STATE DESCRIPTIONS.
6-3-2 Troubleshooting Non-Critical
Warnings
Table 6-4, NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS, lists all
non-critical warning messages that may be displayed
during instrument operation, which may indicate a
malfunction in, or failure of, a monitored system or
component. Probable causes and suggested remedies
are provided for each condition listed, so the
condition can be quickly diagnosed and corrected.
6-3-3 Troubleshooting Critical Errors
Table 6-5, CRITICAL ERRORS, lists all critical
errors that may be displayed during instrument
operation. Probable causes and suggested remedies
are provided for each error listed, so the condition
can be quickly diagnosed and corrected.

Table 6-2. ERROR MESSAGES AND INSTRUMENT STATE TABLE

MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION
General
An Unexpected System Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when system unexpectedly begins re-
Reset Occurred. Press Critical executing code while a warm boot is still in process (usually caused by
Any Key To Continue. power-fail or watchdog timer activation). State lasts until operator
presses any variable function key; system then returns to normal
operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

Chamber Is Too Warm Non-
For CRYO+. Press Any Critical
Key To Continue.
Trigger Event: State is entered when operator attempts to start CRYO+
with a chamber temperature warmer than -10 °C. The CRYO+ function
is not activated. State lasts until operator presses any variable function
key. System returns to normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

6-12 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 SERVICE

Table 6-2. ERROR MESSAGES AND INSTRUMENT STATE TABLE

MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION
Microtome
Microtome Emergency Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when the Emergency Off (EMO) switch
Off Switch Engaged. Critical is engaged. State lasts until operator manually resets the EMO switch.
Check Microtome, System returns to normal operating mode.
Then Reset EMO Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.
Switch.

Microtome Vertical Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when two or more Vertical Limit
Limit Failure. Press Critical Switches are ACTIVE simultaneously. Normally, this is caused by an
Any Key To Continue. unrecoverable hardware error, but under certain circumstances, may be
caused by a noise transient. The system treats this error as non-Critical to
allow the operator to attempt to continue (although the Auto-Cut Cycle is
terminated). If the state was entered as a result of hardware failure
(rather than a noise transient), the error will be re-issued when the
operator starts another cut. State lasts until operator presses any variable
function key. System returns to normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

Microtome Horizontal Non-
Limit Failure. Press Critical
Any Key To Continue.
Microtome Vertical Non-
Motor Failure. Press Critical
Any Key To Continue.
Section Size Exceeds Non-
Intermittent Size. Press Critical
Any Key To Continue.
Trigger Event: State is entered when two or more Vertical Limit
Switches are ACTIVE simultaneously. Normally, this is caused by an
unrecoverable hardware error, but under certain circumstances, may be
caused by a noise transient. The system treats this error as non-Critical to
allow the operator to attempt to continue (although the current Auto-Cut
Cycle is terminated). If the state was entered as a result of hard-ware
failure (rather than a noise transient), the error will be re-issued when the
operator starts another cut. State lasts until operator presses any variable
function key. System returns to normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.
Trigger Event: State is entered when a change on either the Vertical
Upper Limit or Vertical Lower Limit Switch is not detected within 12
seconds (from the last limit detection). Normally, this is caused by an
unrecoverable hardware error, but under certain circumstances, the
vertical axis may not travel the distance in the required time. The system
treats this error as non-Critical to allow the operator to attempt to
continue (although the current Auto-Cut Cycle is terminated). If the state
was entered as a result of hardware failure (rather than a noise transient),
the error will be re-issued when the operator starts another cut. State lasts
until operator presses any variable function key. System returns to
normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.
Trigger Event: State is entered when operator attempts to perform an
Intermittent Cut with the Section Size set larger than the Intermittent Cut
Size. An Intermittent Cut IS NOT performed. State lasts until operator
presses any variable function key. System returns to normal operating
mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-13

TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 6-2. ERROR MESSAGES AND INSTRUMENT STATE TABLE
MESSAGE TYPE
Microtome Vertical Critical
Driver Failure. Contact
Service Department.
Microtome Horizontal Critical
Driver Failure. Contact
Service Department.
Microtome Horizontal Critical
Motor Failure. Contact
Service Department.
Real Time Clock Data Non-
Invalid. Press Any Key Critical
To Continue.
6-14 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
DESCRIPTION
Trigger Event: State is entered when the Vertical Motor Driver returns
a FAULT condition. This is caused by an over-current or over-
temperature condition of the driver. The system will not allow operation
to continue.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State B.
NOTE: The system does not store the error condition. If instrument
power is turned off for a period of time long enough to allow the
Microtome motor drivers to cool down, the system will allow normal
operation until the next Critical error.
Trigger Event: State is entered when the Horizontal Motor Driver
returns a FAULT condition. This is caused by an over-current or over-
temperature condition of the driver. The system will not allow operation
to continue.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State B.
NOTE: The system does not store the error condition. If instrument
power is turned off for a period of time long enough to allow the
Microtome motor drivers to cool down, the system will allow normal
operation until the next Critical error.
Trigger Event: State is entered when the Horizontal Motor control
software does not receive the required number of feedback PWM clock
pulses. Normally, this is caused by a failure in the Motor Driver
electronics or the MPU PWM circuitry. The system will not allow
operation to continue.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State B.
NOTE: The system does not store the error condition. If instrument
power is turned off for a period of time long enough to allow the
Microtome motor drivers to cool down, the system will allow normal
operation until the next Critical error.
Real-Time Clock
Trigger Event: State is entered at power up when, before performing
power-on self-test (POST), it is determined that data stored in Real-Time
Clock (RTC) RAM is invalid. Normally, this is caused by a depleted
RTC battery. There are 56-bytes of non-volatile RAM in RTC. The last
two bytes are reserved for a 16-bit CRC; which is calculated on the first
54-bytes of RTC RAM. The first byte of RAM holds a Data Version ID
(DVI); which identifies the format of the data stored in the RAM – every
unique model of the Cryo3 contains a different DVI. The POST routine
reads the data from RTC RAM, calculates the CRC-16 on the data, com-
pares the calculated CRC-16 and the stored CRC-16, and verifies the
stored DVI matches the firmware. State lasts until operator presses any
variable function key. The RTC RAM is restored to the factory default,
and the system completes the POST. NOTE: All three system settings
will be reset to the factory defaults when this error is cleared.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State C.
REV 11JUN09
 SERVICE

Table 6-2. ERROR MESSAGES AND INSTRUMENT STATE TABLE

MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION
Real Time Clock Critical Trigger Event: State is entered at power up, when upon performing
Failure. Contact power-on self-test (POST), it is determined that the Real-Time Clock
Service Department. (RTC) is not generating the required timing pulse. The system attempts
to reset/restart the RTC chip four times before entering this state. The
system will not allow operation to continue.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State B.
Real Time Clock Not Critical Trigger Event: State is entered when the Real-Time Clock (RTC) fails
Responding. Contact to respond to a read command. The system attempts to read from the
Service Department. RTC four times before entering this state. This condition can occur
during the power-up self-test (POST), or at anytime the operator
attempts to select a different system setting. The system will not allow
operation to continue. NOTE: Since all of the Cryo3 operating
parameters are stored in the RTC, the system has no valid parameters
from which to operate if it cannot read the RTC.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State B.
Window Lock / Unlock
The Window Is Open - Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when the operator presses the LOCK
Unable to Lock. Press Critical variable function key to lock the Chamber window (after selecting the
Any Key To Continue. lock-message), and the window is open. State lasts until operator presses
any variable function key. System does not attempt to lock the window;
the Lock function is canceled and the system returns to normal operating
mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

Unable To Lock Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when system attempts to lock the
Window! Verify Critical Chamber window and the solenoid fails to lock. State lasts until operator
Window Is Completely presses any variable function key (proper window position should be
Forward. Press Any verified before pressing key). System repeats the attempt to lock the
Key To Continue. window. Repeated failures may indicate a faulty Chamber window or
window lock solenoid.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

Unable To Unlock Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when system attempts to unlock the
Window! Verify Critical Chamber window and the solenoid fails to unlock. State lasts until
Window Is Completely operator presses any variable function key (proper window position
Forward. Press Any should be verified before pressing key). System repeats the attempt to
Key To Continue. unlock the window. Repeated failures may indicate a faulty Chamber
window or window lock solenoid.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

Disinfection
Window Closure Not Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when the Chamber window is not
Detected. Ozone Critical detected closed within 30 seconds of the start of a Disinfection Cycle.
Generation Cycle State lasts until operator presses any variable function key. The cycle has
Aborted. Press Any not yet produced ozone, so it can be safely aborted. System returns to
Key To Continue. normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-15

TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-2. ERROR MESSAGES AND INSTRUMENT STATE TABLE

MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION
Window Interlock Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when the system checks the integrity of
Failure. Ozone Critical the Chamber (at the beginning of a Disinfection Cycle – following the
Generation Cycle attempt to close and lock the system) and detects that the window close
Aborted. Press Any switch is reporting OPEN. This usually indicates a defective window
Key To Continue. close switch. State lasts until operator presses any variable function key.
The cycle has not yet produced ozone, so it can be safely aborted.
System returns to normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.
Unable To Lock The Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when the system checks the integrity of
Window. Ozone Critical the Chamber (at the beginning of a Disinfection Cycle – following the
Generation Cycle attempt to close and lock the system) and detects that the window
Aborted. Press Any solenoid switch is reporting UNLOCKED. This usually indicates the
Key To Continue. window did not lock. State lasts until operator presses any variable
function key. The cycle has not yet produced ozone, so it can be safely
aborted. System returns to normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.
Unable To Close The Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when the system checks the integrity of
Water Drain. Ozone Critical the Chamber (at the beginning of a Disinfection Cycle – following the
Generation Cycle attempt to close and lock the system) and detects that the water drain
Aborted. Press Any valve switch is reporting OPEN. This usually indicates the drain valve
Key To Continue. did not close. State lasts until operator presses any variable function key.
The cycle has not yet produced ozone, so it can be safely aborted.
System returns to normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.
Unable To Close The Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when the system checks the integrity of
Ozone Sensor. Ozone Critical the Chamber (at the beginning of a Disinfection Cycle – following the
Generation Cycle attempt to close and lock the system) and detects that the ozone sensor
Aborted. Press Any valve switch is reporting OPEN. This usually indicates the sensor valve
Key To Continue. did not close. State lasts until operator presses any variable function key.
The cycle has not yet produced ozone, so it can be safely aborted.
System returns to normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.
System Interlock Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when the system checks the integrity of
Failure. Ozone Critical the Chamber (at the beginning of a Disinfection Cycle – following the
Generation Cycle attempt to close and lock the system) and detects that at least one
Aborted. Press Any interlock had a FALSE indication; i.e., the system detected an interlock
Key To Continue. failure, but the failure cleared before the source could be determined.
This message is used to indicate a transient or intermittent error. This
state is usually caused by a noise transient. State lasts until operator
presses any variable function key. The cycle has not yet produced ozone,
so it can be safely aborted. System returns to normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

6-16 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 SERVICE

Table 6-2. ERROR MESSAGES AND INSTRUMENT STATE TABLE

MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION
Purge Pressure Sensor Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when the system checks the state of the
Failure. Ozone Critical Purge Pressure Sensor (at the beginning of a Disinfection Cycle – after
Generation Cycle the system is closed and locked) and detects pressure in the lines after all
Aborted. Press Any vacuum valves have been opened and sufficient time has been allowed
Key To Continue. for pressure to vent. Normally, this is caused by an unrecoverable
hardware error, but under certain circumstances, may be caused by a
noise transient. The system treats this error as non-Critical to allow the
operator to attempt to continue (although the Disinfection Cycle is
aborted). If the state was entered as a result of hardware failure (rather
than a noise transient), the error will be re-issued when the operator
starts another Disinfection Cycle. State lasts until operator presses any
variable function key. The cycle has not yet produced ozone, so it can be
safely aborted. System returns to normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

Chamber Vacuum Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when the system checks the state of the
Sensor Failure. Ozone Critical Chamber Vacuum Sensor (at the beginning of a Disinfection
Generation Cycle Cycle – after the system is closed and locked) and detects vacuum in the
Aborted. Press Any Chamber after all vacuum valves have been opened and sufficient time
Key To Continue. has been allowed for vacuum to vent. Normally, this is caused by an
unrecoverable hardware error, but under certain circumstances, may be
caused by a noise transient. The system treats this error as non-Critical to
allow the operator to attempt to continue (although the Disinfection
Cycle is aborted). If the state was entered as a result of hardware failure
(rather than a noise transient), the error will be re-issued when the
operator starts another Disinfection Cycle. State lasts until operator
presses any variable function key. The cycle has not yet produced ozone,
so it can be safely aborted. System returns to normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

Vacuum Pump Failure. Non-
Ozone Generation Critical
Cycle Aborted. Press
Any Key To Continue.
Trigger Event: State is entered when the system activates the Vacuum
Pump in Purge Mode to test the pump (at the beginning of a Disinfection
Cycle – after the system is closed and locked) and detects that the Purge
Pressure Sensor is reporting NO PRESSURE. Normally, this is caused
by an unrecoverable hardware error (either a failure of the Vacuum
Pump or the Purge Pressure Sensor), but under certain circumstances,
may be caused by a noise transient. The system treats this error as non-
Critical to allow the operator to attempt to continue (although the
Disinfection Cycle is aborted). If the state was entered as a result of
hardware failure (rather than a noise transient), the error will be re-issued
when the operator starts another Disinfection Cycle. State lasts until
operator presses any variable function key. The cycle has not yet
produced ozone, so it can be safely aborted. System returns to normal
operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-17

TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-2. ERROR MESSAGES AND INSTRUMENT STATE TABLE

MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION
Ozone Sensor Failure. Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when the system checks the state of the
Ozone Generation Critical Ozone Sensor (at the beginning of a Disinfection Cycle – after the
Cycle Aborted. Press system is closed and locked) and detects that it is reporting OZONE.
Any Key To Continue. Normally, this is caused by a faulty sensor (or a sensor that is completely
saturated with ozone from a previously aborted Disinfection Cycle). The
system treats this error as non-Critical to allow the operator to attempt to
continue (although the Disinfection Cycle is aborted). If the state was
entered as a result of hardware failure (rather than a saturated ozone
sensor), the error will be re-issued when the operator starts another
Disinfection Cycle. State lasts until operator presses any variable
function key. The cycle has not yet produced ozone, so it can be safely
aborted. System returns to normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

Chamber Seal Failure. Non-
Ozone Generation Critical
Cycle Aborted. Press
Any Key To Continue.
Trigger Event: State is entered when the system checks the state of the
Chamber Vacuum Sensor (at the beginning of a Disinfection Cycle –
after the system has attempted to draw a partial chamber vacuum) and
detects that it is reporting NO VACUUM. Normally, this is caused by a
faulty window seal. The system treats this error as non-Critical to allow
the operator to attempt to continue (although the Disinfection Cycle is
aborted). If the state was entered as a result of hardware failure, the error
will be re-issued when the operator starts another Disinfection Cycle.
State lasts until operator presses any variable function key. The cycle has
not yet produced ozone, so it can be safely aborted. System returns to
normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

Ozone Generating Non- Trigger Event: State is entered when the system attempts to actuate the
Lamp Failure. Ozone Critical Ozone Lamp (at the beginning of a Disinfection Cycle – after the system
Generation Cycle has verified chamber integrity) and detects that the Ozone Lamp
Aborted. Press Any Intensity Sensor is not reporting enough light. The Ozone Lamp must
Key To Continue. produce at least 26 A/D units more than the ambient level (the level
before the lamp is turned on). The system attempts to actuate the Ozone
Lamp four times before entering this state. Normally, this is caused by a
worn or defective Ozone Lamp. The system treats this error as non-
Critical to allow the operator to attempt to continue (although the
Disinfection Cycle is aborted). If the state was entered as a result of
hardware failure, the error will be re-issued when the operator starts
another Disinfection Cycle. State lasts until operator presses any variable
function key. The cycle has not yet produced a significant amount of
ozone, so it can be safely aborted. System returns to normal operating
mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

6-18 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 SERVICE

Table 6-2. ERROR MESSAGES AND INSTRUMENT STATE TABLE

MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION
Ozone Generating Non- Trigger Event: State is entered during a Disinfection Cycle while system is
Lamp Failure. Ozone Critical generating ozone, and the Ozone Lamp Intensity Sensor reports that the
Generation Cycle Ozone Lamp intensity has dropped below the acceptable level. The Ozone
Aborted. Press Any Lamp must produce at least 26 A/D units more than the ambient level (the
Key To Continue. level before the lamp is turned on). Normally, this is caused by a worn or
defective Ozone Lamp. The system treats this error as non-Critical to allow
the operator to attempt to continue (although the Disinfection Cycle is
aborted). State lasts until operator presses any variable function key. The
cycle may have produced a significant amount of ozone, so it cannot be
safely aborted without purging. System enters a Purge cycle.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State D.
NOTE: To prevent potential ozone leakage through the window seal,
system does not start a Purge until after the operator presses a variable
function key.

Ozone Leak Detected. Non-
Ozone Generation Critical
Cycle Aborted. Press
Any Key To Continue.
Trigger Event: State is entered during a Disinfection Cycle while system is
generating ozone, and either the chamber integrity is violated or the ozone
sensor detects ozone in the cabinet ambient air. The system treats this error
as non-Critical to allow the operator to attempt to continue (although the
Disinfection Cycle is aborted). State lasts until operator presses any variable
function key. The cycle may have produced a significant amount of ozone,
so it cannot be safely aborted without purging. System enters a Purge cycle.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State D.
NOTE: To prevent potential ozone leakage through the window seal,
system does not start a Purge until after the operator presses a variable
function key.

Chamber Vacuum Non- Trigger Event: State is entered during a Disinfection Cycle while system is
Level Failure. Ozone Critical generating ozone, and it is determined that a partial vacuum cannot be main-
Generation Cycle tained in the Chamber. The system attempts to generate a partial chamber
Aborted. Press Any vacuum four sequential times before entering this state. The system treats
Key To Continue. this error as non-Critical to allow the operator to attempt to continue (al-
though the Disinfection Cycle is aborted). State lasts until operator presses
any variable function key. The cycle may have produced a significant
amount of ozone, so it cannot be safely aborted without purging. System
enters a Purge cycle.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State D.
NOTE: To prevent potential ozone leakage through the window seal,
system does not start a Purge until after the operator presses a variable
function key.

Ozone Generating Non- Trigger Event: State is entered at the termination of a Disinfection Cycle,
Lamp Should Be Critical when the system determines that the Ozone Lamp has been used for at least
Replaced. Press Any 960 illumination cycles. This is an advisory warning only; the system allows
Key To Continue. normal operation of the instrument. State lasts until operator presses any
variable function key. System returns to normal operating mode.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State A.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-19

TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-2. ERROR MESSAGES AND INSTRUMENT STATE TABLE

MESSAGE TYPE DESCRIPTION
Ozone Purge Failure. Critical Trigger Event: State is entered at the termination of a Disinfection
Contact Service Cycle, when the system determines that the chamber still contains ozone.
Department. The system attempts to purge the chamber four times before entering this
state. The system will not allow operation to continue.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State E.

Unable To Close The Critical
Ozone Sensor. Contact
Service Department.
Trigger Event: State is entered during a Disinfection Cycle either at the
termination of the ozone sensor check or the termination of a failed
Purge attempt, when the system detects that the ozone sensor valve
switch is reporting OPEN. This usually indicates the sensor valve did not
close. The system will not allow operation to continue.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State E.
NOTE: The ozone sensor is positioned to chamber air; this allows the
ozone that is in the chamber to leak into the Cryo3 cabinet. Due to the
timing of this error condition, there should not be a high concentration of
ozone in the Chamber (state was entered either after the five-minute
ozone sensor check or after the Purge cycle).

Unable To Open The Critical
Ozone Sensor. Contact
Service Department.
Trigger Event: State is entered during a Disinfection Cycle either at the
start of the ozone sensor check or the start of a no-ozone check after a
Purge attempt, when the system detects that the ozone sensor valve
switch is reporting CLOSED. This usually indicates the sensor valve did
not open. The system will not allow operation to continue.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State E.

Vacuum Pump Failure. Critical Trigger Event: State is entered during a Disinfection Cycle, while
Contact Service system is purging ozone, and it is determined that the Purge Pressure
Department. Sensor is reporting NO PRESSURE. Normally, this is caused by an
unrecoverable hardware error (either a failure of the Vacuum Pump or
the Purge Pressure Sensor). The system will not allow operation to
continue.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State E.
NOTE: Chamber atmosphere could be fully saturated with ozone when
this condition occurs. Due to the nature of this condition, to prevent
potential ozone leakage through the window seal, a Purge cycle is not
attempted.

Ozone Sensor Failure. Critical Trigger Event: State is entered during a Disinfection Cycle at the
Contact Service termination of the ozone sensor check, when the system detects that the
Department. ozone sensor did not detect ozone. This usually indicates the sensor is
faulty. The system will not allow operation to continue.
Machine State: See Table 6-3, State E.

6-20 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 SERVICE

Table 6-3. MACHINE STATE DESCRIPTIONS

STATE DESCRIPTION
A Normal Non-Critical Error
The system has encountered an error from which it can recover and continue normal operation. This
state is entered to alert the operator that an error has occurred; the cause of the error is shown on the
LCD Display, along with instructions to ‘push any (variable function) key’ to continue. While in the
Normal Non-Critical Error state, the following equipment conditions are in effect:
• Both Vertical and Horizontal Microtome motors stopped and disabled.
• All keys are ignored (except to terminate machine state).
• Compressor ON - Chamber temperature is regulated at set point.
• Window heater is regulated as required.
• Window lock remains in last used state (can be either LOCKED or UNLOCKED).
• Ozone lamp is OFF.
• Water drain remains in last used state (usually OPEN).
• Vacuum operation is stopped and disabled (all vacuum valves CLOSED).
• All CRYO functions are stopped and disabled (except cooling).
After a variable function key is pressed, the error message is cleared and the system returns to normal
operation.

B Normal Critical Error

The system has encountered an error from which it cannot recover; normal operation is not possible
due to a hardware failure. This state is entered to alert the operator that an error has occurred; the
cause of the error is shown on the LCD Display, along with instructions to ‘contact service’. While in
the Normal Critical Error state, the following equipment conditions are in effect:

• Both Vertical and Horizontal Microtome motors stopped and disabled.

• All keys are ignored.
• Compressor ON - Chamber temperature is regulated at set point.
• Window Lock remains in last used state (can be either LOCKED or UNLOCKED).
• Ozone lamp is OFF.
• Water drain is CLOSED.
• Ozone sensor is CLOSED (reading ambient air).
• Vacuum operation is stopped and disabled (all vacuum valves CLOSED).
• All CRYO functions are stopped and disabled (except cooling).

Although normal operation cannot continue, the system maintains the specified Chamber temperature
to preserve any tissue specimens stored in the Chamber.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-21

TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-3. MACHINE STATE DESCRIPTIONS

STATE DESCRIPTION
C Real Time Clock Non-Critical Error
The system has encountered an error from which it can recover and continue normal operation. This
state is entered to alert the operator that an error has occurred; the cause of the error is shown on the
LCD Display, along with instructions to ‘push any (variable function) key’ to continue. The power-on
self-test (POST) has not yet completed, so the refrigeration compressor has not been turned on;
therefore, the Chamber cannot be cooled. While in the Real Time Clock Non-Critical Error state,
the following equipment conditions are in effect:
• Both Vertical and Horizontal Microtome motors stopped and disabled.
• All keys are ignored (except to terminate machine state).
• Compressor OFF - Chamber is not being cooled.
• Window heater NOT heating.
• Window lock remains in last used state (can be either LOCKED or UNLOCKED).
• Ozone lamp is OFF.
• Water drain remains in last used state (usually OPEN).
• Vacuum operation is stopped and disabled (all vacuum valves CLOSED).
• All CRYO functions are stopped and disabled.
After a variable function key is pressed, the error message is cleared and the system completes the
POST.

D Disinfection Non-Critical Error

The system has encountered an error from which it can recover and continue normal operation. This
state is entered to alert the operator that an error has occurred; the cause of the error is shown on the
LCD Display, along with instructions to ‘push any (variable function) key’ to continue. While in the
Disinfection Non-Critical Error state, the following equipment conditions are in effect:
• Both Vertical and Horizontal Microtome motors stopped and disabled.
• All keys are ignored (except to terminate machine state).
• Compressor ON - Chamber Temperature is regulated at set point.
• Window heater regulated as required.
• Window lock is LOCKED.
• Ozone lamp is OFF.
• Water drain in CLOSED.
• Vacuum operation is stopped and disabled (all vacuum valves CLOSED).
After a variable function key is pressed, the error message is cleared and the system continues with an
ozone purge cycle.

6-22 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 SERVICE

Table 6-3. MACHINE STATE DESCRIPTIONS

STATE DESCRIPTION
E Disinfection Critical Error
The system has encountered an error from which it cannot recover; normal operation is not possible
due to a hardware failure. This state is entered to alert the operator that an error has occurred; the
cause of the error is shown on the LCD Display, along with instructions to ‘contact service’. While in
the Normal Critical Error state, the following equipment conditions are in effect:
• Both Vertical and Horizontal Microtome motors stopped and disabled.
• All keys are ignored.
• Compressor ON - Chamber temperature is regulated at set point.
• Window lock is LOCKED.
• Ozone lamp is OFF.
• Water drain is CLOSED.
• Ozone sensor is CLOSED (reading ambient air).
• Vacuum operation is stopped and disabled (all vacuum valves CLOSED).
• All CRYO functions stopped and disabled (except cooling).
Although normal operation cannot continue, the system maintains the specified Chamber Temperature
to preserve any tissue specimens stored in the Chamber.

Table 6-4. NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

An Unexpected System 1. Facility power not within 1. Check power outlet to ensure facility power
Reset Occurred specifications (for frequent meets specified requirements; relocate
occurrences of warning) instrument near stable power source as
necessary.

2. Reset button on Main 2. Check condition of Main Controller PCB; re-

Controller PCB is actuated pair or replace as necessary.

3. Software watchdog timer 3. Check condition of Main Controller PCB; re-

timed out pair or replace as necessary.

Microtome Emergency 1. Defective Microtome 1. Service or replace Microtome EMO switch

Off Switch Engaged EMO switch (paragraph 5-5-4-2).

Microtome Vertical 1. Vertical optical sensors
Motor Failure not triggered within
specified time (20
seconds) allowed by
software
1. Verify Microtome Optical sensors are triggered
by Microtome flag. Manually rotate
Handwheel and verify three optical sensors on
side of Microtome are triggered as Microtome
flag moves (when not blocked by flag, red LED
on sensor is illuminated; when blocked by flag,
red LED is extinguished). Adjust position of
optical sensors as necessary.

2. Defective wiring to optical 2. If optical sensor LEDs are not illuminated at

sensors any time, check wiring to optical sensors:

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-23

TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-4. NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Microtome Vertical 2. Defective wiring to optical • Ensure cable connector at sensor is firmly
Motor Failure (continued) sensors (continued) installed and fully seated.

• Check for broken wires between optical

sensor and Microtome Breakout PCB
(sensors are connected to channels 3, 4 and
6); repair wiring as necessary (paragraph
5-4-2).

• Verify 20-position ribbon cable between

Microtome Breakout PCB and Main
Controller PCB J15 is firmly installed and
fully seated. NOTE: Optical sensors
receive DC power from the Main
Controller PCB.

3. Ribbon cable disconnected 3. Verify ribbon cable at vertical stepper driver is

or defective secure and in good condition.

4. Vertical motor direction 4. Verify vertical motor is turning the in right

reversed direction. NOTE: The vertical motor is
mounted on a one-way clutch; if rotation is
reversed, motor will “free spin” and will not
drive the timing belt.

• If motor rotation is reversed, check motor

wiring at connectors J68 and J69, and at
vertical stepper driver terminals 5 through
8. If necessary, swap the two-wire
connection to one motor window only to
correct vertical motor direction.

5. Defective vertical stepper 5a. Verify EMO switch is released, and green LED
driver or vertical motor on Microtome Power Supply PS1 is ON.
Verify 15VDC voltage is present at vertical
stepper driver terminals 3 and 4.

5b. Verify ribbon cable at vertical stepper driver is

secure and in good condition. Verify 4-position
DIP switches on vertical stepper driver are set
to OFF; reset switches as necessary.

5c. Verify motor resistance, measured at stepper

driver terminals 7 and 8 (for motor winding A)
and terminals 5 and 6 (for motor winding B) is
approximately 2 ohms (for each winding).

6-24 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


Table 6-4. NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE
Microtome Vertical 5. Defective vertical stepper
Motor Failure (continued) driver or vertical motor
(continued)
Microtome Vertical 1. Vertical driver is
Driver Failure overheated
2. Defective vertical stepper
driver
Microtome Vertical Limit 1. Two or more vertical
Failure optical sensors triggered
simultaneously NOTE: If
multiple sensors are
triggered simultaneously,
the software cannot tell
when to advance or retract
the Microtome)
Replace The Debris Filter 1. Obstructed Debris Filter
Unit** Assembly
2. Defective Debris Filter
Assembly
Unable To Lock The 1. Window is not pulled
Window completely forward
2. Window latching solenoid
and position switch
adjustment or control
problem
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
REMEDY
5d. Swap the 34-position ribbon cables at Main
Controller PCB connectors J8 and J9. Use the
Microtome ADV and RET keys to control the
vertical motor. If vertical motor responds to
key actuations, replace vertical stepper driver.
If vertical motor does not respond to key
actuations, replace vertical motor. Return
ribbon cables to their proper connections.
1a. Verify vertical driver is securely mounted on
heatsink. Tighten mounting hardware as
necessary.
1b. Verify fan on optional Power Box is operating.
Repair or replace fan as necessary.
2. Verify motor current-setting resistor between
vertical stepper driver terminals 2 and 3 is
securely installed; verify resistance is 1.5K
ohms. Repair or replace vertical stepper driver
as necessary.
1a. Verify three vertical optical sensors are
triggered as Microtome flag moves (when not
blocked by flag, red LED on sensor is
illuminated; when blocked by flag, red LED is
extinguished).
1b. Verify the 20-position ribbon cable is
connected securely and in good condition.
1c. Replace optical sensor(s) as necessary.
1. Service the Debris Filter Assembly as needed
(paragraph 5-8-1-2).
2. Replace Debris Filter Assembly (paragraph
5-8-1-2).
1. Pull the window completely forward.
2a. Open Top Power Box; manually actuate (pull
and release) window solenoid plunger to verify
operation and ensure plunger will operate
switch lever. Repair or replace window
latching solenoid as necessary.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-25
TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 6-4. NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE
Unable To Lock The 2. Window latching solenoid
Window (continued) and position switch
adjustment or control
problem (continued)
Unable To Unlock The 1. Window is not pulled
Window completely forward
2. Window latching solenoid
and position switch
adjustment or control
problem
Window Closure Not 1. Window is not pulled
Detected. Ozone Cycle completely forward
Aborted.**
2. Defective window position
switch
Chamber Seal Failure. 1. Air leakage into Chamber
Ozone Cycle Aborted.** due to faulty
seal/insulation
2. Water drain ball valve
opening obstructed
6-26 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA
REMEDY
2b. Verify green LED on optional 24VDC Power
Supply (in optional Power Box) is ON. If not,
check for open fuse on power supply; replace
fuse as necessary.
2c. Verify red LED on SSR channel 12 and 13 on
OPTO22 backplane is ON when window
latching solenoid is commanded ON, and
extinguishes automatically after 10 seconds.
Verify 24VDC voltage is present at terminal
positions 24 and 26 when SSR is commanded
ON. Replace fuse or SSR as necessary.
2d. Verify 24VDC (minimum) voltage is present
across window solenoid coil when solenoid is
commanded to pull. Verify -10VDC
(minimum) voltage is present across window
latching solenoid coil when solenoid is
commanded to release. Replace window
latching solenoid as necessary.
1. Pull the window completely forward.
2. Open Top Power Box; manually actuate (pull
and release) window solenoid plunger to verify
operation and ensure plunger will operate
switch lever. Repair or replace window
latching solenoid as necessary.
1. Pull the window completely forward.
2. Verify Chamber light turns on when window is
opened. If light does not turn on, check
condition of wiring between window switch
and digital Signal Breakout PCB. Repair or
replace wiring or window switch as necessary.
1. Verify silicone seal on window is not damaged.
Verify seal does not become deformed (folded)
when window is closed. Repair or replace
window (paragraph 5-9).
2. Ensure drain pipe is clear; push through debris
as necessary.
REV 11JUN09
 SERVICE

Table 6-4. NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Chamber Seal Failure. 3. Microtome diaphragms 3. Verify Microtome diaphragms are in good
Ozone Cycle Aborted. torn or punctured condition. Replace diaphragms as necessary
(continued)** (paragraph 5-15-2). NOTE: If the rear
diaphragm is damaged, there may be frost
buildup between the diaphragms.

4. Malfunctioning water 4. Observe ball valve operation by looking

drain ball valve or directly into drain opening. As the ball valve
associated component operates, the drain opening will become
smaller, and will eventually close completely.
If the ball valve does not operate, or does not
close the drain opening completely, check the
following:

• Verify ball valve motor is firmly attached

to ball valve body bracket. Tighten
attaching hardware as necessary.

• Check condition of relay K1 in optional

Power Box. With the relay de-energized,
check for continuity between relay
positions 1 and 5. Verify relay is firmly
seated in its socket. Verify relay is
operational (relay should "click" each time
a command to the ball valve is given.
Replace relay K1 as necessary.

• If relay is operational, verify 115VAC

voltage is present between relay K1 posi-
tion 5 and Neutral at terminal block TB7.
Check for open fuse F5; replace fuse as
necessary.

• Verify motor winding resistance measured

between positions 1 and 4 or 2 and 4
(depending on current motor position) is
approximately 7 ohms (for 115VAC ball
valves) or 30 ohms (for 230VAC ball
valves). Repair or replace ball valve as
necessary.

• Verify ball valve is operational by

connecting a 9V battery across relay K1
positions 7 (+) and 8 (-). If ball valve
operates, replace relay control cable and/or
Main Controller PCB as necessary.

Ozone Lamp Failure. 1. No power to ozone 1. Initiate a Disinfection cycle to determine if the
Ozone Cycle Aborted.** generating lamp lamp will start. If the lamp does not start,
proceed as follows:

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-27

TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-4. NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Ozone Lamp Failure. 1. No power to ozone • Verify the green LED on the Timer PCB is
Ozone Cycle Aborted.** generating lamp ON (indicating AC power is applied to the
(continued) (continued) Ozone Lamp Ballast.

• If green LED on Timer PCB is not

illuminated, verify red LED on SSR #5
on OPTO22 backplane is ON. Verify
115VAC voltage is present between
OPTO22 backplane position 10 and Neutral
at Terminal Block TB7. Replace SSR #5
fuse or SSR #5 as necessary.

• Check for open fuse F1. Replace as

necessary.

2. Defective Lamp Ballast 2. Replace Lamp Ballast BL2.

3. Defective ozone 3. Replace ozone generating lamp (paragraph

generating lamp 5-14).

Ozone Leak Detected. 1. Leakage from Chamber 1a. Verify silicone seal on window is not damaged.
Ozone Cycle Aborted.** due to faulty Verify seal does not become deformed (folded)
seal/insulation or mal- when window is closed. Repair or replace
functioning water drain window (paragraph 5-9).
ball valve; Ozone Sensor
is triggered

1b. Verify Microtome diaphragms are in good

condition. Replace diaphragms as necessary
(paragraph 5-15-2). NOTE: If the rear
diaphragm is damaged, there may be frost
buildup between the diaphragms.

1c. Observe ball valve operation by looking

directly into drain opening. As the ball valve
operates, the drain opening will become
smaller, and will eventually close completely.
If the ball valve does not operate, or does not
close the drain opening completely, check the
following:

• Verify ball valve motor is firmly attached

to ball valve body bracket. Tighten
attaching hardware as necessary.

6-28 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


Table 6-4. NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE
Ozone Leak Detected. 1. Leakage from Chamber
Ozone Cycle Aborted.** due to faulty
(continued) seal/insulation or mal-
functioning water drain
ball valve; Ozone Sensor
is triggered (continued)
2. Ozone Sensor sensitivity 2. Verify sensitivity potentiometer is adjusted to
potentiometer misadjusted;
Ozone Sensor is triggered
3. 24VDC operating power 3a. Verify green LED D3 on Ozone Sensor PCB is
not present at Ozone
Sensor PCB; Ozone
Sensor is triggered
3b. If LED is not illuminated, verify 24VDC is
4. Defective Ozone Sensor or 4a. Verify yellow LED D1 on Ozone Sensor PCB
Ozone Sensor PCB;
excessive concentration of
ozone in plumbing or
chamber; Ozone Sensor is
triggered
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
REMEDY
• Check condition of relay K1 in optional
Power Box. With the relay de-energized,
check for continuity between relay
positions 1 and 5. Verify relay is firmly
seated in its socket. Verify relay is
operational (relay should "click" each time
a command to the ball valve is given.
Replace relay K1 as necessary.
• If relay is operational, verify 115VAC
voltage is present between relay K1
position 5 and Neutral at terminal block
TB7. Check for open fuse F5; replace
fuse as necessary.
• Verify motor winding resistance measured
between positions 1 and 4 or 2 and 4
(depending on current motor position) is
approximately 7 ohms (for 115VAC ball
valves) or 30 ohms (for 230VAC ball
valves). Repair or replace ball valve as
necessary.
• Verify ball valve is operational by
connecting a 9V battery across relay K1
positions 7 (+) and 8 (-). If ball valve
operates, replace relay control cable and/or
Main Controller PCB as necessary.
45% (for ozone concentration of 0.2ppm);
adjust potentiometer as necessary.
illuminated (indicating presence of 24VDC
operating power).
present at TB3 + and – positions. If 24VDC is
not present at TB3, check condition of fuse on
optional 24VDC power supply; replace as
necessary.
is illuminated (indicating the Ozone Sensor is
triggered). Adjust Ozone Sensor sensitivity
potentiometer clockwise toward 100%; verify
LED extinguishes as sensitivity adjustment is
increased.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-29
TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-4. NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Ozone Leak Detected. 4. Defective Ozone Sensor or WARNING: ENSURE WORK AREA IS
Ozone Cycle Aborted.** Ozone Sensor PCB; ADEQUATELY VENTILATED BEFORE
(continued) excessive concentration of PROCEEDING. HIGH CONCENTRATIONS
ozone in plumbing or OF OZONE MAY BE PRESENT IN
chamber; Ozone Sensor is PLUMBING OR CABINET.
triggered (continued)

4b. If LED D1 does not extinguish, remove front

cover to gain access to Ozone Sensor
(paragraph 5-5-3). Remove Ozone Sensor head
from system plumbing. Allow sensor to rest in
ambient air for several minutes, and observe
yellow LED D1.

• If LED D1 extinguishes; it indicates there

may be high concentrations of ozone in
plumbing or chamber.

• If LED D1 does not extinguish; verify there

is not a significant saturation of ozone in
the ambient atmosphere.

• If ambient atmosphere is free of significant

concentration of ozone, Ozone Sensor or
Ozone Sensor PCB are defective. Replace
Ozone Sensor and Ozone Sensor PCB as
necessary.

WARNING: IT MAY TAKE UP TO NINE

HOURS FOR OZONE CONCENTRATIONS
OF 1000PPM TO DECAY TO 4PPM. IF AN
OZONE PURGE CYCLE CANNOT BE
INITIATED, BE SURE TO ALLOW
SUFFICIENT TIME FOR OZONE TO DECAY
PRIOR TO PROCEEDING.

4c. Open the chamber window by accessing the

window locking blade through the Top Power
Box .

IMPORTANT: Normal operation of the unit can

continue, but Disinfection will be unavailable.
Perform a thorough inspection of the unit to verify
no leaks are present before attempting to initiate a
disinfection cycle.

6-30 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 SERVICE

Table 6-4. NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Chamber Pressure Sensor 1. Chamber Pressure Switch 1. Verify position of Chamber Pressure Switch
Failure. Ozone Cycle is stuck in closed position PT2 at Signal Breakout PCB positions 20 and
Aborted.** 21 (Pressure Switch must be open before the
start of a Disinfection cycle, and remain closed
during the cycle); replace Chamber Pressure
Switch as necessary (5-17-5

2. Drain pipe obstructed 2. Verify the end of the drain pipe inside the
waste bottle is open to atmosphere; clear drain
pipe as needed.

Purge Pressure Sensor 1. Pump Pressure Switch is 1. Verify position of Pump Pressure Switch PT3
Failure. Ozone Cycle stuck in closed position at Signal Breakout PCB positions 23 and 24
Aborted.** (Pressure Switch must be open before the start
of a Disinfection cycle, and remain closed
whenever the Vacuum Pump is turned on);
replace Pump Pressure Switch as necessary
(paragraph 5-17-6).

Vacuum Pump Failure. 1. Pump Pressure Switch is 1. Verify position of Pump Pressure Switch PT3
Ozone Cycle Aborted.** stuck in open position at Signal Breakout PCB positions 23 and 24
(Pressure Switch must be open before the start
of a Disinfection cycle, and remain closed
whenever the Vacuum Pump is turned on);
replace Pump Pressure Switch as necessary
(paragraph 5-17-6).

2. Vacuum Pump not 2a. Verify red LED on SSR #4 on OPTO22

operating backplane is ON when Vacuum Pump is
commanded on. Verify 115VAC voltage is
present between OPTO22 backplane positions
7 and 8 and Neutral at Terminal Block TB7.
Replace SSR #4 fuse or SSR #4 as necessary.

2b. Verify resistance between Vacuum Pump

connector J77 positions 1 and 2 is
approximately 5.5 ohms). Verify Vacuum
Pump is operational by connecting J77 directly
to a 155VAC outlet. Replace Vacuum Pump as
necessary.

2c. Verify connections to J3 and J4 of Pump Speed

Controller PCB (located in Optional Power
Box) are secure. Replace Pump Speed
Controller PCB as necessary.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-31

TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-4. NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Vacuum Pump Failure. 3. Catalyst Valve and/or
Ozone Cycle Aborted.** Pump Return Valve closed
(continued) during Vacuum Pump
check
3a. Verify red LED on SSR #8 on OPTO22
backplane is ON. Verify 24VDC voltage is
present between OPTO22 backplane positions
15 and 16 and Terminal Block TB21 (PS4
24VDC Return). Replace SSR #8 fuse or SSR
#8 as necessary.

3b. Verify red LED on SSR #15 on OPTO22

backplane is ON. Verify 24VDC voltage is
present between OPTO22 backplane positions
29 and 30 and Terminal Block TB21 (PS4
24VDC Return). Replace SSR #15 fuse or SSR
#15 as necessary.

3c. Verify green LED on optional 24VDC Power

Supply (inside Optional Power Box) is
illuminated. Replace Power Supply fuse or
Power Supply as necessary.

3d. Verify coil resistance at connector J109 of

approximately 65 ohms; replace Catalyst Valve
V8 as necessary (paragraph 5-17-11).

3e. Verify coil resistance at connector J111 of

approximately 65 ohms; replace Pump Return
Valve V6 as necessary (paragraph 5-17-9).

Water Drain Interlock 1. Malfunctioning water 1. Observe ball valve operation by looking
Failure. Ozone Cycle drain ball valve or directly into drain opening. As the ball valve
Aborted.** associated component operates, the drain opening will become
smaller, and will eventually close completely.
If the ball valve does not operate, or does not
close the drain opening completely, check the
following:

• Verify ball valve motor is firmly attached

to ball valve body bracket. Tighten
attaching hardware as necessary.

• Check condition of relay K1 in optional

Power Box. With the relay de-energized,
check for continuity between relay
positions 1 and 5. Verify relay is firmly
seated in its socket. Verify relay is
operational (relay should "click" each time
a command to the ball valve is given.
Replace relay K1 as necessary.

6-32 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 SERVICE

Table 6-4. NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY
Water Drain Interlock 1. Malfunctioning water • If relay is operational, verify 115VAC
Failure. Ozone Cycle drain ball valve or voltage is present between relay K1
Aborted.** (continued) associated component position 5 and Neutral at terminal block
(continued) TB7. Check for open fuse F5; replace
fuse as necessary.
• Verify motor winding resistance measured
between positions 1 and 4 or 2 and 4
(depending on current motor position) is
approximately 7 ohms (for 115VAC ball
valves) or 30 ohms (for 230VAC ball
valves). Repair or replace ball valve as
necessary.
• Verify ball valve is operational by
connecting a 9V battery across relay K1
positions 7 (+) and 8 (-). If ball valve
operates, replace relay control cable and/or
Main Controller PCB as necessary.
2. Water Drain Ball Valve 2a. Verify connector J100 at Digital Breakout PCB
position switch not positions 17 and 18 is attached securely.
actuated
2b. Actuate Water Drain Ball Valve and monitor
status of position switch at connector J99;
verify switch contact opens and closes
appropriately as valve is operated.
2c. Verify switch is mounted securely inside ball
valve; repair or replace ball valve as necessary.
Window Interlock 1. Window switch not 1a. Verify cable connections between window
Failure. Ozone Cycle actuating properly switch and Digital Signal Breakout PCB
Aborted.** positions 2 and 3 are secure.
1b. Verify window switch is properly mounted and
secure, allowing proper mechanical actuation
of the switch. With the window closed, verify
the window switch mechanical actuator is
unactuated. With the window open, verify the
window switch mechanical actuator is actuated;
repair or replace window switch as necessary.
Window Lock Interlock 1. Window lock position 1. Verify lock position switch is properly mounted
Failure. Ozone Cycle switch not actuating and secure, allowing proper mechanical actuation
Aborted.** properly of the switch. With the window locked, verify the
lock position switch mechanical actuator is
actuated. With the window unlocked, verify the
lock position switch mechanical actuator is
unactuated; repair or replace window switch as
necessary.

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-33

TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-4. NON-CRITICAL WARNINGS

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Ozone Sensor Interlock 1. Ozone Sensor is triggered 1a. Verify yellow LED D1 on Ozone Sensor PCB
Failure. Ozone Cycle before beginning of a is illuminated (indicating the Ozone Sensor is
Aborted.** Disinfection cycle triggered). Adjust Ozone Sensor sensitivity
potentiometer clockwise toward 100%; verify
LED extinguishes as sensitivity adjustment is
increased.

WARNING: ENSURE WORK AREA IS

ADEQUATELY VENTILATED BEFORE
PROCEEDING. HIGH CONCENTRATIONS
OF OZONE MAY BE PRESENT IN
PLUMBING OR CABINET.

1b. If LED D1 does not extinguish, remove front

cover to gain access to Ozone Sensor
(paragraph 5-5-3). Remove Ozone Sensor head
from system plumbing. Allow sensor to rest in
ambient air for several minutes, and observe
yellow LED D1.

• If LED D1 extinguishes; it indicates there

may be high concentrations of ozone in
plumbing or chamber.

• If LED D1 does not extinguish; verify there

is not a significant saturation of ozone in
the ambient atmosphere.

Ozone Sensor Interlock 1. Ozone Sensor is triggered
Failure. Ozone Cycle before beginning of a
Aborted.** (continued) Disinfection cycle
(continued)
• If ambient atmosphere is free of significant
concentration of ozone, Ozone Sensor or
Ozone Sensor PCB are defective. Replace
Ozone Sensor and Ozone Sensor PCB as
necessary.

Real Time Clock Data 1. Low battery BT1 on Main 1. Replace battery.
Invalid Controller PCB

*Models 5753, 5802 and 5805 only

** Models 5752, 5801, 5802, 5804 and 5805 only

6-34 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


Table 6-5. CRITICAL ERRORS
PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE
An Internal Error 1. Defective Main Controller
Occurred In: File____ PCB
Line____
Microtome Horizontal 1. Forward (OPTO1) and
Limit Failure Reverse (OPTO2)
horizontal limit switches
triggered simultaneously
Microtome Horizontal 1. 34-position ribbon cable to
Motor Failure Horizontal Stepper Driver
Motor loose or
disconnected
2. No 24VDC power to
Horizontal Stepper Driver
Motor
3. Horizontal Motor is
jammed
Microtome Horizontal 1. Horizontal Driver
Driver Failure overtemperature condition
(Horizontal Driver
returned an error message
to the Controller)
Ozone Purge Failure 1. Ozone Sensor still
triggered after regular
10-minute purge cycle and
three 5-minute purge
cycles
REV 11JUN09
SERVICE
REMEDY
1. Replace Main Controller PCB.
NOTE: Random noise from the environment or tran-
sient errors on the Main Controller PCB may cause
this error to appear intermittently. Do not replace the
Main Controller PCB unless this error persists.
1a. Verify wiring between OPTO sensors and
Microtome Interface PCB is secure.
1b. Verify the red LED on each OPTO sensor
(visible from the back side of the Microtome)
is illuminated; replace OPTO sensors as
necessary.
1. Verify ribbon cable is seated properly on Main
Controller PCB J10 and Stepper Motor Driver
inside Main Control Box.
2a. Verify 24VDC power at Stepper Driver
positions 3 and 4.
2b. Verify green LED on 24VDC power supply
PS3 is ON.
2c. Check 24VDC power supply PS3 for open
fuse; replace as necessary.
2d. Repair or replace 24VDC power supply.
3. With instrument power OFF, verify Horizontal
Motor shaft can be rotated by hand; replace
Horizontal Motor as necessary.
1. Verify motor current setting resistor (1K ohm)
between terminals 2 and 3 on stepper driver is
securely installed and in good condition; repair
or replace as necessary.
1a. Verify yellow LED D1 on Ozone Sensor PCB is
illuminated (indicating the Ozone Sensor is trig-
gered). Adjust Ozone Sensor sensitivity potenti-
ometer clockwise toward 100%; verify LED ex-
tinguishes as sensitivity adjustment is increased.
WARNING: ENSURE WORK AREA IS
ADEQUATELY VENTILATED BEFORE
PROCEEDING. HIGH CONCENTRATIONS
OF OZONE MAY BE PRESENT IN
PLUMBING OR CABINET.
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 6-35
TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-5. CRITICAL ERRORS

PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE REMEDY

Ozone Purge Failure 1. Ozone Sensor still 1b. If LED D1 does not extinguish, remove front
(continued) triggered after regular cover to gain access to Ozone Sensor (paragraph
10-minute purge cycle and 5-5-3). Remove Ozone Sensor head from system
three 5-minute purge plumbing. Allow sensor to rest in ambient air for
cycles (continued) several minutes, and observe yellow LED D1.

• If LED D1 extinguishes; it indicates there

may be high concentrations of ozone in
plumbing or chamber.

• If LED D1 does not extinguish; verify there

is not a significant saturation of ozone in
the ambient atmosphere.

• If ambient atmosphere is free of significant

concentration of ozone, Ozone Sensor or
Ozone Sensor PCB are defective. Replace
Ozone Sensor and/or Ozone Sensor PCB as
necessary.

WARNING: IT MAY TAKE UP TO NINE

HOURS FOR OZONE CONCENTRATIONS
OF 1000PPM TO DECAY TO 4PPM. IF AN
OZONE PURGE CYCLE CANNOT BE
INITIATED, BE SURE TO ALLOW
SUFFICIENT TIME FOR OZONE TO DECAY
PRIOR TO PROCEEDING.

1c. Open the chamber window by accessing the

window locking blade through the Top Power
Box.

IMPORTANT: Normal operation of the unit can

continue, but Disinfection will be unavailable.
Perform a thorough inspection of the unit to verify
no leaks are present before attempting to initiate a
disinfection cycle.

Real Time Clock Failure 1. Real Time Clock not 1. Replace Main Controller PCB.
generating 1KHz timer
clock used to run the RTOS

Real Time Clock Not 1. Real Time Clock did not 1. Replace Main Controller PCB.
Responding respond to four successive
attempts to retrieve user-
stored parameters

*Models 5753, 5802 and 5805 only

** Models 5752, 5801, 5802, 5804 and 5805 only

6-36 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09


SECTION 7
ILLUSTRATED PARTS
BREAKDOWN
7-1 GENERAL
The Illustrated Parts Breakdown (IPB) is intended
for use in the identification and ordering of
replaceable parts and assemblies for the Cryo3. The
IPB contains all parts information for which
maintenance coverage has been provided in this
manual.
7-2 HOW TO USE THE IPB
1. Locate the desired part on the appropriate
illustration and note the item number of the part.
2. Locate the item number in the FIG & INDEX
NUMBER column of the associated parts list to
obtain the part number and complete description.
3. Order parts by part number and complete
nomenclature directly from Sakura Finetek. In
the United States, replacement parts may be
ordered directly from:
ORDER SERVICES
Sakura Finetek U.S.A., Inc.
1750 W. 214th Street
Torrance, CA 90501
Outside of the United States, contact the nearest
authorized Sakura instrument distributor.
IMPORTANT
Items for which no part number is provided ARE NOT procurable individually as
replacement parts. These items are available ONLY as part of the next higher assembly for
which a part number is provided.
REV 11JUN09
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
7-3 ILLUSTRATED PARTS LISTS
Illustrated Parts Lists contained in this section are
listed in Table 7-1.
NOTE: As an aid in identifying effectivity of parts
lists, figure titles in this section are appended with a
designator identifying the specific model(s) to which
the figure and associated parts list apply; BASIC, D
or DM.
7-3-2 Recommended Spare Parts List
A list of recommended spare parts is provided in
Table 7-2. This table includes consumable items,
fragile or sensitive items, parts and components that
are subject to wear during normal instrument
operation, and items that are considered critical for
instrument operation. To aid in maintaining the
instrument in serviceable condition, and to minimize
“down time” in the event of instrument malfunction,
it is recommended that the items listed be
maintained “on hand”.
The table includes the product code and description
for each item, as well as a cross-reference to the
item’s location in the Illustrated Parts Breakdown
(where applicable).
CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-1
ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Table 7-1. ILLUSTRATED PARTS LISTS

FIGURE TITLE PAGE
Figure 7-1 Model 5800 Cryo3 Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – BASIC 7-6
Figure 7-2 Model 5801 Cryo3 Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – D Model 7-8
Figure 7-3 Model 5802 Cryo3 Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – DM Model 7-10
Figure 7-4 Post-Weldment Assembly, Main Frame – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-12
Figure 7-5 Hand Wheel Crank Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-14
Figure 7-6 Bearing Adaptor Assembly, Handwheel – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-15
Figure 7-7 Bearing & Flange Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-16
Figure 7-8 Tub Refrigeration & Brazing Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-18
Figure 7-9 Tub Heater Harness & Installation Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-20
Figure 7-10 Heat Extractor Holder Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-22
Figure 7-11 Knife Holder Assembly, Cryo3 – BASIC 7-23
Figure 7-12 Knife Holder Assembly, Cryo3 – D and DM Models 7-23
Figure 7-13 Knife Holder Assembly – BASIC 7-24
Figure 7-14 Knife Holder Assembly – D and DM Models 7-26
Figure 7-15 Crank Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-28
Figure 7-16 Ultraviolet Light Assembly – D and DM Models 7-28
0 Microtome Assembly, Semi-Automatic – BASIC and D Model 7-29
Figure 7-18 Microtome Assembly, Fully Automatic – DM Model 7-29
Figure 7-19 Ozone Destruct Assembly – D and DM Models 7-30
Figure 7-20 Pipes & Valves Installation – D and DM Models 7-31
Figure 7-21 Catalyst Filter Assembly – D and DM Models 7-32
Figure 7-22 Drain Valve Assembly, Water (J99,J104) – D and DM Models 7-33
Figure 7-23 Isolation Valve Assembly, O3 Sensor (J153,155) – D and DM Models 7-34
Figure 7-24 Refrigeration Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-35
Figure 7-25 Brazing/Pressure Check, Refrigeration Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-36
Figure 7-26 Main Power Box Assembly – BASIC 7-37
Figure 7-27 Main Power Box Assembly – D Model 7-39
Figure 7-28 Main Power Box Assembly – DM Model 7-42
Figure 7-29 OPTO-22 Assembly – BASIC 7-45
Figure 7-30 OPTO-22 Assembly – D and DM Models 7-45
Figure 7-31 Power Entry Module Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-46
Figure 7-32 Option Power Box Assembly – D Model 7-47
Figure 7-33 Option Power Box Assembly – DM Model 7-49
Figure 7-34 Cover Assembly, Power Box – D and DM Models 7-51
Figure 7-35 Top Power Box Assembly – BASIC 7-52
Figure 7-36 Top Power Box Assembly – D and DM Models 7-54
Figure 7-37 Window Lock Assembly – D and DM Models 7-56
Figure 7-38 Top Cover Assembly – BASIC 7-58
Figure 7-39 Top Cover Assembly – D Model 7-60
Figure 7-40 Top Cover Assembly – DM Model 7-62
Figure 7-41 Refrigeration Assembly Installation – Basic, D and DM Models 7-64
Figure 7-42 Ozone Destruct Assembly Installation – D and DM Models 7-65
Figure 7-43 Power Box/Option Box Assembly Installation – D and DM Models 7-66
Figure 7-44 Foamed Tub Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-67
Figure 7-45 Top Power Box Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-68
Figure 7-46 Top Cover Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-69
Figure 7-47 Brazing & Pressure Check, Tub & Refrigeration – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-70
Figure 7-48 Evacuation, Freon Charging, Sniffer Check & Insulation – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-72
Figure 7-49 Microtome Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-74
Figure 7-50 3D Chuck & Rake Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-76
Figure 7-51 Anti-Roll Plate & Knife Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-78

7-2 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Table 7-1. ILLUSTRATED PARTS LISTS

FIGURE TITLE PAGE
Figure 7-52 Ultraviolet Lamp Assembly Installation – D and DM Models 7-79
Figure 7-53 Cryo3+TEC Assembly & Insert Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-79
Figure 7-54 Window Track Extender & Suppressor Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-80
Figure 7-55 Window Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-81
Figure 7-56 Hand Wheel Assembly Installation & Balancing – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-82
Figure 7-57 Water Drain Valve Installation –D and DM Models 7-83
Figure 7-58 Isolation Valve Installation – D and DM Models 7-84
Figure 7-59 Pipes, Hoses & Switch Installation – D and DM Models 7-85
Figure 7-60 Harness Connector & Ribbon Cables Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-86
Figure 7-61 EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming – BASIC 7-88
Figure 7-62 EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming – D Model 7-89
Figure 7-63 EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming – DM Model 7-90
Figure 7-64 Panels & Covers Installation – BASIC 7-91
Figure 7-65 Panels & Covers Installation – D and DM Models 7-94
Figure 7-66 Front Cover Assembly, Frame – BASIC, D and DM Models 7-97

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-3

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Table 7-2. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST

IPB LOCATION
PRODUCT CODE DESCRIPTION
(FIG. & ITEM NO.)
0000118-02 Rubber Seal, Tub-Microtome Figure 7-49-4
0000128-01 Fuse, 0.125A Figure 7-27-26; Figure 7-28-26
0000128-03 Fuse, 250 mA Figure 7-26-25; Figure 7-27-25;
Figure 7-28-25
0000128-05 Fuse, 3.15A Figure 7-27-24; Figure 7-28-24
0000174-01 Solid-state relay, 10A @ 240VAC Figure 7-26-5; Figure 7-27-5;
Figure 7-28-5
0000180-01 Solid-state relay, 3A @ 240VAC Figure 7-29-2; Figure 7-30-2
0000180-02 Solid-state relay, 3A @ 60VDC Figure 7-29-3; Figure 7-30-3
0000271-03 Microtome Figure 7-18-3
0000294-02 Knife Holder Assembly Figure 7-1-7
0000295-02 Knife Holder Assembly Figure 7-2-7; Figure 7-3-7
0000306-01 Filter Drier Figure 7-25-2;
0000356-01 Vacuum Filter Set ---
0000385-01 Specimen Holder, Small ---
0000385-02 Specimen Holder, Medium ---
0000385-03 Specimen Holder, Large ---
0000387-05 Center Membrane Panel Figure 7-39-8; Figure 7-40-8
0000387-06 Left Side Membrane Panel Figure 7-39-9; Figure 7-40-9
0000387-07 Right Side Membrane Panel Figure 7-40-10
0000470-02 Back Plate Figure 7-13-20; Figure 7-14-20
0000476-04 Clamp Plate Figure 7-13-15; Figure 7-14-16
0000533-01 UV Lamp ---
0000533-02 UV Lamp ---
0000646-02 Vacuum Sub-Pump Assembly Figure 7-20-28
0000776-01 Thermistor, Glass bead
0000921-01 Right Side Membrane Panel (blank) Figure 7-38-10; Figure 7-39-10
0000944-02 Anti-Roll Rake Assembly ---
0000963-04 LCD Figure 7-38-7; Figure 7-39-7;
Figure 7-40-7
0000964-04 Thermistor Probe, SST ---
0000979-03 Drain Ball Valve (115VAC) Figure 7-22-1
0001117-01 TEC ---
0001272-01 Valve, Thermostatic Expansion 0-1
0001395-01 Center Membrane Panel (w/o Ozone) Figure 7-38-8
0001396-01 Left Side Membrane Panel (w/o Vacuum) Figure 7-38-9
0001628-01 Ballast, Fluorescent Lamp ---
0001784-01 Connector, 7 pos plug, 7A/875VAC, 22AWG ---
0001785-01 Connector, 7 pos, recep, 7A/875VAC, 22AWG ---
0001786-01 Cable, Ferrite, Round, Snap-Its, 0.41 Dia. Max. ---
0001787-01 Cable, Ferrite, Flat, Snap-Its, 34 Pos. Max. Figure 7-60-1
0001789-01 Microtome 0-1

7-4 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Table 7-2. RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST

IPB LOCATION
PRODUCT CODE DESCRIPTION
(FIG. & ITEM NO.)
0001912-02 Ozone Port Stopper ---
0001912-03 Vacuum Port Stopper ---
0002115-01 FPLA GAL Programmed Figure 7-61-2
0003237-07 EEPROM Figure 7-61-1
0003238-07 EEPROM Figure 7-62-1
0003239-07 EEPROM Figure 7-63-1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-5

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-1
Model 5800 Cryo3 Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – BASIC

7-6 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-1. Model 5800 Cryo3 Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – BASIC Figure 7-1. Model 5800 Cryo3 Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – BASIC

FIGURE & PART QTY FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-1- 0001700-01 Model 5800 Cryo3® Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – BASIC REF 7-1-29 0002266-01 3D Chuck & Rake Installation (See Figure 7-50 for breakdown) 1
-1 0001454-01 Post-Weldment Assembly, Main Frame Cryo3 (See Figure 7-4 for 1 -30 0002267-01 Anti-Roll Plate & Knife Holder Installation (See Figure 7-51 for 1
breakdown) breakdown)
-2 0002230-01 Hand Wheel Crank Assembly (See Figure 7-5 for breakdown) 1 -31 0002216-01 Shield/Cap Installation 1
-3 0001642-01 Bearing Adaptor Assembly, Handwheel (See Figure 7-6 for 1 -32 0002269-01 Cryo3+TEC Assembly & Insert Installation 1
breakdown) -33 0002217-01 Heat Extractor Holder Installation 1
-4 0002231-01 Bearing & Flange Assembly (See Figure 7-7 for breakdown) 1 -34 0002272-01 Window Track Extender & Suppressor Installation (See Figure 7-54 1
-5 0004259-01 Tub, Foamed 1 for breakdown)
-6 0000331-01 Cryo3 Heat Extractor Holder Assembly (See Figure 7-10 for 1 -35 0002273-01 Window Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-55 for breakdown) 1
breakdown) -36 0002274-01 Hand Wheel Assembly Installation & Balancing (See Figure 7-56 1
-7 0000294-02 Knife Holder Assembly, Basic, Cryo3 (See Figure 7-11 for 1 for breakdown)
breakdown) -37 0002218-01 Pipes, Hoses & Plug Installation 1
-8 0002237-01 Microtome Assembly, Semi-Automatic W/Sign, B-O (See 1 -38 0002278-01 Harness Connector & Ribbon Cables Installation (See Figure 7-60 1
0 for breakdown) for breakdown)
-9 0001643-02 Refrigeration Assembly (See Figure 7-24 for breakdown) 1 -39 0002220-01 EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming (See Figure 7-61 for 1
-10 0004282-01 Main Power Box/Option Box Assembly, Basic 1 breakdown)
-11 0001721-01 Top Power Box Assembly (See Figure 7-35 for breakdown) 1 -40 0002528-01 Panels & Covers Installation, Basic (See Figure 7-64 for breakdown) 1
-12 0000654-01 Top Cover Assembly, Basic (See Figure 7-38 for breakdown) 1 -41 0002290-04 Label Installation, Basic 1
-13 0001104-02 Window Assembly 1 -42 0001791-02 Harness Assembly, Cryo+ Connector 1
-14 0000653-01 Front Cover Frame Assembly 1
-15 0000990-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J3 to Analog Breakout PCB 1
-16 0000991-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J4 to Signal Breakout PCB 1
-17 0000992-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J5 to Microtome Breakout PCB 1
-18 0000993-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J6 to User I/F Center PCB 1
-19 0000994-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J7-OPTO22 Backplane 1
-20 0000995-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J8 to Horizontal Driver 1
-21 0002258-01 Refrigeration Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-41 for 1
breakdown)
-22 0002223-01 Harness Assembly Installation, Power Box, Basic 1
-23 0002260-01 Foamed Tub Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-44 for breakdown) 1
-24 0002261-01 Top Power Box Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-45 for
breakdown)
-25 0002262-01 Top Cover Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-46 for breakdown) 1
-26 0002263-01 Brazing & Pressure Check, Tub & Refrigeration (See Figure 7-47 1
for breakdown)
-27 0002264-01 Evacuation, Freon Charging, Sniffer Check & Insulation (See Figure 1
7-48 for breakdown)
-28 0002265-01 Microtome Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-49 for breakdown) 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-7

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-2
Model 5801 Cryo3 Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – D Model

7-8 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-2. Model 5801 Cryo3 Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – D Model Figure 7-2. Model 5801 Cryo3 Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – D Model

FIGURE & PART QTY FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-2- 0001701-01 Model 5801 Cryo3® Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – D Model REF 7-2-31 0002262-01 Top Cover Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-46 for breakdown) 1
-1 0001454-01 Post-Weldment Assembly, Main Frame (See Figure 7-4 for 1 -32 0002263-01 Brazing & Pressure Check, Tub & Refrigeration (See Figure 7-47 1
breakdown) for breakdown)
-2 0002230-01 Hand Wheel Crank Assembly (See Figure 7-5 for breakdown) 1 -33 0002264-01 Evacuation, Freon Charging, Sniffer Check & Insulation (See Figure 1
-3 0001642-01 Bearing Adaptor Assembly, Handwheel (See Figure 7-6 for 1 7-48 for breakdown)
breakdown) -34 0002265-01 Microtome Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-49 for breakdown) 1
-4 0002231-01 Bearing & Flange Assembly (See Figure 7-7 for breakdown) 1 -35 0002266-01 3D Chuck & Rake Installation (See Figure 7-50 for breakdown) 1
-5 0004259-01 Foamed Tub Assembly 1 -36 0002267-01 Anti-Roll Plate & Knife Holder Installation (See Figure 7-51 for 1
-6 0000331-01 Heat Extractor Holder Assembly (See Figure 7-10 for breakdown) 1 breakdown)

-7 0000295-02 Knife Holder Assembly, Cryo3 (See Figure 7-12 for breakdown) 1 -37 0002268-01 Ultraviolet Lamp Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-52 for 1
breakdown)
-8 0000296-01 Ultraviolet Light Assembly (See Figure 7-16 for breakdown) 1
-38 0002269-01 Cryo3+TEC Assembly & Insert Installation 1
-9 0002237-01 Microtome Assembly, Semi-Automatic, W/Sign, B-O (See 1
0 for breakdown), -39 0002270-01 Heat Extractor Holder Installation 1

-10 0000645-01 Ozone Destruct Assembly (See Figure 7-19 for breakdown) 1 -40 0002272-01 Window Track Extender & Suppressor Installation (See Figure 7-54 1
for breakdown)
-11 0001095-01 Drain Valve Mod Assembly, Water, (J99,J104) (See Figure 7-22 for 1
breakdown) -41 0002273-01 Window Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-55 for breakdown) 1

-12 0001456-01 Isolation Valve Assembly, O3 Sensor (J153,155) (See Figure 7-23 1 -42 0002274-01 Hand Wheel Assembly Installation & Balancing (See Figure 7-56 1
for breakdown) for breakdown)

-13 0001643-02 Refrigeration Assembly (See Figure 7-24 for breakdown) 1 -43 0002275-01 Water Drain Valve Installation (See Figure 7-57 for breakdown) 1

-14 0004280-01 Main Power Box/Option Box Assembly, Ozone 1 -44 0002276-01 Isolation Valve Installation (See Figure 7-58 for breakdown) 1

-15 0002257-01 Cover Assembly, Power Box, Options (See Figure 7-34 for breakdown) 1 -45 0002277-01 Pipes, Hoses & Switch Installation (See Figure 7-59 for breakdown) 1

-16 0001721-02 Top Power Box Assembly, Full Option (See Figure 7-36 for 1 -46 0002278-01 Harness Connector & Ribbon Cables Installation (See Figure 7-60 1
breakdown) for breakdown)

-17 0001797-01 Top Cover Assembly, Ozone (See Figure 7-39 for breakdown) 1 -47 0002220-02 EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming (See Figure 7-62 for 1
breakdown)
-18 0001104-02 Window Assembly 1
-48 0002281-01 Panels & Covers Installation D/DM Models (See Figure 7-65 for 1
-20 0000990-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J3 to Analog Breakout PCB 1 breakdown)
-21 0000991-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J4 to Signal Breakout PCB 1 -49 0002290-05 Label Installation 1
-22 0000992-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J5 to Microtome Breakout PCB 1 -50 0001791-02 Harness Assembly, Cryo+ Connector 1
-23 0000993-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J6 to User I/F Center PCB 1 -51 0002271-01 Vacuum Hose Mounting Installation 1
-24 0000994-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J7-OPTO22 Backplane 1
-25 0000995-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J8 to Horizontal Driver 1
-26 0002258-01 Refrigeration Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-41 for breakdown) 1
-27 0002259-01 Ozone Destruct Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-42 for breakdown) 1
-28 0002252-01 Power Box/Option Box Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-43 for 1
breakdown)
-29 0002260-01 Foamed Tub Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-44 for breakdown) 1
-30 0002261-01 Top Power Box Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-45 for breakdown) 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-9

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-3
Model 5802 Cryo3 Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – DM Model

7-10 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-3. Model 5802 Cryo3 Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – DM Model Figure 7-3. Model 5802 Cryo3 Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – DM Model

FIGURE & PART QTY FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-3- 0001702-01 Model 5802 Cryo3® Microtome/Cryostat Assembly – DM Model REF 7-3-32 0002262-01 Top Cover Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-46 for breakdown) 1
-1 0001454-01 Post-Weldment Assembly, Main Frame (See Figure 7-4 for 1 -33 0002263-01 Brazing & Pressure Check, Tub & Refrigeration (See Figure 7-47 1
breakdown) for breakdown)
-2 0002230-01 Hand Wheel Crank Assembly (See Figure 7-5 for breakdown) 1 -34 0002264-01 Evacuation, Freon Charging, Sniffer Check & Insulation (See Figure 1
7-48 for breakdown)
-3 0001642-01 Bearing Adaptor Assembly, Handwheel (See Figure 7-6 for 1
breakdown) -35 0002265-01 Microtome Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-49 for breakdown) 1
-4 0002231-01 Bearing & Flange Assembly (See Figure 7-7 for breakdown) 1 -36 0002266-01 3D Chuck & Rake Installation (See Figure 7-50 for breakdown) 1
-5 0004259-01 Foamed Tub Assembly 1 -37 0002267-01 Anti-Roll Plate & Knife Holder Installation (See Figure 7-51 for 1
breakdown)
-6 0000331-01 Heat Extractor Holder Assembly (See Figure 7-10 for breakdown) 1
-38 0002268-01 Ultraviolet Lamp Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-52 for 1
-7 0000295-02 Knife Holder Assembly, Cryo3 (See Figure 7-12 for breakdown) 1 breakdown)
-8 0000296-01 Ultraviolet Light Assembly (See Figure 7-16 for breakdown) 1 -39 0002269-01 Cryo3+TEC Assembly & Insert Installation 1
-9 0003151-02 Microtome Assembly, Fully Automatic W/Sig B-O (See Figure 7-18 1 -40 0002270-01 Heat Extractor Holder Installation 1
for breakdown)
-41 0002271-01 Vacuum Hose Mounting Installation 1
-10 0000645-01 Ozone Destruct Assembly (See Figure 7-19 for breakdown) 1
-42 0002272-01 Window Track Extender & Suppressor Installation (See Figure 7-54 1
-11 0001095-01 Drain Valve Mod Assembly, Water, (J99,J104) (See Figure 7-22 for 1 for breakdown)
breakdown)
-43 0002273-01 Window Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-55 for breakdown) 1
-12 0001456-01 Isolation Valve Assembly, O3 Sensor (J153,155) (See Figure 7-23 1
-44 0002274-01 Hand Wheel Assembly Installation & Balancing (See Figure 7-56 1
for breakdown)
for breakdown)
-13 0001643-02 Refrigeration Assembly (See Figure 7-24 for breakdown) 1 -45 0002275-01 Water Drain Valve Installation (See Figure 7-57 for breakdown) 1
-14 0004281-01 Main Power Box/Option Box Assembly DM 1 -46 0002276-01 Isolation Valve Installation (See Figure 7-58 for breakdown) 1
-15 0002257-01 Cover Assembly, Power Box, Options (See Figure 7-34 for breakdown) 1 -47 0002277-01 Pipes, Hoses & Switch Installation (See Figure 7-59 for breakdown) 1
-16 0001721-02 Top Power Box Assembly, Full Option (See Figure 7-36 for 1 -48 0002278-01 Harness Connector & Ribbon Cables Installation (See Figure 7-60 1
breakdown) for breakdown)
-17 0001798-01 Top Cover Assembly, Ozone, Motorized (See Figure 7-40 for 1 -49 0002220-03 EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming (See Figure 7-63 for 1
breakdown) breakdown)
-18 0001104-02 Window Assembly 1 -50 0002281-01 Panels & Covers Installation D/Dm Models (See Figure 7-65 for 1
-20 0000990-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J3 to Analog Breakout PCB 1 breakdown)
-21 0000991-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J4 to Signal Breakout PCB 1 -51 0002290-06 Label Installation 1
-22 0000992-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J5 to Microtome Breakout PCB 1 -52 0001791-02 Harness Assembly, Cryo+ Connector 1
-23 0000993-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J6 to User I/F Center PCB 1
-24 0000994-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J7-OPTO22 Backplane 1
-25 0000995-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J8 to Horizontal Driver 1
-26 0000996-01 Harness Assembly, Controller J9 to Vertical Driver 1
-27 0002258-01 Refrigeration Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-41 for breakdown) 1
-28 0002259-01 Ozone Destruct Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-42 for breakdown) 1
-29 0002252-01 Power Box/Option Box Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-43 for 1
breakdown)
-30 0002260-01 Foamed Tub Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-44 for breakdown) 1
-31 0002261-01 Top Power Box Assembly Installation (See Figure 7-45 for breakdown) 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-11

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-4
Post-Weldment Assembly, Main Frame – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-12 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-4. Post-Weldment Assembly, Main Frame – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-4- 0001454-01 Post-Weldment Assembly, Main Frame – BASIC, D and DM REF
Models (See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000632-02 Weldment Assembly, Cryo3 Main Frame 1
-2 0000667-01 Caster, Swivel 2
-3 0000668-01 Caster, Rigid 2
-4 0000655-05 Washer, Flat 16
-5 0000499-06 Washer, Lock 16
-6 0000793-03 Nut, Hex 16
-7 0000626-03 Hinge, Continuous, Power Box 1
-7 0000626-04 Hinge, Continuous, Power Box 1
-8 0001153-05 Nut, Keps, with Washer 10
-9 0000671-04 Bolt, Steel, Leveling Mount 2
-10 0001177-01 Signal Breakout Assembly, PWA 2
-11 0001317-02 Conduit, Electrical 1
-12 0001269-01 Tape, Double-Sided 4
-13 0001270-03 Standoff, Hex 8
-14 0001226-01 Nut, Hex 8
-15 0001327-03 Bracket, Mounting, Window Return Spring 1
-16 0001329-01 Mandrel, Window Return Spring 2
-17 0001326-01 Spring, Constant-Force 1
-18 0001330-01 Washer, Flat 1
-19 0000792-03 Washer, Helical Lock 1
-20 0001331-01 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 1
-21 0000788-01 Nut, with Conical Washer 2
-22 0001153-12 Nut, Keps, with Washer 1
-23 0000671-03 Leveling Foot, Rubber Base 1
-24 0000541-02 Mount, Vibration Control 4
-25 0003240-01 Label, Earth Ground 1
-26 0002200-01 Label, Paper, Self-Adhesive (S/N Identifier) 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-13

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-5. Hand Wheel Crank Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-5- 0002230-01 Hand Wheel Crank Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models (See REF
Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000506-05 Handwheel 1
-2 95000282 Grease AR
-3 0000750-02 Finger Knob, Handwheel Lock 1
-4 0001321-02 Spring, Extension 1
-5 0000507-01 Handle, Fold-Away 1
-6 0000749-02 Lever, Handwheel Lock 1
-7 0001142-02 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 1
-8 0000793-08 Nut, Hex 1
-9 0000469-05 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 1
-10 820199-0054 Spring, Wave Disc 3
-11 0000521-02 Screw, Shoulder, Socket Head 1
-12 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR

Figure 7-5
Hand Wheel Crank Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-14 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-6. Bearing Adaptor Assembly, Handwheel – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-6- 0001642-01 Bearing Adaptor Assembly, Handwheel – BASIC, D and DM REF
Models (See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0001318-04 Retaining Ring, External 2
-2 0001121-02 Bushing, Thrust 1
-3 0000512-03 Shaft, Handwheel 1
-4 0000673-03 Bearing, Needle Roller, Open 1
-5 0000516-03 Bearing Adapter, Handwheel 1
-6 0000523-02 Bearing, Ball 1
-7 0000515-02 Pulley, Timing, Double Flange 1
-8 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR
-9 0000514-05 Brace, Mounting, Handwheel 1
-10 0000489-04 Screw, Socket Head Cap 4
-11 0000792-03 Washer, Helical Lock 4
-12 0001162-01 Screw, Pan Head, Slotted 2
-13 0001441-01 Photo Sensor 1
-14 0001959-02 Nut, Hex, Thin 1
-15 0000440-03 Bearing, with Flange 1
-16 0000521-04 Screw, Shoulder, Socket Head 1
-17 0000498-09 Washer, Flat 1
-18 0001958-06 Nut, Square 1

Figure 7-6
Bearing Adaptor Assembly, Handwheel – BASIC, D and DM Models

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-15

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-7
Bearing & Flange Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-16 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-7. Bearing & Flange Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-7- 0002231-01 Bearing & Flange Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models (See REF
Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000517-01 Bearing, Flanged 2
-2 0000515-02 Pulley, Timing, Double Flange 1
-3 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR
-4 0001260-03 Bearing Adapter 1
-5 0003457-01 Plate, Bearing Mount 1
-6 0001318-04 Retaining Ring, External 2
-7 0000633-09 Screw Hex Head, with Washer 4
-8 0000524-05 Shaft, Hand Wheel 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-17

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-8
Tub Refrigeration & Brazing Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-18 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-8. Tub Refrigeration & Brazing Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-8- 0002232-01 Tub Refrigeration & Brazing Assembly – BASIC, D and DM REF
Models
-1 0000548-03 Tub Assembly, Cryo3 1
-2 0001443-01 Washer, Tube/Tub 2
-3 0001443-02 Washer, Tube/Tub 2
-4 0001385-01 Gasket, Tube/Tub 4
-5 0000201-02 Evaporator, Cryo3 1
-6 0000498-01 Washer, Flat 4
-7 0000495-02 Screw, Socket Head 4
-8 0000680-02 Tube, Cryobar-to-Evaporator, Tub 1
-9 0000319-02 Tube, Compressor-to-Cryobar 1
-10 0000320-02 Tube, Evaporator-to-Compressor, Tub 1
-11 0000264-01 Tube, Cryobar 1
-12 0000314-01 Elbow, 90-Degree, Copper 3
-13 0000575-01 Support Rod, Tub 2
-14 0001986-01 Spacer, Evaporator, Tub 4
-15 0000313-01 Diffuser, Air Return 1
-16 0000427-01 Support, Diffuser, Air-Return 1
-17 0001912-04 Plug, Pipe 1
-18 0000767-03 Valve, Straight 1
-19 0000259-05 Base, Cryobar 1
-20 0000260-04 Top, Cryobar 1
-21 820101-0149 Screw 1
-22 0001389-03 Corner Cover, Cryobar 1
-23 0000445-03 Screw, Flat Head 3
-24 0003183-01 Tube, Defrost, Hot Gas 1
-25 0000764-04 Fitting, Tee, Reducing 1
-26 0000977-01 Heat Transfer Compound, Silicone AR
-27 0001278-01 Adhesive/Sealant, RTV AR
-28 0000374-01 Silver Brazing Alloy AR
-29 0001160-01 Fitting, Pipe Coupling 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-19

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-9
Tub Heater Harness & Installation Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-20 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-9. Tub Heater Harness & Installation Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-9- 0002233-01 Tub Heater Harness & Installation Assembly – BASIC, D and DM REF
Models
-1 0001023-01 Harness Assembly, Top Drain Heaters (HTR1,2) Connection (J18) 1
-2 0001025-01 Harness Assembly, Bottom Drain Heaters (HTR3,4) Connection 1
(J20)
-3 0001027-01 Harness Assembly, Defrost Heaters (HTR5,6) Connection (J22) 1
-4 0001042-01 Harness Assembly, Chamber Thermister (RT2) Connection (J43) 1
-5 0001794-02 Harness Assembly, Ozone Lamp Ext J89 1
-7 0001792-02 Harness Assembly, Cryo+ Extension 1
-8 0003412-01 Harness Assembly, Tub Ground Terminal 1
-9 50391037 Nut, Keps 1
-10 0000672-09 Washer, Lock 1
-11 0001974-03 Holder, Temperature Sensor 1
-12 0001975-03 Retainer, Holder, Temperature Sensor 1
-13 0001137-07 Screw, Soc Head Cap 2
-14 0001393-10 O-Ring 1
-15 0001393-07 O-Ring 1
-16 0001190-01 Threadlock (Loctite) AR
-17 0001278-02 Sealant AR
-18 0001265-01 Mount, Cable Tie 24
-19 0000960-01 Cable Tie 24
-20 0000716-01 Adhesive AR
-21 50572038 Tape AR
-22 0001268-01 Lubricant, O-Ring AR

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-21

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-10. Heat Extractor Holder Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-10- 0000331-01 Heat Extractor Holder Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models (See REF
Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000324-01 Rail, Heat Extractor 1
-2 0000326-01 Mounting Bracket, Heat Extractor 1
-3 0000327-03 Arm, Heat Extractor 1
-4 0000328-02 Pin, Dowel 1
-5 0000383-01 Screw, Socket Head 2
-6 0001390-02 Screw, Permanent Fastening 2
-9 0000563-05 Support, Clip 1

Figure 7-10
Heat Extractor Holder Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-22 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-11 Figure 7-12

Knife Holder Assembly, Cryo3 – BASIC Knife Holder Assembly, Cryo3 – D and DM Models
Figure 7-11. Knife Holder Assembly, Cryo3 – BASIC Figure 7-12. Knife Holder Assembly, Cryo3 – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-11- 0000294-02 Knife Holder Assembly, Cryo3 – BASIC (See Figure 7-1 for next REF 7-12- 0000295-02 Knife Holder Assembly, Cryo3 – D and DM Models (See REF
higher assembly) Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0002222-01 Knife Holder Assembly, Basic (See Figure 7-13 for breakdown) 1 -1 0002238-01 Crank Assembly (See Figure 7-15 for breakdown) 2
-2 0002238-01 Crank Assembly (See Figure 7-15 for breakdown) 2 -2 0002239-01 Knife Holder Assembly (See Figure 7-14 for breakdown) 1
-3 95000282 Grease AR -3 95000282 Grease 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-23

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-13
Knife Holder Assembly – BASIC

7-24 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-13. Knife Holder Assembly – BASIC Figure 7-13. Knife Holder Assembly – BASIC

FIGURE & PART QTY FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-13- 0002222-01 Knife Holder Assembly – BASIC (See Figure 7-11 for next higher REF 7-13-35 95000282 Grease AR
assembly) -36 0001658-01 Cap, Vinyl 1
-1 0000435-04 Base, Knife Holder, Cryo3 1 -37 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR
-2 0000440-01 Bearing Sleeve, Bronze 2 -39 0003462-01 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 1
-3 0000709-09 Washer, Wave Spring 1
-4 0000443-01 Nut, Cam 1
-5 0000444-01 Cam Screw 1
-6 0001332-03 Screw, Socket Head 2
-7 0000448-05 Bracket, Knife Holder, Left 1
-8 0000448-06 Bracket, Knife Holder, Right 1
-9 0000461-04 Knife Holder, Cryo3 1
-10 0001452-01 Pin, Knife, Plate 1
-11 0001453-02 Hinge, Knife Plate 1
-12 0001523-01 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 2
-13 0000465-01 Spring 2
-14 0001386-01 Spring, Knife Holder 1
-15 0000476-04 Plate, Clamp 1
-17 0001524-03 Set Screw 2
-18 0001449-04 Cam, Knife Plate, Cryo3 1
-19 0001451-02 Knob, Knife Plate Cam 1
-20 0000470-02 Plate, Back 1
-20 0000470-03 Knife Holder Assembly, Plate, Back 1
-21 0000471-03 Shim, Blade-Adjusting, Cryo3 1
-23 0000472-01 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 2
-24 0000473-02 Screw, Socket Head 4
-25 0001264-02 Screw, Shoulder 1
-26 0001131-04 Bracket, Blade Guard 1
-27 0000498-07 Washer, Flat 2
-28 0001401-02 Blade Guard, Knife Holder 2
-29 0001370-03 Screw, Flat Head 4
-30 0001390-01 Screw, Permanent Fastening 2
-31 0001190-01 Threadlock (Loctite) AR
-32 0001303-01 Washer 1
-33 0001142-01 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 1
-34 0000676-01 Setscrew, Socket 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-25

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-14
Knife Holder Assembly – D and DM Models

7-26 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-14. Knife Holder Assembly – D and DM Models Figure 7-14. Knife Holder Assembly – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-14- 0002239-01 Knife Holder Assembly – D and DM Models (See Figure 7-12 for REF 7-14-34 0000676-01 Setscrew 1
next higher assembly) -35 95000282 Grease AR
-1 0000435-04 Base, Knife Holder, Cryo3 1 -36 0001658-01 Cap, Vinyl 1
-2 0000440-01 Bearing Sleeve, Bronze 2 -37 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite 242 AR
-3 0000709-09 Washer, Wave Spring 1 -38 0000415-02 Circuit Connector 1
-4 0000443-01 Nut, Cam 1 -39 0003462-01 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 1
-5 0000444-01 Screw, Cam 1 -40 0000712-02 Mounting Rod, Anti-Roll Plate 1
-6 0001332-03 Screw, Socket Head 2 -41 0000458-01 Screw, Socket Head Cap 2
-7 0000446-08 Bracket, Mounting, Vacuum Head, Left 1 -42 0000441-01 Setscrew 1
-8 0000446-05 Bracket, Mounting, Vacuum Head, Right 1 -43 0001332-02 Screw, Socket Head 1
-9 0000461-04 Knife Holder, Cryo3 1 -44 0000460-01 Cover, Vacuum Head 1
-10 0001452-01 Pin, Knife Plate 1 -45 0000713-02 Vacuum Head 1
-11 0001453-02 Hinge, Knife Plate 1 -46 0000455-01 Finger Knob 1
-12 0001523-01 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 2
-13 0000465-01 Spring 2
-14 0001386-01 Spring, Knife Holder 1
-16 0000476-04 Plate, Clamp 1
-17 0001524-03 Set Screw 2
-18 0001449-04 Cam, Knife Plate, Cryo3 1
-19 0001451-02 Knob, Knife Plate Cam 1
-20 0000470-02 Plate, Back 1
-20 0000470-03 Plate, Back, Knife Holder Assembly 1
-21 0000471-03 Shim, Blade Adjusting, Cryo3 1
-23 0000472-01 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 2
-24 0000473-02 Screw, Socket Head Cap 4
-25 0001264-02 Screw, Shoulder 2
-26 0001131-04 Bracket, Blade Guard 1
-27 0000498-07 Washer, Flat 2
-28 0001401-02 Blade Guard, Knife Holder 2
-29 0001370-03 Screw, Flat Head 4
-30 0001390-01 Screw, Permanent Fastening 2
-31 0001190-01 Threadlock (Loctite 262) AR
-32 0001303-01 Washer 1
-33 0001142-01 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 3

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-27

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-15 Figure 7-16

Crank Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models Ultraviolet Light Assembly – D and DM Models
Figure 7-15. Crank Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models Figure 7-16. Ultraviolet Light Assembly – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-15- 0002238-01 Crank Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models (See Figure 7-11 REF 7-16- 0000296-01 Ultraviolet Light Assembly – D and DM Models (See Figure 7-2 REF
and Figure 7-12 for next higher assembly) and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000437-01 Lever, Male 1 -1 0000534-02 Shield, Evaporator 1
-2 0000438-02 Crank, Upper & Lower 1 -2 0000563-04 Spring Clip 4
-3 0000498-07 Washer, Flat 1 -3 0000564-03 Rivet, Blind 6
-4 0000792-09 Washer, Lock 1 -4 0001166-02 Bracket, UV Light, Cryo3 1
-5 0001748-03 Screw, Socket Head 1 -4 0001166-03 Bracket, UV Light 1
-6 0001190-01 Threadlock (Loctite) AR -5 0001153-09 Nut, Keps, with Tooth Washer 4
-6 0001793-02 Harness Assembly, Ozone Lamp 1
-7 0000672-10 Washer, Lock, External Tooth 6
-9 0000960-05 Cable Tie 1

7-28 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-17 Figure 7-18

Microtome Assembly, Semi-Automatic – BASIC and D Model Microtome Assembly, Fully Automatic – DM Model
0. Microtome Assembly, Semi-Automatic – BASIC and D Model Figure 7-18. Microtome Assembly, Fully Automatic – DM Model

FIGURE & PART QTY FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-17- 0002237-01 Microtome Assembly, Semi-Automatic – BASIC and D Model REF 7-18- 0003151-02 Microtome Assembly, Fully Automatic – DM Model (See Figure REF
(See Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2 for next higher assembly) 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0001789-01 Microtome, Cryogenic, Semi-Automated 1 -1 0000271-03 Microtome, Cryogenic, Fully-Automated 1
-2 0001177-01 PWA Assembly, Signal Breakout, Cryo3 1 -2 0001177-01 PWA Assembly, Signal Breakout, Cryo3 1
-3 0001270-03 Standoff, Hex 4 -3 0001270-03 Standoff, Hex 4
-4 0000469-03 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 4 -4 0000469-03 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 4
-5 0000499-03 Washer, Lock 4 -5 0000499-03 Washer, Lock, Split 4

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-29

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-19. Ozone Destruct Assembly – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-19- 0000645-01 Ozone Destruct Assembly – D and DM Models (See Figure 7-2 REF
and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0002241-01 Pipes & Valves Installation (See Figure 7-20 for breakdown) 1
-2 0002242-01 Catalyst Filter Assembly (See Figure 7-21 for breakdown) 1

Figure 7-19
Ozone Destruct Assembly – D and DM Models

7-30 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-20. Pipes & Valves Installation – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-20- 0002241-01 Pipes & Valves Installation – D and DM Models (See Figure 7-19 REF
for next higher assembly)
-1 0001087-01 Harness Assembly, Pump Vent Valve (V7) Connection (J111) 1
-2 0001084-01 Harness Assembly, Pump Return Valve (V6) Connection (J109) 1
-3 0001078-01 Harness Assembly, Filter Valve (V4) Connection (J87) 1
-4 0001273-01 Reducer 1
-5 0000843-01 Elbow 4
-6 0000842-08 Nipple 1
-7 0000842-06 Nipple 1
-8 0000857-01 Tee 4
-9 0000842-02 Nipple 3
-10 0001257-02 Adapter, Tube to Pipe 2
-11 0001273-03 Reducer 2
-12 0001277-02 Adapter, Pipe to Tube 2
-13 0001273-02 Reducer 2
-14 0001275-01 Nipple 1
-15 0001922-01 Muffler 1
-16 0001257-06 Adapter, Elbow 1
-17 0000842-04 Nipple 1
-18 0000842-03 Nipple 3
-19 0001373-01 Fitting, Pipe 1
-20 0000842-12 Nipple 1
-21 0000939-02 Switch, Pressure/Vacuum 1
-22 0000427-01 Support, Diffuser, Air Return 1
-23 0003215-01 Bracket, Pump Pipe Support 1
-24 0000960-04 Cable Tie 3
-25 0001261-01 Sealant, Joint and Thread AR
-26 0000499-01 Washer, Lock, Split 1
-27 0003225-03 Screw, Hex Head 1
-28 0000646-02 Pump Subassembly, Vacuum, Linear Compressor 1
-29 0001278-02 Sealant, Silicone, Permatex AR

Figure 7-20
Pipes & Valves Installation – D and DM Models

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-31

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-21. Catalyst Filter Assembly – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-21- 0002242-01 Catalyst Filter Assembly – D and DM Models (See Figure 7-19 for REF
next higher assembly)
-1 0001257-05 Adapter, Elbow 1
-2 0001253-03 Filter, Catalyst 1
-3 0001319-01 Nipple 3
-4 0003463-01 Pipe Fitting, Tee 1
-5 0001273-03 Reducer 2
-6 0001278-02 Sealant, Silicone, Permatex AR
-7 0001090-01 Harness Assembly, Catalyst Heater Connection 1
-8 0000968-01 Harness Assembly, Catalyst Valve Connection 1
-9 0000857-01 Tee 1
-10 0000842-02 Nipple 1
-11 0000843-01 Elbow 1
-12 0001257-02 Adapter, Tube to Pipe 1
-13 0001277-02 Adapter, Pipe to Tube 1

Figure 7-21
Catalyst Filter Assembly – D and DM Models

7-32 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-22. Drain Valve Assembly, Water (J99,J104) – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-22- 0001095-01 Drain Valve Assembly, Water (J99,J104) – D and DM Models (See REF
Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000979-03 Ball Valve 1
-2 0000906-02 Wire, Stranded, Brown AR
-3 0000906-09 Wire, Yellow AR
-4 0000900-01 Receptacle 2
-5 0000930-01 Connector, Receptacle, Dual Row, 2-Position 1
-6 0000972-01 Terminal, Female, Crimp 6
-7 0000930-02 Connector, Receptacle, Dual Row, 4-Position 1
-8 0000896-02 Receptacle, Crimp 3
-9 0001224-03 Tubing, Shrink AR
-12 0004290-01 Snubber, Ball Valve Assembly 1
-13 0000960-01 Cable Tie 5
-14 0001380-03 Bundling Wrap AR
-15 0004262-01 Insulator Sheet, Lexan 1
-16 843610-0040 Terminal, Quick Disconnect, Male 1
-17 843610-0041 T-Tap, Quick Disconnect, Female 1

Figure 7-22
Drain Valve Assembly, Water (J99,J104) – D and DM Models

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-33

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-23. Isolation Valve Assembly, O3 Sensor (J153,155) – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-23- 0001456-01 Isolation Valve Assembly, O3 Sensor (J153,155) – D and DM REF
Models (See Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000979-01 Ball Valve 1
-2 0000906-02 Wire, Stranded, Brown AR
-3 0000906-09 Wire, Yellow AR
-4 0000900-01 Receptacle, Insulated 2
-5 0000930-01 Connector, Receptacle, Dual Row, 2-Position 1
-6 0000972-01 Terminal, Female, Crimp 6
-7 0000930-02 Connector, Receptacle, Dual Row, 4-Position 1
-8 0000896-02 Receptacle, Crimp 3
-9 0001224-03 Tubing, Shrink AR
-12 0004290-01 Snubber, Ball Valve Assembly 1
-13 0000960-01 Cable Tie 5
-14 0001380-03 Bundling Wrap AR
-15 0004262-01 Insulator Sheet, Lexan 1
-16 843610-0040 Terminal, Quick Disconnect, Male 1
-17 843610-0041 T-Tap, Quick Disconnect, Female 1

Figure 7-23
Isolation Valve Assembly, O3 Sensor (J153,155) – D and DM Models

7-34 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-24. Refrigeration Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-24- 0001643-02 Refrigeration Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models (See Figure REF
7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0002244-01 Compressor/Condensor Assembly 1
-2 0002245-01 Copper Pipe Fabrication 1
-3 0002248-01 Brazing/Pressure Check, Refrigeration Assembly (See Figure 7-25 1
for breakdown)
-4 0002249-01 Final Assembly, Refrigeration 1
-5 0002250-01 Insulation Installation 1

Figure 7-24
Refrigeration Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-35

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-25. Brazing/Pressure Check, Refrigeration Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-25- 0002248-01 Brazing/Pressure Check, Refrigeration Assembly – BASIC, D and REF
DM Models (See Figure 7-24 for next higher assembly)
-1 0001272-01 Valve, Thermostatic Expansion 1
-2 0000306-01 Filter Drier 2
-3 0001120-02 Valve, Solenoid 1
-4 0000551-01 Check Valve 1
-5 0000760-01 Pressure Regulator Crank Case 1
-6 0000767-01 Valve, Schraeder 1
-7 0000767-02 Valve Schraeder 1
-8 0000764-02 Tee, Connecting 1
-9 0000771-02 Reducer 3
-10 0000764-03 Fitting, Tee, Reducing 1
-11 0000307-01 Sight Glass 1
-12 0000699-01 Heat Exchanger 1
-13 0000374-01 Silver Brazing Alloy AR
-14 0000374-02 Brazing Alloy AR
-15 0001957-01 Brazing Flux AR

Figure 7-25
Brazing/Pressure Check, Refrigeration Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-36 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-26. Main Power Box Assembly – BASIC

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-26- 0001723-01 Main Power Box Assembly – BASIC REF
-1 0003040-01 Terminal Block Assembly, Power Box 1
-2 0002215-01 OPTO-22 Assembly, Basic (See Figure 7-29 for breakdown) 1
-3 0000640-05 Housing Subassembly, Main Power Box 1
-4 0000166-01 Filter, Power Line 1
-5 0000174-01 Relay, Solid-State 1
-6 0000788-01 Nut, with Conical Washer 6
-7 0000498-02 Washer, Flat 10
-8 0001226-01 Nut, Hex 4
-10 0000469-07 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 4
-11 0001270-01 Standoff, Hex 4
-12 0001181-01 PWB Assembly, TEC Power Supply 1
-14 0000499-03 Washer, Lock, Split 12
-15 0001232-02 Loop Strap 4
-16 0001180-01 PWB Assembly, 24VDC Power Supply 1
-17 0000469-03 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 4
-18 0000239-01 Driver, Microstepping 1
-19 0000615-05 Grommet 3
-20 0001267-01 Grommet Strip 2
-21 0001265-01 Mount, Cable Tie 8
-22 0000960-01 Cable Tie 8
-23 0001657-01 Fuse Block 2
-25 0000128-03 Fuse, Time Lag 2
-27 0000790-06 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 2
-28 0000499-02 Washer, Lock Split 2
-29 0003240-01 Label, Earth Ground 1
-30 0002255-01 Power Entry Module Assembly (See Figure 7-31 for breakdown) 1
-34 0000469-05 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 4

Figure 7-26
Main Power Box Assembly – BASIC
(Sheet 1 of 2)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-37

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-26
Main Power Box Assembly – BASIC
(Sheet 2 of 2) - SEE PAGE 7-37 FOR PARTS LIST

7-38 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-27
Main Power Box Assembly – D Model
(Sheet 1 of 2) - SEE PAGE 7-41 FOR PARTS LIST

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-39

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-27
Main Power Box Assembly – D Model
(Sheet 2 of 2)

7-40 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-27. Main Power Box Assembly – D Model

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-27- 0001724-01 Main Power Box Assembly – D Model REF
-1 0003040-01 Terminal Block Assembly, Power Box 1
-2 0002254-01 OPTO-22 Assembly, Ozone/Motorized (See Figure 7-30 for 1
breakdown)
-3 0000640-05 Housing Subassembly, Main Power Box 1
-4 0000166-01 Filter, Power Line 1
-5 0000174-01 Relay, Solid State 1
-6 0000788-01 Nut, with Conical Washer 6
-7 0000498-02 Washer, Flat 10
-8 0001226-01 Nut, Hex 4
-10 0000469-07 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 4
-11 0001270-01 Standoff, Hex 4
-12 0001181-01 PWB Assembly, TEC Power Supply 1
-14 0000499-03 Washer, Lock, Split 12
-15 0001232-02 Loop Strap 4
-16 0001180-01 PWB Assembly, 24VDC Power Supply 1
-17 0000469-03 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 8
-18 0000239-01 Driver, Microstepping 1
-19 0000615-05 Grommet 3
-20 0001267-01 Grommet Strip 2
-21 0001265-01 Mount, Cable Tie 8
-22 0000960-01 Cable Tie 8
-23 0001657-01 Fuse Block 6
-24 0000128-05 Fuse, Time Lag 2
-25 0000128-03 Fuse, Time Lag 3
-26 0000128-01 Fuse, Time Lag 1
-27 0000790-06 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 6
-28 0000499-02 Washer, Lock, Split 6
-29 0003240-01 Label, Earth Ground 1
-30 0002255-01 Power Entry Module Assembly (See Figure 7-31 for breakdown) 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-41

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-28
Main Power Box Assembly – DM Model
(Sheet 1 of 2)

7-42 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-28. Main Power Box Assembly – DM Model

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-28- 0001725-01 Main Power Box Assembly – DM Model REF
-1 0003040-01 Terminal Block Assembly, Power Box 1
-2 0002254-01 OPTO-22 Assembly, Ozone/Motorized (See Figure 7-30 for 1
breakdown)
-3 0000640-05 Housing Subassembly, Main Power Box 1
-4 0000166-01 Filter, Power Line 1
-5 0000174-01 Relay, Solid-State 1
-6 0000788-01 Nut, with Conical Washer 6
-7 0000498-02 Washer, Flat 6
-8 0001226-01 Nut, Hex 4
-9 0001178-01 PWB Assembly, Microtome Power Supply 1
-10 0000469-07 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 4
-11 0001270-01 Standoff, Hex 4
-12 0001181-01 PWB Assembly, TEC Power Supply 1
-14 0000499-03 Washer, Lock, Split 12
-15 0001232-02 Loop Strap 4
-16 0001180-01 PWB Assembly, 24VDC Power Supply 1
-17 0000469-03 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 8
-18 0000239-01 Driver, Microstepping 1
-19 0000615-05 Grommet 3
-20 0001267-01 Grommet Strip 2
-21 0001265-01 Mount, Cable Tie 2
-22 0000960-01 Cable Tie 2
-23 0001657-01 Fuse Block 6
-24 0000128-05 Fuse, Time Lag 2
-25 0000128-03 Fuse, Time Lag 3
-26 0000128-01 Fuse, Time Lag 1
-27 0000790-06 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 6
-28 0000499-02 Washer, Lock, Split 6
-29 0003240-01 Label, Earth Ground 1
-30 0002255-01 Power Entry Module Assembly (See Figure 7-31 for breakdown) 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-43

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-28
Main Power Box Assembly – DM Model
(Sheet 2 of 2) - SEE PAGE 7-43 FOR PARTS LIST

7-44 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-29 Figure 7-30

OPTO-22 Assembly – BASIC OPTO-22 Assembly – D and DM Models
Figure 7-29. OPTO-22 Assembly – BASIC Figure 7-30. OPTO-22 Assembly – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-29- 0002215-01 OPTO-22 Assembly – BASIC (See Figure 7-26 for next higher REF 7-30- 0002254-01 OPTO-22 Assembly – D and DM Models (See Figure 7-27 and 1
assembly) Figure 7-28 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000157-01 Backplane, 16-Channel 1 -1 0000157-01 Backplane, 16-Channel 1
-2 0000180-01 5VAC Digital Output Module 4 -2 0000180-01 5VAC Digital Output Module 7
-3 0000180-02 5VDC Digital Output Module 1 -3 0000180-02 5VDC Digital Output Module 7
-4 0001435-02 Wire AR -4 0001435-02 Wire AR

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-45

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-31. Power Entry Module Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-31- 0002255-01 Power Entry Module Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models (See REF
Figure 7-26 thru Figure 7-28 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000683-03 Cover, On-Off Sw, Main Power Box 1
-2 0000158-01 Collar, 2-Pole Circuit Breaker 1
-3 0000159-01 Circuit Brkr, 2-Pole, Thermal Release 1
-4 0000168-02 AC Inlet Module, 15A, 250 VAC 1
-5 0001740-01 Clamp, AC Cord Retaining 1
-6 0000165-01 Fan Guard 1
-7 0001232-01 Loop Strap, Nylon 1
-8 0001033-01 Harness Assembly, Fan (1) (J28) 1
-9 0001741-02 Harness Assembly, AC Inlet Port 1
-10 0000498-02 Washer, Flat 1
-11 0001153-09 Nut, Keps W/Washer 4
-12 0003240-02 Label 1

Figure 7-31
Power Entry Module Assembly – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-46 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-32. Option Power Box Assembly – D Model

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-32- 0001729-02 Option Power Box Assembly – D Model REF
-1 0000687-08 Housing Subassembly, Option Power Box 1
-1 0000687-09 Housing Subassembly, Option Power Box 1
-2 0001180-01 PWB Assembly, 24VDC Power Supply 1
-3 0000469-01 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 4
-4 0000469-03 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 8
-5 0000499-03 Washer, Lock, Split 14
-6 0000940-01 Relay, DPDT 2
-7 0000498-02 Washer, Flat 9
-8 0000788-01 Nut, With Conical Washer 6
-9 0000955-01 Clip, Relay Hold Down 4
-10 0000913-01 Socket, Relay 2
-12 0001232-02 Loop Strap 3
-14 0000469-07 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 2
-15 0000650-02 Ozone Switch Assembly, with Remote Sensor 1
-16 0001179-01 PWA Assembly, Pump Speed Control 1
-17 0001280-04 Transformer, Chassis Mount 1
-18 0002286-01 O3 Ballast Harness 1
-19 0000615-04 Grommet 3
-20 0001267-01 Grommet Strip 1
-21 0001265-01 Mount, Cable Tie 2
-22 0000960-01 Cable Tie 2
-23 0000977-01 Heat Transfer Compound, Silicone 1
-24 0001153-09 Nut, Keps 4
-25 0002211-01 Washer, Lock, Internal/External Tooth 2
-26 0001330-08 Washer, Flat, Large Diameter 2

Figure 7-32
Option Power Box Assembly – D Model
(Sheet 1 of 2)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-47

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-32
Option Power Box Assembly – D Model
(Sheet 2 of 2) - SEE PAGE 7-47 FOR PARTS LIST

7-48 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-33. Option Power Box Assembly – DM Model

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-33- 0001730-02 Option Power Box Assembly – DM Model REF
-1 0000687-08 Housing Subassembly, Option Power Box 1
-1 0000687-09 Housing Subassembly, Option Power Box 1
-2 0001180-01 PWB Assembly, 24VDC Power Supply 1
-3 0000469-01 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 4
-4 0000469-03 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 8
-5 0000499-03 Washer, Lock, Split 20
-6 0000940-01 Relay, DPDT 2
-7 0000498-02 Washer, Flat 5
-8 0000788-01 Nut, with Conical Washer 6
-9 0000955-01 Clip, Relay Hold Down 4
-10 0000913-01 Socket, Relay 2
-11 0001325-02 Heatsink, Microtome Vertical Driver 1
-12 0001232-02 Loop Strap 1
-13 0000239-01 Driver, Microstepping 1
-14 0000469-07 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 8
-15 0000650-02 Ozone Switch Assembly, with Remote Sensor 1
-16 0001179-01 PWA Assembly, Pump Speed Control 1
-17 0001280-04 Transformer, Step Down, 230/115V 1
-18 0002286-01 O3 Ballast Harness 1
-19 0000615-04 Grommet 3
-20 0001267-01 Grommet Strip 1
-21 0001265-01 Mount, Cable Tie 2
-22 0000960-01 Cable Tie 2
-23 0000977-01 Heat Transfer Compound, Silicone 1
-24 0001153-09 Nut, Keps 4
-25 0002211-01 Washer, Lock, Internal/External Tooth 2
-26 0001330-08 Washer, Flat, Large Diameter 2

Figure 7-33
Option Power Box Assembly – DM Model
(Sheet 1 of 2)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-49

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-33
Option Power Box Assembly – DM Model
(Sheet 2 of 2) - SEE PAGE 7-49 FOR PARTS LIST

7-50 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-34. Cover Assembly, Power Box – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-34- 0002257-01 Cover Assembly, Power Box – D and DM Models (See Figure 7-2 REF
and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000688-02 Cover, Power Box, Options 1
-2 0000165-01 Guard, Fan 1
-3 0001232-01 Loop Strap 1
-4 0001035-01 Harness Assembly, Fan (2) (J27) 1

Figure 7-34
Cover Assembly, Power Box – D and DM Models

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-51

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-35. Top Power Box Assembly – BASIC

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-35- 0001721-01 Top Power Box Assembly – BASIC (See Figure 7-1 for next REF
higher assembly)
-1 0000690-06 Housing, Top Power Box 1
-2 0000701-02 Reflector, Fluorescent Lamp 1
-3 40331033 Bulb-Fluorescent 1
-4 0001225-01 Standoff 9
-5 0001226-01 Nut, Hex 9
-6 0001153-09 Nut, Keps, with Washer 2
-7 0001262-02 Screw, Phillips Pan Head with Washer 10
-9 0001684-06 Screw, Pan Head, with Washer 2
-10 0000615-04 Grommet 1
-11 0001175-02 PWB Assembly, Main Controller 1
-12 0001267-01 Grommet Strip 1
-13 0001330-08 Washer, Flat 3
-14 0000672-08 Washer, Lock 2
-15 0000788-01 Nut, with Conical Washer 2
-16 0001265-01 Mount, Cable Tie 6
-17 0000960-01 Cable Tie 6
-18 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR
-19 0001441-02 Photosensor 1
-20 0001038-01 Harness Assembly, Window Light Ballast (J30) 1

Figure 7-35
Top Power Box Assembly – BASIC
(Sheet 1 of 2)

7-52 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-35
Top Power Box Assembly – BASIC
(Sheet 2 of 2)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-53

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-36. Top Power Box Assembly – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-36- 0001721-02 Top Power Box Assembly –D and DM Models (See Figure 7-2 and REF
Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000690-06 Housing, Top Power Box 1
-2 0000701-02 Reflector, Fluorescent Lamp 1
-3 40331033 Bulb-Fluorescent 1
-4 0001225-01 Standoff 9
-5 0001226-01 Nut, Hex 13
-6 0001153-09 Nut, Keps, with Washer 3
-7 0001262-02 Screw, Phillips Pan Head with Washer 10
-9 0001684-06 Screw, Pan Head, with Washer 2
-10 0000615-04 Grommet 1
-11 0001175-02 PWB Assembly, Main Controller 1
-12 0001267-01 Grommet Strip 1
-13 0001330-08 Washer, Flat 3
-14 0000672-08 Washer, Lock 2
-15 0000788-01 Nut, with Conical Washer 7
-16 0001265-01 Mount, Cable Tie 6
-17 0000960-01 Cable Tie 6
-18 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR
-19 0001441-02 Photosensor 1
-20 0001038-01 Harness Assembly, Window Light Ballast (J30) 1
-21 0001442-02 Connector, with Cable 1
-23 0003240-01 Label 1
-24 0000786-01 Window Lock Assembly 1
-25 0001430-03 Solenoid Assembly, Driver/Timer PCB 1
-26 820102-0020 Standoff 4

Figure 7-36
Top Power Box Assembly – D and DM Models
(Sheet 1 of 2)

7-54 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-36
Top Power Box Assembly – D and DM Models
(Sheet 2 of 2)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-55

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-37
Window Lock Assembly – D and DM Models

7-56 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-37. Window Lock Assembly – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-37- 0000786-01 Window Lock Assembly – D and DM Models (See Figure 7-36 for REF
next higher assembly)
-1 0000778-01 Support Bracket 1, Window Lock 1
-2 0000779-01 Support Bracket 2, Window Lock 1
-3 0000780-02 Latch, Window Lock 1
-4 0000781-01 Linkage, Solenoid 1
-5 0000777-01 Clip 2
-6 0000784-01 Rivet, Nylon 3
-7 0001171-01 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 4
-8 0000464-02 Spring Pin 1
-9 0000785-06 Spring, Compression 1
-10 0000469-02 Screw, Pan Head Phillips 1
-11 0000782-02 Solenoid, Latching, Window Lock 1
-12 0000787-01 Switch, DPDT 1
-13 0001153-09 Nut, Keps, with Tooth Washer 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-57

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-38 Figure 7-38

Top Cover Assembly – BASIC Top Cover Assembly – BASIC
(Sheet 1 of 2 (Sheet 2 of 2)

7-58 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-38. Top Cover Assembly – BASIC

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-38- 0000654-01 Top Cover Assembly – BASIC (See Figure 7-1 for breakdown) REF
-1 0000282-04 Cover, Top 1
-2 0001225-01 Standoff, Hex 4
-3 0001226-01 Nut, Hex 8
-4 0001245-01 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 4
-6 0001176-01 PCB Assembly, User I/F Signal Breakout 1
-7 0000963-04 LCD, Graphic 240 x 64 LED Backlight 1
-8 0001395-01 Membrane Panel, Center, No Ozone 1
-9 0001396-01 Membrane Panel, Left Side, No Vacuum 1
-10 0000921-01 Membrane Panel, Blank, Right Side 1
-14 0002107-01 Keeper 1
-15 0000611-02 Screw, Truss Head, Phillips 2
-16 0000672-07 Washer, Lock 2
-17 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR
-18 0003343-01 Cushion Pad, Top Cover 2
-19 0001225-03 Standoff, Hex 4
-20 0001245-02 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 4

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-59

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-39 Figure 7-39

Top Cover Assembly – D Model Top Cover Assembly – D Model
(Sheet 1 of 2 (Sheet 2 of 2)

7-60 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-39. Top Cover Assembly – D Model

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-39- 0001797-01 Top Cover Assembly – D Model (See Figure 7-2 for next higher REF
assembly)
-1 0000282-04 Cover, Top 1
-2 0001225-01 Standoff, Hex 4
-3 0001226-01 Nut, Hex 8
-4 0001245-01 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 4
-5 0001269-01 Tape, Double-Sided AR
-6 0001176-01 PCB Assembly, User I/F Signal Breakout 1
-7 0000963-04 LCD, Graphic 240 x 64 LED Backlight 1
-8 0000387-05 Membrane Panel, Center 1
-9 0000387-06 Membrane Panel, Left Side 1
-10 0000921-01 Membrane Panel, Blank, Right Side 1
-11 0000917-01 Resistor, Variable Potentiometer 1
-12 0001247-02 Knob, Control 1
-14 0002107-01 Keeper 1
-15 0000611-02 Screw, Truss Head, Phillips 2
-16 0000672-07 Washer, Lock 2
-17 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR
-18 0003343-01 Cushion Pad, Top Cover 2
-19 820830-0010 Tape, Mylar AR
-20 0001225-03 Standoff, Hex 4
-21 0001245-02 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 4

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-61

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-40 Figure 7-40

Top Cover Assembly – DM Model Top Cover Assembly – DM Model
(Sheet 1 of 2 (Sheet 2 of 2)

7-62 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-40. Top Cover Assembly – DM Model

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-40- 0001798-01 Top Cover Assembly – DM Model (See Figure 7-3 for next higher REF
assembly)
-1 0000282-04 Cover, Top 1
-2 0001225-01 Standoff, Hex 4
-3 0001226-01 Nut, Hex 8
-4 0001245-01 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 4
-5 0001269-01 Tape, Double-Sided 1
-6 0001176-01 PCB Assembly, User I/F Signal Breakout 1
-7 0000963-04 LCD, Graphic 240 x 64 LED Backlight 1
-8 0000387-05 Membrane Panel, Center 1
-9 0000387-06 Membrane Panel, Left Side 1
-10 0000387-07 Membrane Panel, Right Side 1
-11 0000917-01 Resistor, Variable Potentiometer 2
-12 0001247-02 Knob, Control 2
-13 0000941-04 Switch, Emergency Stop 1
-14 0002107-01 Keeper 1
-15 0000611-02 Screw, Truss Head, Phillips 2
-16 0000672-07 Washer, Lock 2
-17 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR
-18 0003343-01 Cushion Pad, Top Cover 2
-19 820830-0010 Tape, Mylar 1
-20 0001225-03 Standoff, Hex 4
-21 0001245-02 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 4

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-63

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-41. Refrigeration Assembly Installation – Basic, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-41- 0002258-01 Refrigeration Assembly Installation – Basic, D and DM Models REF
(See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0001959-01 Nut, Hex Thin 8

Figure 7-41
Refrigeration Assembly Installation – Basic, D and DM Models

7-64 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-42. Ozone Destruct Assembly Installation – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-42- 0002259-01 Ozone Destruct Assembly Installation – D and DM Models (See REF
Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000693-01 Harness, Catalyst 1
-2 0000489-02 Screw, Socket Head 2
-3 0000499-04 Washer, Split Lock 2
-4 0000498-03 Washer, Flat 2
-5 0003008-01 Nut, Hex, Lock 2
-6 0001330-02 Washer, Flat, Large OD 2

Figure 7-42
Ozone Destruct Assembly Installation – D and DM Models

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-65

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-43. Power Box/Option Box Assembly Installation – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-43- 0002252-01 Power Box/Option Box Assembly Installation – D and DM Models REF
(See Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0001447-04 Nut, Hex, Acorn 10
-2 0000672-01 Washer, Lock, External Tooth 12

Figure 7-43
Power Box/Option Box Assembly Installation – D and DM Models

7-66 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-44. Foamed Tub Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-44 0002260-01 Foamed Tub Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models REF
(See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000495-02 Screw, Socket Head 4
-2 0000937-10 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 1
-3 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR
-4 0001955-02 Screw, Thread-Cutting 1

Figure 7-44
Foamed Tub Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-67

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-45. Top Power Box Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-45- 0002261-01 Top Power Box Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM REF
Models (See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 51100819 Screw, Pan Head 4
-2 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR

Figure 7-45
Top Power Box Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-68 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-46. Top Cover Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-46- 0002262-01 Top Cover Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models REF
(See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000746-01 Lanyard 2
-2 0001331-01 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 2
-3 0003235-05 Screw, Truss Head, Phillips 7
-4 0000672-09 Washer, Lock 9
-5 0001232-05 Loop Strap 2
-6 0001232-04 Loop Strap 2
-7 0001122-02 Catch, Door 1
-8 0001231-01 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 2
-9 0000672-07 Washer, Lock 4

Figure 7-46
Top Cover Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-69

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-47
Brazing & Pressure Check, Tub & Refrigeration – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-70 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-47. Brazing & Pressure Check, Tub & Refrigeration – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-47- 0002263-01 Brazing & Pressure Check, Tub & Refrigeration – BASIC, D and REF
DM Models (See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher
assembly)
-1 0000314-01 Elbow 1
-2 0002213-01 Coupling 1
-3 0000374-01 Brazing Alloy AR

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-71

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-48
Evacuation, Freon Charging, Sniffer Check & Insulation – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-72 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-48. Evacuation, Freon Charging, Sniffer Check & Insulation – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-48- 0002264-01 Evacuation, Freon Charging, Sniffer Check & Insulation – BASIC, REF
D and DM Models (See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher
assembly)
-1 50150215 Refrigerant AR
-2 50572022 Cork Tape AR
-3 0000960-02 Cable Tie 11
-5 0001522-06 Insulation, Pipe AR

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-73

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-49
Microtome Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-74 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-49. Microtome Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-49- 0002265-01 Microtome Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models REF
(See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000498-01 Washer, Flat 4
-2 0000499-01 Washer, Lock, Split 4
-3 0000495-01 Screw, Socket Head Cap 4
-4 0000118-02 Rubber Seal 1
-5 0000679-01 Cable Tie 2
-7 0000118-03 Seal, Tub-Microtome 1
-8 0000192-05 Insulator Tube 1
-9 0001393-04 O-Ring 1
-10 0000751-01 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 3
-11 0001403-01 Insulator Cap 1
-12 0001639-01 Lubricant AR
-13 0001402-01 Nut Insert 1
-14 0001268-01 Lubricant, O-Ring AR

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-75

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-50
3D Chuck & Rake Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-76 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-50. 3D Chuck & Rake Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-50- 0002266-01 3D Chuck & Rake Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models (See REF
Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000796-03 Block Subassembly, Rear 1
-2 0000797-03 Block, Front, 3D Chuck 1
-3 0001322-01 Nut, Lock 1
-4 0000444-01 Cam Screw 1
-5 0000802-03 Cam Lock 1 1
-6 0001985-01 Cam Lock 2 1
-7 0000804-01 Holder 1
-8 0000437-02 Lever 1
-9 0001330-02 Washer, Flat 1
-10 0001374-03 Screw, Socket Head Cap 1
-11 0001956-04 Nut, Locking 1
-12 0001190-01 Threadlock (Loctite) AR
-13 0001333-04 Washer, Belleville 1
-14 95000282 Grease AR
-15 0000591-02 Knob 1
-16 0000498-07 Washer, Flat 1
-17 0000792-09 Washer, Lock 1
-18 0001748-03 Screw, Socket Head 1
-19 0001639-01 Lubricant AR

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-77

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-51. Anti-Roll Plate & Knife Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-51- 0002267-01 Anti-Roll Plate & Knife Holder Installation – BASIC, D and DM REF
Models (See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0001142-02 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 2

Figure 7-51
Anti-Roll Plate & Knife Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-78 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-52
Figure 7-53
Ultraviolet Lamp Assembly Installation – D and DM Models
Cryo3+TEC Assembly & Insert Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models
Figure 7-52. Ultraviolet Lamp Assembly Installation – D and DM Models Figure 7-53. Cryo3+TEC Assembly & Insert Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-52- 0002268-01 Ultraviolet Lamp Assembly Installation – D and DM Models (See REF 7-53- 0002269-01 Cryo3+TEC Assembly & Insert Installation – BASIC, D and DM REF
Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly) Models (See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0001167-01 Bracket, Shield 2 -1 0000286-02 Divider, Horizontal, Cryobar 1
-2 0000672-09 Washer, Lock, External Tooth 8 -2 0000496-01 Screw, Flat Head 4
-3 0000489-02 Screw, Socket Head 8 -3 0000882-01 Insert, Blank, Cryobar 3
-4 0000498-03 Washer, Flat 4 -4 0001142-02 Screw, Flat Head, Phillips 6
-5 0000977-01 Heat Transfer Compound AR
-6 0001278-01 Adhesive/Sealant AR
-7 0000262-02 Divider, Vertical, Cryobar 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-79

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-54. Window Track Extender & Suppressor Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-54 0002272-01 Window Track Extender & Suppressor Installation – BASIC, D REF
and DM Models (See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher
assembly)
-1 0001124-07 Suppressor, Window 1
-2 0001124-08 Suppressor, Window, Mirror 1
-3 0001444-01 Mounting Bracket, Window Track Extender 1
-4 0001444-02 Mounting Bracket, Window Track Extender, Mirror 1
-5 0001445-05 Extender, Window Track 1
-6 0001445-06 Extender, Window Track, Mirror 1
-7 0000498-07 Washer, Flat 2
-8 0001231-03 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 2
-9 0001321-03 Spring, Extension 2
-10 0001153-02 Nut, Keps, W/Washer 2
-11 0000458-03 Screw, Socket Head Cap 6
-12 0000672-07 Washer, Lock 4
-13 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR
-14 0000498-08 Washer, Flat 2
-15 0000499-03 Washer, Lock, Split 10

Figure 7-54
Window Track Extender & Suppressor Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-80 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-55. Window Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-55- 0002273-01 Window Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models (See REF
Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000788-01 Nut, with Conical Washer 1
0001104-02 Window Assembly REF

Figure 7-55
Window Assembly Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-81

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-56. Hand Wheel Assembly Installation & Balancing – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-56 0002274-01 Hand Wheel Assembly Installation & Balancing – BASIC, D and REF
DM Models (See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher
assembly)
-1 0000495-04 Screw, Socket Head Cap 1
-2 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR
-3 0000499-01 Washer, Lock, Split 6
-4 0000498-01 Washer, Flat 6
-5 0000509-01 Key, Machine 1
-6 0000519-02 Coupling, Shaft, Flexible 1
-7 0000495-03 Screw, Socket Head Cap 5
-8 0000960-01 Cable Tie 2
-9 0000502-02 Counterweight, Supplemental 1
-10 0001332-07 Screw, Socket Head 2
-11 0000621-03 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 1
-12 0003158-01 Weight, Self Adhesive AR
-13 0000520-02 Belt, Timing 1

Figure 7-56
Hand Wheel Assembly Installation & Balancing – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-82 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-57. Water Drain Valve Installation –D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-57- 0002275-01 Water Drain Valve Installation – D and DM Models (See REF
Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0001257-04 Adapter, Straight 1
-2 0001334-03 Clamp, Hose 3
-3 0001256-04 Tubing, Silicone AR
-4 0001255-01 Tee 1
-5 0001257-01 Adapter, Tube-to-Pipe 2
-6 0001256-01 Tubing, Flexible, Silicone AR
-7 0000620-02 Bracket, Solenoid Valve 1
-8 0000788-01 Nut, with Conical Washer 2
-9 0000792-04 Washer, Lock 2
-10 0000621-03 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 1
-11 0000498-04 Washer, Flat 2

Figure 7-57
Water Drain Valve Installation –D and DM Models

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-83

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-58. Isolation Valve Installation – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-58- 0002276-01 Isolation Valve Installation – D and DM Models (See Figure 7-2 REF
and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000489-02 Screw, Socket Head 2
-2 0000499-04 Washer, Lock, Split 2
-3 0000498-03 Washer, Flat 2
-4 0000960-02 Cable Tie 1
-5 0001987-02 Bracket, Mounting, O3 Isolation Valve 1
-6 0000792-04 Washer, Lock 2
-7 0000498-04 Washer, Flat 2
-8 0001255-02 Tee 1
-9 0001257-02 Adapter, Tube-to-Pipe 2
-10 0001256-05 Tube, Silicone AR
-11 0001162-01 Screw, Pan Head 4
-12 0001257-03 Adapter, Tube-to-Pipe 1

Figure 7-58
Isolation Valve Installation – D and DM Models

7-84 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-59. Pipes, Hoses & Switch Installation – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-59- 0002277-01 Pipes, Hoses & Switch Installation – D and DM Models (See REF
Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000842-02 Nipple 1
-2 0000939-03 Switch, Pressure/Vacuum 1
-3 0001257-02 Adapter, Tube-to-Pipe 1
-4 0000857-01 Tee 1
-5 0001273-03 Reducer 1
-6 0001277-02 Adapter, Pipe-to-Tube 1
-8 0001256-03 Tubing, Flexible AR
-9 0001323-01 Tee 1
-10 0001324-02 Adapter 1
-11 0000790-02 Screw, Pan Head 2
-12 0001334-02 Clamp, Hose 6
-13 0001256-05 Tubing, Silicone AR
-24 0001257-03 Adapter, Tube-to-Pipe 1
-25 0001261-01 Sealant, Joint and Thread AR
-29 0001256-06 Tubing, Silicone AR
-30 0001257-07 Fitting, Adapter 4
-31 0001190-02 Adhesive, Loctite AR

Figure 7-59
Pipes, Hoses & Switch Installation – D and DM Models

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-85

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-60
Harness Connector & Ribbon Cables Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

7-86 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-60. Harness Connector & Ribbon Cables Installation – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-60- 0002278-01 Harness Connector & Ribbon Cables Installation – BASIC, D and REF
DM Models (See Figure 7-1 thru Figure 7-3 for next higher
assembly)
-1 0001787-01 Ferrite, Flat Cable 1
-4 0001783-01 Connector, Plug, Dual Row 1
-5 0000615-01 Grommet 1
-6 0001265-01 Mount, Cable Tie 5
-7 0000960-01 Cable Tie 5
-8 0003234-03 Solder Sleeve, Heat Shrink AR
-9 0001153-09 Nut, Keps, with Washer 1
-10 0000672-08 Washer, Lock 2
-11 0001224-01 Tubing, Shrink AR
-12 0001224-04 Tubing, Shrink AR
-13 848899-0010 Wire Solder, Flux AR

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-87

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-61. EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming – BASIC

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-61- 0002220-01 EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming – BASIC (See Figure REF
7-1 for next higher assembly)
-1 0003237-07 EPROM Assembly, Basic 1
-2 0002115-01 FPLA GAL Assembly, Programmed 1

Figure 7-61
EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming – BASIC

7-88 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-62. EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming – D Model

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-62- 0002220-02 EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming – D Model (See Figure REF
7-2 for next higher assembly)
-1 0003238-07 EPROM Assembly, Ozone 1
-2 0002115-01 FPLA GAL Assembly, Programmed 1

Figure 7-62
EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming – D Model

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-89

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-63. EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming – DM Model

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-63- 0002220-03 EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming – DM Model (See REF
Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0003239-07 EPROM Assembly, Ozone/Motorized 1
-2 0002115-01 FPLA GAL Assembly, Programmed 1

Figure 7-63
EPROM & GAL Installation/Programming – DM Model

7-90 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-64
Panels & Covers Installation – BASIC
(Sheet 1 of 2) - SEE PAGE 7-93 FOR PARTS LIST

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-91

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-64
Panels & Covers Installation – BASIC
(Sheet 2 of 2)

7-92 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-64. Panels & Covers Installation – BASIC

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-64- 0002528-01 Panels & Covers Installation – BASIC (See Figure 7-1 for next REF
higher assembly)
-1 0000691-02 Cover, Power Box, Top 1
-2 0001262-02 Screw, Phillips, Pan Head with Conical Washer 8
-3 0001972-01 Foam, Low Density 1
-4 0000641-02 Cover, Power Box, Main 1
-5 50661094 Washer, Flat 10
-6 0003039-04 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 10
-7 0000606-02 Cover, Vent, Frame 1
-8 0000607-02 Skin, Right Panel, Frame 1
-9 0000608-03 Skin, Left Panel, Frame 1
-10 0000611-01 Screw, Truss Head, Phillips 12
-11 0000624-02 Skin, Back Panel, Top, Frame 1
-12 0000625-03 Skin, Back Panel, Bottom, Frame 1
-13 0000615-09 Grommet 1
-14 0001153-05 Nut, Keps, W/Washer 14
-15 50150195 Foot Rest 1
-16 0000498-04 Washer, Flat 2
-17 0000633-09 Screw, Hex Head, W/Washer 2
-18 0001125-02 Cover, Back, Standard-Equipped Unit 1
-19 0000681-01 Bottle 1
-20 0001377-03 Wear Washer, Flat 4
-21 0001377-02 Stud, Oval Phillips 4
-22 0001378-02 Retainer Ring 4
-23 0001379-01 Receptacle 4
-24 0000653-01 Front Cover Assembly, Frame (See Figure 7-66 for breakdown) 1
-25 0000672-01 Washer, Lock 5
-26 0001447-04 Nut, Hex 5

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-93

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-65
Panels & Covers Installation – D and DM Models
(Sheet 1 of 2)

7-94 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-65. Panels & Covers Installation – D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-65- 0002281-01 Panels & Covers Installation – D and DM Models (See Figure 7-2 REF
and Figure 7-3 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000691-02 Cover, Power Box, Top 1
-2 0001262-02 Screw, Phillips, Pan Head with Conical Washer 8
-3 0001972-01 Foam, Low Density 1
-4 0000641-02 Cover, Power Box, Main 1
-5 50661094 Washer, Flat 18
-6 0003039-04 Screw, Pan Head, Phillips 18
-7 0000606-02 Cover, Vent, Frame 1
-8 0000607-02 Skin, Right Panel, Frame 1
-9 0000608-03 Skin, Left Panel, Frame 1
-10 0000611-01 Screw, Truss Head, Phillips 12
-11 0000624-02 Skin, Back Panel, Top, Frame 1
-12 0000625-03 Skin, Back Panel, Bottom, Frame 1
-13 0000615-09 Grommet 2
-14 0001153-05 Nut, Keps, W/Washer 14
-15 50150195 Foot Rest 1
-16 0000498-04 Washer, Flat 2
-17 0000633-09 Screw, Hex Head, W/Washer 2
-18 0002257-01 Cover Assembly, Power Box, Options (See Figure 7-34 for 1
breakdown)
-19 0000681-01 Bottle 1
-20 0001377-03 Wear Washer, Flat 4
-21 0001377-02 Stud, Oval Phillips 4
-22 0001378-02 Retainer Ring 4
-23 0001379-01 Receptacle 4
-24 0000653-01 Front Cover Assembly, Frame (See Figure 7-66 for breakdown) 1

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-95

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

Figure 7-65
Panels & Covers Installation – D and DM Models
(Sheet 2 of 2) - SEE PAGE 7-95 FOR PARTS LIST

7-96 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN
Figure 7-66. Front Cover Assembly, Frame – BASIC, D and DM Models

FIGURE & PART QTY

INDEX NO. NUMBER DESCRIPTION REQ'D
7-66- 0000653-01 Front Cover Assembly, Frame – BASIC, D and DM Models (See REF
Figure 7-64 and Figure 7-65 for next higher assembly)
-1 0000612-01 Cover, Front 1
-2 51100819 Screw, Pan Head 8
-4 0001190-01 Threadlock (Loctite) AR
-5 0001448-01 Roller, Front Cover 8

Figure 7-66
Front Cover Assembly, Frame – BASIC, D and DM Models

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 7-97

ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

7-98 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

SECTION 8
DIAGRAMS
8-1 GENERAL are referenced throughout this manual, as
appropriate.
This section contains schematic diagrams, wiring
diagrams and refrigeration system flow diagrams for 8-2 DIAGRAMS
the Cryo3. These diagrams are intended for use in
the diagnosis and troubleshooting of system Diagrams contained in this section are listed in Table
malfunctions. The diagrams contained in this section 8-1.

Table 8-1. DIAGRAMS

FIGURE TITLE PAGE
Figure 8-0 Wiring Diagram – Overall (in back cover) --
Figure 8-1 Component Locations, Cryo3 Main Controller PCB 8-3
Figure 8-2 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Central Processing Unit (0000387-01 S1) 8-4
Figure 8-3 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Analog Inputs (0000387-01 S2) 8-5
Figure 8-4 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Motor Inputs (0000387-01 S3) 8-6
Figure 8-5 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - General Inputs (0000387-01 S4) 8-7
Figure 8-6 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - User Interface (0000387-01 S5) 8-8
Figure 8-7 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Outputs (Sheet 1) (0000387-01 S6) 8-9
Figure 8-8 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Outputs (Sheet 2) (0000387-01 S7) 8-10
Figure 8-9 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Power Supply (0000387-01 S8) 8-11
Figure 8-10 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Out 6 (0000387-01 S9) 8-12
Figure 8-11 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - AC Inputs (0000387-03 S1) 8-13
Figure 8-12 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Microtome, TEC and Valves (0000387-03 8-14
S2)
Figure 8-13 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Compressor, 24 VDC, Heaters (0000387- 8-15
03 S3)
Figure 8-14 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Opto 22 and Window Lamp (0000387-03 8-16
S4)
Figure 8-15 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Fans and Hardware (0000387-03 S5) 8-17
Figure 8-16 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Electronics (0000387-03 S6) 8-18
Figure 8-17 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Signal Breakout PCBs (0000387-03 S7) 8-19
Figure 8-18 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Cables (Sheet 1) (0000387-03 S8) 8-20
Figure 8-19 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Cables (Sheet 2) (0000387-03 S9) 8-21
Figure 8-20 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Membrane Switches (0000387-03 S10) 8-22
Figure 8-21 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Microtome Breakout PCB (0000387-03 8-23
S11)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-1

DIAGRAMS

Table 8-1. DIAGRAMS

FIGURE TITLE PAGE
Figure 8-22 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Motorized Sectioning (Optional) 8-24
(0000387-03 S12)
Figure 8-23 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Vacuum Debris Removal System 8-25
(Optional) (0000387-03 S13)
Figure 8-24 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Ozone Disinfection System (Sheet 1) 8-26
(Optional) (0000387-03 S14)
Figure 8-25 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Ozone Disinfection System (Sheet 2) 8-27
(Optional) (0000387-03 S15)
Figure 8-26 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Ozone Disinfection System (Sheet 3) 8-28
(Optional) (0000387-03 S16)
Figure 8-27 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Ozone Disinfection System (Sheet 4) 8-29
(Optional) (0000387-03 S17)
Figure 8-28 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Opto 22 (0000387-03 S18) 8-30
Figure 8-29 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Linear Power Supply PCB (0000387-08) 8-31
Figure 8-30 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Pump Speed Control (0000387-09) 8-32
Figure 8-31 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Signal Breakout PCB (0000387-04) 8-33
Figure 8-32 Schematic Diagram, Solenoid Driver Timer - Latching Solenoid Driver (0000387-10 S1) 8-34
Figure 8-33 Schematic Diagram, Solenoid Driver Timer - Ozone Lamp Timer (0000387-10 S2) 8-35
Figure 8-34 Component Locations, Cryo3 User Interface Signal Breakout PCB 8-36
Figure 8-35 Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 User Interface Signal Breakout PCB (0000387-02) 8-37
Figure 8-36 Auto-Disinfection System Plumbing Diagram 8-38
Figure 8-37 Cryo3 Wiring Diagram 8-39

8-2 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-1
Component Locations, Cryo3 Main Controller PCB

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-3

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-2
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Central Processing Unit (0000387-01 S1)

8-4 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-3
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Analog Inputs (0000387-01 S2)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-5

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-4
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Motor Inputs (0000387-01 S3)

8-6 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-5
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - General Inputs (0000387-01 S4)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-7

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-6
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - User Interface (0000387-01 S5)

8-8 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-7
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Outputs (Sheet 1) (0000387-01 S6)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-9

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-8
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Outputs (Sheet 2) (0000387-01 S7)

8-10 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-9
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Power Supply (0000387-01 S8)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-11

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-10
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Controller - Out 6 (0000387-01 S9)

8-12 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-11
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - AC Inputs (0000387-03 S1)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-13

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-12
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Microtome, TEC and Valves (0000387-03 S2)

8-14 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-13
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Compressor, 24 VDC, Heaters (0000387-03 S3)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-15

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-14
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Opto 22 and Window Lamp (0000387-03 S4)

8-16 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-15
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Fans and Hardware (0000387-03 S5)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-17

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-16
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Electronics (0000387-03 S6)

8-18 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-17
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Signal Breakout PCBs (0000387-03 S7)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-19

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-18
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Cables (Sheet 1) (0000387-03 S8)

8-20 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-19
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Cables (Sheet 2) (0000387-03 S9)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-21

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-20
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Membrane Switches (0000387-03 S10)

8-22 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-21
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Microtome Breakout PCB (0000387-03 S11)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-23

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-22
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Motorized Sectioning (Optional) (0000387-03 S12)

8-24 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-23
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Vacuum Debris Removal System (Optional) (0000387-03 S13)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-25

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-24
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Ozone Disinfection System (Sheet 1) (Optional) (0000387-03 S14)

8-26 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-25
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Ozone Disinfection System (Sheet 2) (Optional) (0000387-03 S15)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-27

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-26
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Ozone Disinfection System (Sheet 3) (Optional) (0000387-03 S16)

8-28 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-27
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Ozone Disinfection System (Sheet 4) (Optional) (0000387-03 S17)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-29

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-28
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Electrical Wiring - Opto 22 (0000387-03 S18)

8-30 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-29
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Linear Power Supply PCB (0000387-08)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-31

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-30
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Pump Speed Control (0000387-09)

8-32 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-31
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 Signal Breakout PCB (0000387-04)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-33

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-32
Schematic Diagram, Solenoid Driver Timer - Latching Solenoid Driver (0000387-10 S1)

8-34 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-33
Schematic Diagram, Solenoid Driver Timer - Ozone Lamp Timer (0000387-10 S2)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-35

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-34
Component Locations, Cryo3 User Interface Signal Breakout PCB

8-36 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-35
Schematic Diagram, Cryo3 User Interface Signal Breakout PCB (0000387-02)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-37

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-36
Auto-Disinfection System Plumbing Diagram

8-38 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-37
Cryo3 Wiring Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 8)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-39

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-37
Cryo3 Wiring Diagram
(Sheet 2 of 8)

8-40 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-37
Cryo3 Wiring Diagram
(Sheet 3 of 8)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-41

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-37
Cryo3 Wiring Diagram
(Sheet 4 of 8)

8-42 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-37
Cryo3 Wiring Diagram
(Sheet 5 of 8)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-43

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-37
Cryo3 Wiring Diagram
(Sheet 6 of 8)

8-44 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09

 DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-37
Cryo3 Wiring Diagram
(Sheet 7 of 8)

REV 11JUN09 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA 8-45

DIAGRAMS

Figure 8-37
Cryo3 Wiring Diagram
(Sheet 8 of 8)

8-46 CRYO3 – 115 VAC, USA REV 11JUN09